Skip to main content

Full text of "Greenland: being extracts from a journal kept in that country in the years 1770 to 1778"

See other formats


THE  LIBRARY 

OF 

THE  UNIVERSITY 

OF  CALIFORNIA 

LOS  ANGELES 


% 


GREENLAND: 

BEING 

EXTRACTS  FROM  A  JOURNAL 

KEPT    IN  THAT  COUNTRY 

In  the  Years  1770  to  1778. 

By  HANS  EGEDE  SAABYE, 

Formerly  ordained  Minister  in  the  Districts  of  Claushavn  and  Christianshaab 
now  Minister  of  Udbye,  in  the  Bishopric  of  Fuhnen  ;  and 

GRANDSON  OF  THE  CELEBRATED  HANS  EGEDE. 
(JBofo  first  juHteTjeD.) 


TO   WHICH    1$   PREFIXED, 

AN    INTRODUCTION; 

CONTAINING   SOME 

ACCOUNTS  OF  THE  MANNERS  OF  THE  GREENLANDERS, 

AND   OF   THE 

iWtsston  in  <£reenlantr; 

WITH    VARIOUS   INTERESTING    INFORMATION    RESPECTING 
THE   GEOGRAPHY,   SfC.   OF   THAT   COUNTRY; 

And  illustrated  by  a 

CHART  OF  GREENLAND, 
By  G.   FRIES. 

SECOND  EDITION. 

TRANSLATED  FROM  THE  GERMAN. 

Honfton : 

PRINTED    FOR   BOOSEY    AND    SONS, 
4,  Broad  Street,  Royal  Exchange. 

1818. 


J  Junes  Compton,  Printer,  Middle  Street, 
Cloth  Fair,  London. 


& 

HO 
S  H  a  '£ 

AT  a  time  when  the  British   Government 
ever  laudably  attentive  to  the  interests  of  Science, 
have  been  induced,  by  the  remarkable  disappear- 
ance of  the  ice  in  the  high  northern  latitudes,  tc 
send  out  two  Expeditions  towards  the  North  Pole 
the  attention  of  the  Public  is  naturally  turned  to 
the  countries  likely  to  be  visited  on  this  occasion  : 
Greenland,  in  particular,  excites  peculiar  interest, 
from  the  expectation  of  re-discovering  the  Bast 
Coast  of  that  country,  which  has  been  inacces 
sible  for  four  centuries. 

The  Work,  ofivhich  the  following  is  a  trans- 
lation, has  been  received  with  such  remarkable 
favor  in  Denmark  and  Germany,  that  there  can 
be  no  doubt  of  its  being  peculiarly  acceptable, 
under  the  present  circumstances,  to  the  British 
Reader.  Were  not  the  name  itself  of  the  venera- 
ble Author  a  sufficient  pledge  of  the  authenticity 
of  his  statements,  it  may  be  safely  affirmed,  that 
his  Journal  bears,  in  every  page,  the  stamp  of 


e^w/so** 


IV 

truth      The  circumstances  which  have  led  to  the 
publication,  are  singularly   honorable   to   him. 
The  Bishop  of  Fuhnen,    Dr.    Plum,    being 
on  a  visitation  of  his  diocese,  in   a  parish  of 
which  our  Author  is  minister,  ivas  naturally  led 
to  converse  with  him  on  the  subject  of  his  resi- 
dence in  Greenland.     This  induced  him  to  take 
from  his  desk  his  Journal  kept  in  that  country, 
which  his  modesty  had  suffered  to  lie  neglected 
for  so  many  years.     The  Bishop  was  so  struck 
with  the  unaffected  simplicity  of  the  narrative, 
and  the  interesting  accounts  which  it  contains  of 
the  manners  of  the  inhabitants,  that  he  pressed 
the  venerable  Author  to  have  it  published.     The 
Bishop  has  prefixed  to  the  Danish  original,  a 
letter  to  the  Privy  Counsellor,  Von  Bulow,  who 
enjoys  the  highest  esteem  in  Denmark,  on  ac- 
count of  his  liberal  patronage  of  the  Arts  and 
Sciences ;  and  tvho  has,  on  this  occasion,  done  a 
new  service  to  Literature,  by  defraying  all  the 
expenses  of  the  publication  of  the  original. 

Though  many  persons  have,  doubtless,  a  gene- 
ral acquaintance  with  the  c/taracter  and  mode  of 


living  of  the  Greenlanders,  yet  such  as  have 
not,  would  not  receive  from  this  Work  all  the 
pleasure  it  is  capable  of  affording.  The  Ger- 
man Editor,  3//*.  Fries,  has  therefore  prefixed 
avaluable  Introduction,  in  which  he  not  only 
gives  a  general  vieio  of  the  Country  and  its  In- 
habitants, but  adds  from  the  latest  authorities,  and 
from  the  accounts  which  have  been  communicated 
to  him  by  persons  who  have  lately  visited  Green- 
land, various  interesting  particulars  respecting 
the  Geography,  tyc,  which  ivould  be  in  vain 
sought  for  elsewhere. 

The  very  neat  Map  with  which  this  Edition 
is  enriched,  will  be  highly  acceptable ;  and  our 
Readers  will  not  fail  to  remark  the  Inlet  dis- 
covered by  Capt,  Volquard  Boon,  on  the  East 
Coast,  of  which  an  account  is  given  in  the 
first  note  to  the  first  Chapter  of  the  Journal. 

Tlie  Translator  has  only  to  add  the  wish,  that 
the  Work  may  experience,  in  an  English  dress, 
the  approbation  which  has  been  universally  be- 
stowed upon  it  on  the  Continent. 

H.  E.  Lloyd. 


VI 


N.  J3. — The  miles  mentioned  in  the  follow- 
ing pages  are  German  miles,  equal  to   about 
four  and  a  half  English  miles.     The  ells  are 
Danish  ells,  of  two  feet  English,  nearly. 


Contents* 

Page. 

Introduction. i — 97 

Chap.  I. 
The  Isefjord,  in  Disco  Bay 9S 

Chap.  II. 
The  Mission  at  Claushavn  is  extended 107 

Chap.  III. 
It  is  still  possible  to  come  to  the  East  Side  of  Greenland .   Ill 

Chap.  IV. 
The  Polygamist 122 

Chap.  V. 
Greenland  Courtship 127 

Chap.  VI. 
The  Baptism  of  a  Catechumen 139 

Chap.  VII. 
Some  Journics 140 

Chap.  VIII. 
Some  Particulars  of  our  Trade  with  the  Greenlanders  ...  160 

Chap.  IX. 
The  Wedding 1 6s 

Chap.  X. 
Sequel  to  the  preceeding  Chapter. 177 

Chap.  XI. 
The  Child  Saved 181 

Chap.  XII. 
Witchcraft 185 

Chap.  XIII. 
The  Whale  found 190 


CONTENTS. 

Chap.  XIV. 

Some  characteristic  Features 195 

Chap.  XV. 
The  severe  Winter 206 

Chap.  XVI. 
The  Mode  of  Instruction 209 

Chap.  XVII. 
Some  Cures 218 

Chap.  XV11I. 
The  Avenger  of  his  Father,  or  the  Triumph  of  Religion . .  225 

Chap.  XIX. 

The  Heathens  kill  Witches 238 

Chap.  XX. 
Religion  and  Superstition  of  the  Greenlanders 243 

Chap.  XXI. 
The  Domestic  Life  of  the  Greenlanders. 249 

Chap.  XXII. 
The  Education  of  the  Greenlanders 259 

Chap.  XXIII. 
Miscellaneous  Information .......... ( • ••»••*».  26*4 


INTRODUCTION, 


J.  HE  Greenlanders  are,  in  general,  of  a  mid- 
dle size,  but  not  of  so  small  a  stature  as  is  ge- 
nerally imagined,1  fleshy  and  well  formed,  of 
a  rather  dark  colour,  have  almost  all  black 
hair,  and  broad  flat  faces.  In  respect  to  bodily 
strength,  they  are  inferior  to  the  Europeans  in 
violent  exertion  and  hard  labour,  but  they 
can,  by  practice,  become  accustomed  to  carry 
weights  on  their  heads,  which  an  European 
would  find  much  difficulty  in  doing :  a  Green- 
lander  carries,  for  instance,  his  Kajak,  and  a 
Greenland  woman  a  reindeer,  a  long  way  on 
the  head2  without  difficulty.  What  they  want 
in  bodily  strength  they  gain  in  dexterity  :  for 

(1)  Only  in  the  roost  northern  part  of  Greenland  the  inha- 
bitants may  be  all  very  short ;  in  the  other  parts  they  are  of 
a  common  middle  size  :  there  are  also  some  tall  people  among 
them,  who  are  more  frequently  found  the  farther  We  proceed 
to  the  south,  which  indicates  a  mixture  with  the  remains  of 
the  extirpated  Norwegians  and  Icelanders. 

(2)  The  Greenlander  carries,  besides,  his  hunting  utensil."  in 
his  hand,  and  his  gun  upon  his  shoulder. 

B 


2 
instance,  they  climb  up  rocks  with  uncommon 
agility,  and  jump  with  great  facility,  when 
the  ice  breaks  under  them,  from  one  piece  to 
another,  and  their  dogs  fall  into  the  water. 
The  men  have,  for  the  most  part,  no  beard, 
either  because  Nature  refuses  it,  or  because  they 
pluck  it  out  at  its  first  appearance. 

In  winter  the  Greenlanders  live  in  houses, 
and  in  summer  in  tents.  The  houses  are  from 
eight  to  ten  ells  (in  the  clear)  broad  or  deep, 
about  fifty  ells  long  (according  to  the  number 
of  families  who  inhabit  them),  and  only  high 
enough  for  a  person  to  stand  upright  :  they  are 
generally  on  elevated  places,  that  the  snow- 
.  water  may  run  off  the  better,  but  not  far  from 
the  shore,  as  the  Greenlander  must  live  by  the 
sea.  The  wall  is  several  ells  thick,  and  consists 
of  great  stones,  between  which  earth  and  moss 
are  laid.  On  the  wall  rests,  in  the  length,  a 
beam,  which  is  supported  by  posts  ;  if  it  is  not 
long  enough,  it  is  made  of  several  pieces  tied 
together  with  thongs.  Upon  this  beam  cross 
rafters  are  laid,  between  them  small  wood,  and 
over  that  heath ;  upon  this  is  laid  a  bed  of 
turf,  which  is  strewed  over  with  fine  earth  ;  the 
whole  is  covered  with  old  boat  or  tent  skins : 
on  the  inside,  the  walls  are  lined  with  skins,  to 


s 

keep  out  the  wet.  From  about  the  middle  of 
the  house  to  the  wall  there  is  fixed,  lengthwise, 
a  bench  made  of  boards ;  it  is  about  half  an 
ell  from  the  ground,  covered  with  skins3,  and 
divided  by  means  of  the  posts  which  support 
the  roof,  and  by  skins  which  are  extended  to 
the  wall.  Every  family,  of  which  there  gene- 
rally live  two  or  three,  and  sometimes  from 
four  to  ten,  in  such  a  house,  occupies  one  of 
these  divisions.  This  bench  serves  the  inha- 
bitants of  the  house  by  day,  for  a  table  and 
seats  (the  men   generally  sit  with  their  legs 

hanging    down    and    the   women    cross-legged 

on  it),  and  by  night  for  a  bedstead ;  they 
sleep*  upon  them  covered  with  quilts  made  of 
skins,  and  with  their  feet  turned  towards  the 
wall  ;  but  it  is  the  custom,  at  least  in  Disco 
Bay,  and  in  general  in  the  north  of  Green- 
land, for  married  people,  particularly  if  they 
are  young,  to  have  their  sleeping  place  under 
the  bench5.     On  the  other  side  of  the  house, 

(3)  Under  the  skins  there  is  usually  a  thin  layer  of  grasj 
or  moss. 

(4)  Their  clothes  rolled  together  serve  them  for  pillows. 
Sometimes,  but  seldom,  they  have  a  pillow  of  skins,  stuffed 
with  grass  or  moss.  y^ 

(5)  That  this  custom,  which  the  author  mentions  in 
Chap.  XX,  prevails  in  North  Greenland,  is  beyond  all  doubt. 


4 
where  the  entrance  is,  there  are  some  square 
windows,  made  of  entrails  neatly  sewed  toge- 
ther, about  an  ell  each  way,  and  so  close,  that 
neither  snow  nor  rain   can  penetrate,  yet  the 
light  shines  through  pretty  well.     Under  the 
windows   there    is,   on  the   inside,    a  narrow 
bench,  upon  which  strangers  sit  and  sleep ; 
and   at  the  ends  of  the   house   is  a  broader 
bench,  extending  from  the  sleeping  place  to 
the  narrow  bench  abovementioned.     At  every 
post  is  a  fire-place,   consisting   of  a  wooden 
block  covered  with  flat  stones  ;  on  it  stands  a 
low  Stool  with  three  feet,  and  upon  that  a  lamp, 
nearly  in  the  shape  of  a  half  moon,  cut  out  of 
talc,   but  under  this,  an  oval  wooden  vessel  to 
catch  the  train  oil  which  runs  over.     In  this 
lamp,   which  is  filled  with   seal's   fat  or  fresh 
train  oil6,   some  moss  is   laid  on  the  straight 
side,  which  burns  so  clear  that  the  house  is 

In  the  south  of  Greenland  it  is  perhaps  otherwise ;  I  have  not 
been  ahle  to  learu  any  thing  certain  upon  the  subject,  but  I 
Have  heard  from  many  persons  who  have  long  resided  in 
North  Greenland,  the  conjecture  that  this  custom  prevails  over 

the  whole  country. 

(G)  The  train  oil  which  the    Greenlanders  burn  in  their 

lamps  ib  not  boiled  ;  but  the  blubber,  in  the  warmth,  dissolves 

of  itself  into  train  oil:  hence  it  does  not  give  such  a  smell  as 

our  train  or  coarser  sorts  of  oil. 


5 
sufficiently  lighted  by  it,  and  even  warmed. 
Over  this  lamp  there  hangs  a  kettle,  also  of 
talc,  in  which  the  food  is  boiled  ;  this  kettle 
is  of  an  oval  form,  flat  and  narrow  at  the  bot- 
tom, and  broader  at  top,  and  hangs  to  the 
beam  by  four  strings.  Over  the  kettle  is 
a  wooden  horse,  to  dry  clothes  and  boots. 
As  there  are  always  several  fire-places  in  each 
house  (but  without  the  smallest  danger  of  fire), 
upon  which  one  or  more  lamps  burn  day  and 
night,  these  houses  are  kept  so  extremely  warm, 
that  the  Greenlanders  at  home  go  almost 
naked7,  and  often  take  rpfug-e  unHer  the  sleep- 
ing place,  because  the  heat  is  too  great  for 
them.  These  houses  have  no  chimnies,  which, 
as  no  smoke  is  perceived  in  them,  would  be 
useless ;  in  general  they  have  no  doors  ;  the 
place  of  both  is,  in  some  measure,  supplied  by 
the  entrance  in  the  middle  of  the  house.  This 
entrance,  which  is  commonly  towards  the  sea 
side,  is  a  covered  passage  of  stones  and  earth, 
built  on  the  long  side  of  the  house,  about  six 
or  eight  ells  in  length,  and  at  the  same  time 
so  low,  that  (especially  before  and  behind, 
where  you  descend  into  it)  you  must  go  more 

(7)  They  have  only  short  brcecbe*  "n. 


6 
upon  the  hands  and  feet,  than  stooping".  This 
long-  passage  keeps  out  the  cold  so  well,  that 
the  heat  is  almost  intolerable  to  an  European. 
The  dense  air  goes  out,  indeed,  through  this 
opening-  5  but  an  European  can  scarcely  endure 
the  smell  of  the  quantity  of  often  half  putrid 
meat  which  is  boiled  over  these  lamps,  also  of 
other  uncleanliness,  particularly  of  the  urine- 
vessels,  which  generally  stand  near  the  en- 
trance, and  in  which  skins  are  softened  for 
tanning-.  The  Danes  often  have  doors  at  the 
end,  and  also  a  fire-place  near  the  passage, 
where  they  dress  their  food  in  copper  or  brass 
kettles  over  a  coal  fire  ;  but  over  the  lamps 
they  always  use  kettles  of  talc. 

Near  their  habitation  the  Greenlanders  have 

little  store-houses  like  ovens,  built  of  stone,  in 

which  they  keep  meat,  blubber,  dried  fish,  and 

the  like.      What  they  catch  in  winter  they 

preserve  under  the  snow.     Near  the  dwellings 

are  their  boats  turned  upside  down,  and  placed 

on    posts,    and    underneath  they    hang   their 

hunting-  utensils  and  skins.     In  September  the 

Greenlanders  build  their  houses,  or  repair  them, 

go  into  them  about  Michaelmas ;  and  in  March, 

April,  or  May,  sooner  or  later,  according  as 

the  snow  melts  and  threatens  to  penetrate  their 


7 
roofs,  they  joyfully  leave  them,  and  then  live 
in  tents.  Every  where  on  the  coast  we  meet 
with  houses,  and  if  we  might  estimate  the  num- 
ber of  inhabitants  by  that  of  the  houses,  in 
which  very  often  about  fifty  persons  live, 
Greenland  must  be  a  very  populous  country. 
But  the  Greenlanders  love  a  roving  life,  and 
generally  wander  about  the  country  all  the 
summer.  If  a  company  is  overtaken  by  win- 
ter, or  where  they  think  fit  to  pass  that  season, 
they  build  houses,  if  they  do  not  find  any  ; 
and  a  house  which  has  been  inhabited  one 
winter,  may  stand  empty  many  years,  till  ano- 
ther party  thinks  fit  to  take  up  its  residence 
in  it. 

The  tents  are  of  two  kinds ;  namely,  fixed, 
that  is,  such  as  form  a  fixed  summer  residence, 
and  such  as  the  Greenlanders  set  up  on  their 
journies,  and  which  often  stand  only  from  the 
evening  to  the  morning,  or,  at  least,  but  a 
short  time ;  they  are,  therefore,  travelling 
tents8.  In  the  first,  the  interior,  which  is  nearly 
oval,  is  surrounded  with  a  wall  of  stones  and 
earth,  of  half  the  height  of  a  man.     In  front, 

(8)  The  following  description  of  a  tent,  which,  in  many 
respects,  is  very  different  from  that  given  by  Cranz  and  others 
sifter  him,  is  drawn  up  from  a  model  made  in  Greenland. 


8 
where  the  entrance  is,  two  long"  posts  are  fixed 
in  the  ground,  a  little  above  the  height  of  a 
man,  so  that  they  lean  a  little  towards  the 
inside  of  the  tent  :  these  posts  are  joined  to- 
g-ether by  a  cross  beam,  and  form  the  door- 
way. Upon  this  crossbeam,  and  on  the  wall, 
is  placed,  first,  the  main  pole  of  the  tent,  which 
is  a  little  thicker  than  the  other  tent  poles,  and, 
if  the  owner  of  the  tent  is  opulent,  adorned  at 
the  top  with  a  ball,  painted  red  :  the  upper 
end  of  this  pole  rises  a  little  above  the  tent. 
Besides  this,   there  are   at  least  eight  or   ten 

poles,  which  are  laid    in    a  diverging"  direction 

upon  the  wall,  and  bound  fast  to  the  cross 
beam.  The  two  outermost  poles  are  laid  in 
the  continued  direction  of  the  cross  beam,  and, 
as  they  would  not  have  a  firm  resting  place  on 
the  cross  beam,  they  are  put  through  a  strap 
nailed  upon  it.  Before  the  door-way  there 
hangs  a  kind  of  curtain  of  thin  entrails,  bor- 
dered with  red  or  blue  cloth  and  white  ribands ; 
it  keeps  out  the  cold  air,  but  admits  sufficient 
light.  Before  the  entrance,  two  lower  posts 
are  fixed  in  the  ground,  which  are  also  united 
by  a  cross  beam.  Two  pretty  heavy  poles  lie 
with  one  end  on  this  cross  beam  ;  the  other  end 
of  them  is  joined  by  a  leather  strap  as  long-  as 


9 
the  door-way  is  broad,  which  strap  lies  behind 
the  door-way,  upon  the  tent  poles  :  these  two 
poles  serve  to  hang-  meat,  boots,  &c.  upon. 
On  the  tent  poles,  which  inclose  a  space 
nearly  in  the  shape  of  half  an  obtuse  cone, 
they  lay  a  cover  of  seal  skins,  sewed  tog-ether 
with  the  hair  inside,  and  over  this  a  second 
cover  of  the  same  kind.  The  first,  which  the 
rich  often  have  double,  and  in  this  case,  the 
inner  one  sometimes  of  reindeer  skins,  covers 
only  the  inner  part  of  the  tent,  but  the  latter 
extends  a  good  way  over,  and  forms,  as  it 
were,  the  external  house,  where  provisions,  and 
the  vessels  which  smell  offensively  are  kept. 
If  it  rains,  the  hairy  side  of  the  external  cover 
is  turned  out,  that  the  rain  may  run  off  the 
better  ;  but,  if  the  sun  shines,  the  fleshy  side  is 
turned  outwards,  that  the  heat  of  the  sun  may 
not  loosen  the  hair.  The  lower  edge  of  the 
cover  is  lined  with  moss,  and  kept  down  with 
large  stones,  that  the  wind  may  not  lift  up 
the  tent.  In  windy  weather  a  piece  of  seal 
skin  is  fastened,  on  the  windward  side,  to  the 
frame-work  standing  before  the  entrance.  The 
sleeping-bench  is  like  that  used  in  bouses ; 
the  foundation  consists  of  blocks,  every  two  of 
which  are  joined  by  a  thick  board  nailed  over 

c 


10 
them.  Upon  this  foundation  lie  boards,  and 
upon  them  a  carpet  of  seal  skins :  this  bench 
reaches  to  the  back  wall  of  the  tent,  towards 
which  the  inhabitants  turn  their  feet  when  they 
sleep.  Before  the  bench  stand  the  lamps,  over 
which  they  seldom  cook  ;  this  is  generally 
done,  in  summer,  in  the  open  air,  with  wood, 
and  in  copper  or  brass  kettles. 

Every  family  has  generally  its  own  tent, 
yet  two  families  often  live  together,  and  the 
owners  sometimes  take  in  some  of  their  poor 
relations,  so  that  not  unfrequently  twenty 
people  live  in  such  a  tent.  In  the  corners  of 
the  tent,  the  mistress  of  the  house,  who  shews 
all  her  ornaments  only  in  summer,  keeps  her 
furniture,  and  hangs  before  it  a  curtain  of  white 
leather,  stitched  with  all  kinds  of  figures,  and 
fastens  to  it  her  looking-glass,  ribands,  and 
pincushions.  Every  thing  is  much  cleaner  in 
the  tents  than  in  the  houses ;  and,  conse- 
quently, the  abode  in  them  is  much  more 
tolerable  for  an  European.  The  travelling 
tents  differ  from  the  fixed  tents  in  having  no 
wall,  but  the  lower  ends  of  the  poles  rest  on 
the  ground. 

The  dresses  of  the  Greenlanders  are  made 
of  the  skins  of  reindeer,  seals,  and  birds.     The 


11 

coat  or  cloak,  generally  of  seal  skin,  is  not 
open  in  front,  but  sewed  on  all  sides  down  to 
the  knee  (for  which  reason  they  put  it  over 
their  heads  after  they  have  put  their  arms 
through  it),  and  provided  with  a  hood  which 
they  draw  over  their  heads  in  cold  or  wet  wea- 
ther. The  breeches  are  made  of  seal  skin,  or 
of  a  thin-haired  reindeer  skin,  and  are  short  at 
the  top  and  bottom  ;  the  stockings  are  of  the 
smooth  skin  of  a  young*  seal  j  the  shoes,  of 
smooth  black  tanned  seal  skin  leather,  are  tied 
at  the  top  with  a  strap  drawn  through  the  soles, 
have  no  heels,  and  the  soles  project  nearly  two 
fingers'  breadth  before  and  behind  ;  the  boots, 
which  have  the  seam  before,  are  made  in  the 
same  manner  :  dry  grass  is  put  in  the  shoes  and 
boots  to  keep  the  feet  dry  and  warm.  The 
skins  of  birds  serve  the  Greenlander  for  shirts  ; 
they  wear  the  feathers  inwards  ;  they  also  wear 
the  reindeer's  skin  with  the  hair  inside,  and 
sometimes  over  this  a  cloak  of  thin-haired 
reindeer  skins  :  these  skins  are  now  very  rare. 
The  cloaks  and  breeches  are  generally  rough  : 
it  is  only  in  summer,  and  when  he  means  to  be 
fine,  that  the  Greenlander  has  on  a  smooth 
cloak  and  breeches,  the  seams  of  which  are 
trimmed  with  several  narrow  and  broad  strips 


12 
of  red  and  white  dog's  leather.  The  men  are 
often  seen  in  the  dress  of  Danish  sailors  ;  the 
women,  on  the  contrary,  keep  to  their  national 
dress,  except  those  who  are  married  to  Danes. 
The  men  wear  their  cloaks  shorter  in  summer 
and  longer  in  winter  ;  they  reach  about  half 
way  down  the  thigh,  and  hang  loose.  The 
breeches  reach  down  to  the  knee,  but  longer  in 
winter,  when  they  are  laced  over  the  boots. 
The  stockings,  which  reach  to  the  breeches, 
are  trimmed  at  the  top  with  fur.  When  the 
men  are  at  sea,  they  put  on  a  water-proof  coat, 
of  smooth  black  seal  skin  leather,  and  under 
this  cloak,  and  over  the  clothes,  sometimes  a 
frock  made  of  entrails,  the  better  to  keep  them 
warm  and  dry.  The  dress  of  the  women  differs 
but  little  from  that  of  the  men,  only  that  the 
cloak  has  a  longer  hood,  and  in  summer  shorter 
sleeves,  is  not  cut  short  off,  but  has  a  flap  be- 
hind and  before  hanging  down  from  the  hips, 
and  fits  rather  closer  ;  the  breeches  are  a  little 
shorter,  and  the  stockings,  on  the  contrary, 
longer,  and,  on  the  whole,  they  are  more  orna- 
mented :  thus,  the  sleeves  are  not  only  trimmed 
round  the  edges,  but  have  many  stripes  length- 
wise •,  the  edge  of  the  cloak  is  often  trimmed 
with  seven  narrow  and  broad  stripes  of  co- 


13 
loured  leather,  of  rough  seal  skin,  and  at  the 
bottom  of  red  or  blue  cloth,  besides  a  garland 
(for  so  1  must  express  it)  of  coloured  glass 
beads.  They  like  to  have  the  shoes  and  boots 
of  white,  yellow,  or  red  leather,  the  seams 
neatly  sewed,  and  often  set  with  glass  beads. 
Mothers  and  nurses  wear  a  cloak  which  is  so 
large  that  they  can  wrap  up  the  child  in  it 
(which  never  has  a  cradle  or  swaddling  clothes, 
and  is  generally  quite  naked)  :  that  it  may  not 
fall  through,  they  bind  the  cloak  fast  round 
the  body  with  a  girdle,  which  is  provided  in 
front  with  a  buckle  or  buttons. 

The  men  wear  their  hair  short,  hanging 
down  on  all  sides,  and  cut  off  before  ;  the 
women,  on  the  contrary,  do  not  cut  it  (except 
in  the  deepest  mourning,  and  when  they  are 
resolved  not  to  marry),  but  bind  it  together 
over  the  crown  of  the  head,  in  a  great  tuft, 
over  which  there  is  a  smaller  one  •,  for  this  they 
like  to  use  a  handsome  riband,  which  is  often 
ornamented  with  glass  beads.  The  rich  some- 
times tie  a  cotton  or  silk  handkerchief  round 
the  forehead,  but  in  such  a  manner  that  the 
tuft  of  hair,  as  the  greater  ornament,  is  not 
covered.  In  ancient  times,  the  women,  to  be 
quite  handsome,  were  tattooed  :  the   mother 


14 
performed  this  operation  on  her  daughter,  al- 
ready in  her  childhood,  for  fear  she  should  not 
get  a  husband  ;  she  stitched  the  skin  of  the 
face,  hands,  and  feet,  with  a  thread  made  black 
with  soot,  so  that  when  the  thread  was  drawn 
through,  the  soot  remained  behind  in  the  skin. 
Traces  of  this  almost  obsolete  custom  are  now 
but  seldom  found,  and  that  in  old  women. 
The  men  sometimes  let  their  beard  grow, 
which,  as  we  have  said,  is  very  thin  ;  some- 
times they  pluck  it  out  with  a  knife. 

Reindeer  flesh  is  the  favourite  food  of  the 
Greenlanders,  but  they  do  not  often  get  it  ; 
because,  since  they  have  obtained  fire-arms,  the 
reindeer  are  become  more  scarce.  Their  best 
food  is,  therefore,  the  flesh  of  sea  animals,  fish 
and  fowl,  particularly  that  of  seals :  they  do 
not  care  much  about  land  birds  and  hares. 
They  eat  some  kinds  of  berries,  roots,  and 
herbs,  as  also  sweet  sea-weed,  but  the  first  more 
for  refreshment  than  nourishment,  and  the 
latter  (except  one  kind,  which  is  taken  as  a 
refreshment)  only  if  they  are  not  provided  with 
other  food.  A  kind  of  smelt,  dried  in  the  open 
air,  serves  the  Greenlanders  for  bread  and  ve- 
getables: they  catch  this  fish  in  May  and 
June,  when  they   are  so   plentiful   that  they 


15 
catch  whole  boats  full  in  a  few  hours,  and 
preserve  them  in  leather  bags  for  winter  pro- 
vision. In  the  summer  they  preserve  the  heads 
and  leg's  of  the  seals  under  the  grass,  and  whole 
seals  under  the  snow  in  winter  :  the  flesh  thus 
frozen  and  half  corrupted  they  call  Mikkiak, 
and  eat  it  with  great  appetite.  They  boil  the 
rest  of  the  seal's  flesh,  as  well  as  the  flesh  of  the 
white  fish9  and  other  sea  animals,  also  sea 
birds  and  small  fish  ;  but  they  cut  the  larger 
fish,  as  hollibut,  cod,  &c.,  in  narrow  strips, 
which  are  dried  in  the  sun  and  eaten  raw. 
They  eat  the  entrails  of  smaller  animals  without 
cleaning  them,  any  farther  than  by  squeezing 
them  with  their  fingers.  What  is  found  in  the 
stomach  of  the  reindeer,  as  well  as  in  the  en- 
trails of  the  snow- fowl,  mixed  with  fresh  train 
oil  and  berries,  they  think  a  great  delicacy. 
Bears'  flesh,  and  the  tail  and  skin  of  whales, 
are  also  among  their  favourite  dishes  :  it  is 
only  in  case  of  need  that  they  eat  the  rest  of 
the  whale.  Fresh,  rotten,  and  half-hatched 
eggs,  bilberries,  and  Angelica,  they  preserve 
for  winter  refreshment  in  a  sack  of  seal's  lea- 
ther, filled  with  train  oil.     It  appears,   there- 

(9)  A  smaller  kind  of  whale. 


16 
fore,  that  train  oil  serves  them  to  preserve  their 
food,  but  they  do  not  take  it  in  any  other 
manner  ;  neither  do  they  take  blubber,  unless 
it  be  a  little  bit  to  the  dry  smelt.  Fresh  meat 
also  is  not  eaten  raw,  except  they  are  out  in 
the  chase,  or  are  in  want  of  vessels  or  time  to 
dress  it.  Their  beverage  is  water,  and,  that  it 
may  be  the  cooler,  they  like  to  put  ice  or  snow 
into  it. 

The  boats  of  the  Greenlanders  consist  of  a 
light  frame-work  of  wood,  which  is  covered 
with  seals'  skin.  These  leather  boats10  are  of 
two  sorts  ;  namely,  smaller  ones  for  one  man, 
which  are  principally  used  in  the  chase  of  seals, 
and  larger  ones,  which  are  destined  for  the 
conveyance  of  goods,  and  for  the  women. 
The  little  boat,  Kajak,  or  men's  boat,  is  from 
eight  to  nine  ells  long,  pointed  behind  and 
before,  about  three-fourths  of  an  ell  broad  in 
the  middle,  and  scarcely  half  an  ell  deep.  On 
the  light  keel  lie  thin  cross  laths,  on  which 

(10)  The  following  remark  of  Professor  B.  Thorlacius  in 
his  History  of  Thorail,  called  Orra-heens  Stepson,  where 
the  Greenland  bouts  are  spoken  of,  may  perhaps  be  interest- 
ing to  the  philologer.  In  the  ancient  Scandinavian  language 
these  leather  boats  are  called  hudkeipr,  from  hud  (cutis),  hide 
or  skin,  and  from  keipr,  num,  rower's  bench.  We  fiud  in 
Cicero,  epicopus,  a  little  fishing  boat. 


17 
stand  two  slight  boards  that  form  the  sides  of 
the  Kajak,  and  on  these  again  light  cross 
pieces.  This  frame-work  is  connected  by 
whalebone,  and  the  whole  boat  is,  on  all  sides, 
both  above  and  below,  covered  with  seal  skins. 
The  two  sharp  pointed  ends,  which  rise  a  little, 
are  furnished,  to  render  them  more  durable, 
with  slips  of  bone,  and  the  points  have  also  a 
bone  head.  In  the  middle  of  the  Kajak  is  a 
round  opening,  into  which  the  Greenlander 
slips,  and  seats  himself  on  the  laths,  which  are 
covered  with  soft  skins,  and  draws  the  bottom 
of  his  water-proof  cloak,  which  is  bound  tight 
round  the  neck  and  hands,  so  fast  about  a  hoop 
of  wood  or  bone,  which  rises  two  fingers 
above  the  opening,  that  no  water  can  enter. 
The  oar  is  of  tough  wood,  about  three  ells 
long ;  has  at  each  end  a  thin  blade  three  fingers 
broad,  edged  with  bone.  The  Greenlander 
takes  this  oar  in  the  middle,  with  both  hands, 
strikes  the  water  on  each  side,  and  can  in  this 
manner  row  ten  or  twelve  miles,  and  even 
more,  in  one  day.  He  is  not  much  afraid  of 
a  storm  in  his  Kajak,  for,  as  long  as  a  ship  can 
carry  her  topsail,  he  swims  like  a  sea-bird 
over  the  billows,  and,  if  a  wave  dashes  over 
him,  he    soon   appears    again.      If    a   wave 

D 


18 
threatens  to  upset  him,  he  supports  himself  by- 
means  of  his  oar  ;  and,  if  he  does  upset,  he 
makes  a  stroke  with  it  under  the  water,  and 
rig-hts  himself  again.  But  it  is  not  every 
Greenlander  that  can  attain  this  degree  of  skill, 
and  many  a  one  loses  his  life  when  he  upsets. 
If  he  loses  his  oar,  he  generally  perishes,  unless 
there  be  somebody  very  near  who  can  render 
him  assistance.  The  Europeans  hardly  ever 
learn  to  row  the  Kajak,  at  the  most  only  in 
calm  weather,  and  where  there  are  no  waves  : 
this  skill  must  be  attained  in  youth. 

The  great  boat,  Umiak,  or  women's  boat, 
is  from  fourteen  to  eighteen  ells  in  length,  and 
even  longer  ;  about  two  or  two  and  a  half  ells 
broad,  and,  in  the  middle,  one  and  a  half  ell 
deep  ;  pointed  behind  and  before,  and  flat11  at 
the  bottom.  The  frame-work  consists  of  light 
laths,  about  three  fingers  broad  ;  on  the  keel, 
cross  pieces  lie  in  grooves,  and  upon  these,  on 
both  sides  of  the  keel,  two  laths  in  the  form  of 
a  bow,  which,  at  the  stem  and  stern,  meet  the 

( 1 1 )  It  is,  however,  not  always  quite  flat,  any  more  than  the 
Kajak  ;  for  the  keel  goes,  in  some  of  them,  deeper  by  its  whole 
thickness  than  the  lower  edge  of  the  sides  of  the  boat,  so  that 
the  skin,  stretched  over  the  keel,  forms  an  angle,  though  a 
very  obtuse  one. 


19 
keel,  and  form  the  lower  edge  of  the  sides  of 
the  boat :  on  these  two  side  laths,  posts  are 
fixed,  which  are  let  into  the  upper  board  of 
the  boat,  which  is  something-  higher  at  both 
ends,  and  they  stand  rather  wider  apart  above, 
which  makes  the  boat  broader  at  the  top  than 
at  the  bottom.  Through  these  posts,  on  both 
sides,  there  passes  a  lath,  parallel  with  the 
lower  edge,  a  full  ell  above  it,  from  stem  to 
stern  ;  on  this  lath  lie  the  rowers*  benches, 
which  are  from  eight  to  twelve  in  number, 
according  to  the  length  of  the  boat.  The 
laths,  which  form  the  upper  edge,  project 
before  and  behind  about  two  ells  ;  these  ends, 
which  are  generally  united  behind  by  a  cross 
bar,  serve  as  handles  to  bring  the  boat  on 
shore,  &c.12  Behind  is  a  little  bench  for  the 
steersman  ;  and  in  front  a  kind  of  staple, 
through  which  a  pole,  with  a  sail  spread  on  it, 
may  be  put.  This  frame,  the  parts  of  which 
are  every  where  joined  together  with  whale- 
bone, and  partly  with  wooden  pegs  (iron  nails 
would  rust,  and  the  rust  would  eat  away  the 
skin  which  covers  the  boat),  is  covered  at  the 
bottom  and  sides  with  seal  leather.     The  oars 

(12)  The  inferior  boats  of  the  women    have  not  these 
handles. 


20 
are  short,  with  broad  blades,  which  are  set 
round  with  bone  and  fastened  with  straps  to 
the  edge  of  the  boat.  The  sail  is  usually  made 
of  entrails  sewed  tog-ether,  or  sometimes  of 
linen,  and  can  only  be  used  to  sail  before  the 
wind  :  the  yard  is  fixed  at  right  angles  to  the 
abovementioned  pole.  In  these  boats,  which 
are  rowed  by  women  (in  general  four),  the 
Greenlanders  remove,  with  their  tents,  house- 
hold furniture,  and  all  their  property,  100  or 
200  miles  to  the  north  and  south.  The  men 
row  beside  it  in  the  Kajak,  and  with  this  pro- 
tect the  boat  from  large  waves  ;  and,  in  case 
of  need,  keep  it  upright  by  taking  hold  of  the 
side.  In  such  a  boat,  that  is  sometimes  loaded 
with  ten  or  twenty  people,  they  generally  row 
six  miles  in  a  day13.  At  night  they  unload, 
set  up  their  tent,  draw  the  boat  on  shore,  and 
turn  it  upside  down.  If  they  cannot  proceed 
any  farther  by  water,  six  or  eight  of  them  carry 

(13)  According  to  Wormskjold,  who  travelled  in  Greenland 
in  the  year  1812,  and  afterwards  accompanied  Captain  Von 
Kotzebue  on  his  voyage  of  discovery,  and,  by  the  latest  news, 
was  on  the  Sandwich  Islands,  a  women's  boat,  fourteen  or 
sixteen  ells  in  length,  manned  with  a  steersman  and  four  women 
to  row,  besides  two  or  three  travellers,  and  loaded  with  a  weight 
of  above  two  ship-pounds,  generally  goes  nine  or  more  miles  in 
a  day,  in  calm  water,  but  then  the  boat  is  not  heavy  laden. 


21 
the   boat    on    their   heads,    by    land,    to  a 
place  where  they  can  again  proceed  by  wa- 
ter. 

The  seal  is,  for  the  Greenlander,  what  the 
reindeer  is  for  the  Laplanders, — the  principal 
source  of  wealth  :  without  it  they  could  not 
exist.     They  feed  on  the  flesh  of  the  seal  j  its 
skin  serves  them  for  clothing1,  and  for  the  co- 
vering- of  their  habitation  ;  and  its  blubber 
gives  them  light  and  warmth  :  the  seal,  there- 
fore, provides  for  them  the  principal  necessaries 
of  life.     Several  sea-fowls,  the  whale  and  nar- 
val,  and,  particularly,  the  whitefish,  also  con- 
tribute ;  the  flesh  of  the  latter  affords  them  an 
agreeable  food,  but  they  particularly  use  the 
entrails  of  this  fish  for  windows,  and  curtains 
for  tents,  and  the  sinews,  which  can  be  split 
extremely  fine,  for  thread.     The  chase  on  the 
water  is,  therefore,  their  main  business,  and 
every  thing  relating  to  it  highly  important  to 
the  Greenlanders  :  it   is  of  three  kinds  ;  the 
chase  of  seals,  of  birds,  and  of  whales.     The 
chase  of  seals,  as  the  most  important,  is  again 
divided  into  three  different  kinds  ;  first,  they 
are  caught  with  the  bladder  •,  secondly,  by 
hunting ;  and,  thirdly,  by  shooting  them  on 
the  ice.  itifli 


22 

To  catch  seals  with  the  bladder  which 
the  Greenlanders  undertake,  singly,  each  for 
himself  to  catch  a  larger  kind  of  seals,  they 
use  the  following"  apparatus,  which  is  contrived 
with  great  ingenuity,  and  well  adapted  to 
the  object. 

1.  The  harpoon  is  composed  of  several 
pieces,  because  otherwise  the  seal  would  break 
it.  In  the  fore  part  of  the  shaft,  which  is 
about  three  ells  long,  and  an  inch  and  a  half 
or  two  inches  thick,  a  peg  of  bone  is  fitted, 
and  so  fastened  to  the  shaft  that  it  can  come 
out.  On  this  peg  is  the  bone  harpoon  head, 
full  half  a  span  along,  provided  with  double 
barbs,  and  an  iron  point  an  inch  broad.  To 
the  harpoon  hangs  a  thong  eight  or  nine 
fathoms  in  length,  the  other  end  of  which 
is  fastened  to  a  bladder.  This  thong,  by 
means  of  a  bone  ring,  which  is  held  by  a  peg 
to  the  middle  of  the  shaft,  is  so  fastened  to  the 
latter,  that  it  easily  parts  from  it.  The  blad- 
der, made  of  the  skin  of  a  small  seal  sewed 
together,  has  two  holes  provided  with  bone 
stoppers  to  blow  it  up.  The  Greenlander, 
when  he  blows  it  up,  takes  the  stopper  in 
his  mouth,  that  he  may  immediately  put  it  in 
with  his  tongue,  for  fear  the  air  should  escape 


23 
out  of  the  bladder ;  afterwards  he  fastens  the 
stopper  properly  with  his  hands.  The  spear 
is  not  thrown  out  of  the  hand,  but,  in  order  to 
give  the  throw  more  force,  laid  upon  a  casting 
board  which  is  about  an  ell  long",  four  inches 
broad  before,  and  one  inch  behind.  At  the 
fore  end  notches  are  cut  on  both  sides,  to  hold 
it  fast  with  the  fore -finger  and  thumb.  Pegs 
in  the  shaft  fit  into  holes  on  the  surface  of 
this  board,  which  the  Greenlander,  when  he 
throws,  retains  in  his  hand. 

2.  The  great  spear  consists  of  a  shaft  two 
ells  and  a  half  long,  and  two  inches  and  a  half 
or  three  inches  thick  in  the  middle,  in  the 
fore  end  of  which  is  fitted  a  piece  of  bone 
which  is  tied  to  it,  and  has  a  sharp  iron  point 
without  a  barb.  The  bone  and  the  iron 
together  are  about  half  an  ell  long.  This 
point  separates  from  the  shaft  when  the  spear 
strikes  the  object.  In  the  middle  of  the  shaft, 
on  both  sides,  a  bone  peg  is  fixed,  behind 
which  the  fore-finger  and  the  thumb  are  placed 
to  throw  the  spear. 

3.  The  small  spear  is  about  an  ell  long, 
without  the  point.  At  the  fore  end,  where  it 
is  thicker  than  at  the  other,  a  narrow  iron 
blade,  full  half  an  ell  long,  is  fixed. 


24 
This  apparatus  is  fastened  by  buttons  to 
the  right  side  of  the  Kajak,  between  straps 
that  are  stretched  on  the  boat,  and  has  its 
points  lying"  between  bone  pegs  fixed  on  the 
edge  of  the  Kajak  in  front.  Before  the  Green- 
lander,  lies  the  thong  rolled  up,  and  behind 
him  the  bladder,  which  is  prevented  from  fall- 
ing out  of  its  place  by  bone  pegs  fixed  in  the 
back  part  of  the  Kajak.  When  the  Green- 
lander,  thus  prepared,  perceives  a  seal,  he  first 
examines  whether  every  thing  about  the  har- 
poon, particularly  the  thong,  is  in  order  ;  he 
endeavours  then  to  approach  the  seal  within 
four  or  six  fathom,  takes  the  harpoon  with  the 
casting-board,  and,  while  he  throws  the  har- 
poon at  the  seal,  takes  the  oar  in  his  left  hand. 
If  the  harpoon  pierces  above  the  barbs,  it 
separates  from  the  shaft,  and  the  thong  un- 
rols.  At  the  same  moment  the  Greenlander 
pushes  the  bladder  into  the  water,  for  the  seal, 
as  soon  as  he  finds  himself  struck,  darts  like 
an  arrow  to  the  bottom.  The  Greenlander 
now  lays  the  casting-board,  and  the  shaft 
which  is  swimming  on  the  water,  in  their 
proper  place,  and  takes  the  great  spear  to 
throw  it  at  the  seal  as  soon  as  he  appears. 
The  seal  often  draws  the  bladder  under  the 


25 

water,  though  it  can  bear  a  hundred  weight 
and  a  half,  but  exhausts  himself  so  much  by- 
it,  that  he  is  forced  soon  to  rise  again  to  take 
breath.  As  soon  as  he  rises,  the  Greenlander 
throws  his  lance  and  wounds  him  in  the  body  ; 
it  immediately  falls  out,  because  it  has  no 
barb  :  he  repeats  this  till  the  seal  is  quite 
exhausted,  and  then  kills  him  with  the  lit- 
tle spear.  Then  he  stops  all  the  wounds, 
to  preserve  the  blood,  which  is  kept  to  make 
soup  ;  blows  up  the  seal  between  the  hide  and 
the  flesh,  in  order  to  convey  it  away  the  more 
easily,  and  ties  it  fast  to  the  Kajak. 

In  this  species  of  chase  the  Greenlander 
is  exposed  to  the  greatest  dangers.  The  thong, 
in  rapidly  unrolling,  may  get  entangled,  and 
catch  hold  of  the  Kajak,  which  the  seal  then 
easily  overturns  and  drags  under  the  water ; 
or  the  half  dead  seal  may  bite  holes  in  the 
Kajak  if  it  comes  too  near  him.  In  both 
these  cases  the  Greenlander  generally  pe- 
rishes. 

For  what  I  call  hunting  the  seal,  the 
Greenlander  uses  a  dart.  The  shaft  is  about 
two  ells  and  a  half  long.  It  has  a  head  of 
iron,  half  an  ell  long,  a  finger  thick,  with 
two  notches  instead  of  barbs,  which,  when  the 

£ 


26 
dart  strikes,  comes  out  of  the  shaft,  but 
remains  hanging  to  the  middle  of  it  by  a 
short  strap  ;  at  the  other  end  of  the  shaft  a 
bladder  is  fastened,  that  the  seal  may  tire  him- 
self. When  the  small  seals  enter  the  creeks 
in  the  autumn,  the  Greenlanders,  collected  in 
bodies,  intercept  their  passage,  frighten  them 
under  the  water  by  loud  cries,  and  throwing 
stones,  that,  as  they  cannot  long  hold  out  with- 
out taking  air,  they  may  exhaust  themselves, 
and  at  last  remain  so  long  above  water,  that 
their  pursuers  can  surround  them,  and  strike 
them  with  their  darts.  Sometimes  the  seals 
take  refuge  on  shore,  where  they  are  re- 
ceived by  the  women  and  children  with 
stones  and  clubs,  and,  afterwards,  pierced  by 
the  men.  This  chase  is  very  amusing  to 
the  Greenlanders,  and,  at  the  same  time,  so 
profitable,  that  one  man  may  get  eight  or 
ten  seals  in  a  day  for  his  own  share. 

The  catching  of  seals  on  the  ice  is  usual, 
particularly  in  Disco-bay,  where  the  inlets 
are  generally  hard  frozen  in  the  winter. 
The  Greenlanders  watch  for  the  seals  when 
they  come  to  take  breath  at  the  air-holes 
which  they  have  made  in  the  ice,  and  then 
kill  them  with  their  harpoons.     They   hold 


27 
in  their  hand  the  thong-  fastened  to  the 
harpoon.  It  is  seldom  that  the  huntsman 
misses  his  prey,  and  one  man  may  in  this 
manner  catch  ten  seals  in  a  day.  With 
an  iron  fastened  to  the  other  end  of  the 
shaft  the  hole  in  the  ice  is  enlarged,  and 
the  seal  drawn  out. 

Another  method  of  taking1  these  animals 
is  with  the  long  pole,  which  is  done  by 
two  persons.  Near  to  the  air-hole,  they  cut 
a  hole  in  the  ice,  large  enough  clearly  to 
see  through  it  under  the  ice.  One  of  the 
hunters  lays  himself  on  his  belly  upon  a 
sledge,  and  covers  his  head  above,  that  the 
light  may  not  hinder  him  from  seeing-  under 
the  ice.  In  one  hand,  he  holds  one  end  of  a 
pole,  about  three  fathoms  in  length,  to  which 
the  harpoon  head  is  fixed,  over  the  air-hole, 
and  in  the  other  hand  the  end  of  the  thong-. 
The  other  hunter  stands  quite  still  at  the  air- 
hole, and  holds  the  pole  perpendicularly  over 
it.  The  first  then  begins  to  whistle,  by 
which  he  attracts  the  seals,  which  are  very 
curious.  At  the  right  moment  he  gives  a 
sign,  the  hunter  who  is  standing  strikes,  and 
the  curious  seal  is  generally  pierced. 

The  Greenlandert   also  shoot  many  seals 


23 
when  they  lie  asleep  on  the  ice.  This  way 
of  hunting*  the  seal  is  not  successful,  unless 
there  be  a  great  many  of  these  animals  in  the 
bay,  the  air  clear,  and  the  cold  not  too  severe, 
because  otherwise  they  do  not  like  to  crawl 
upon  the  ice.  Neither  must  any  half-frozen 
snow  be  on  the  ice,  because  it  creaks  when  it 
is  trodden  upon  :  new  fallen  snow,  on  the 
other  hand,  assists  the  chase,  which  is  con- 
ducted as  follows.  The  Greenlander  binds 
his  g"un  to  a  little  sledge,  the  bottom  of  which 
is  covered  with  rough  skins,  and  so  contrived 
that  a  sail  may  be  put  up.  When  he  sees  a 
seal  asleep,  he  keeps  back  the  dog's14,  ap- 
proaches softly  with  his  sledge  to  the  place 
where  the  seal  lies :  when  there  is  new  fallen 
snow,  and  the  surface  of  it  is  not  frozen,  he 
can  approach,  upright,  within  100  or  even 
80  paces  ;  otherwise  not  within  200  paces. 
Then  he  lies  down,  crawls  forward  on  his 
knees  and  elbows,  so  that  the  sail  is  turned 
towards  the  seal,  and  sometimes  looks  over  the 

(14)  Dogs  of  a  middling  size,  which  resemble  the  wolf,  are 
the  only  domestic  animals  of  the  Greenlanders.  They  put 
from  four  to  ten  dogs  before  their  sledges,  and  make  use  of 
them  also  to  drag  the  seals  from  the  ice,  home.  They  are  of 
no  use  in  the  chase,  except  to  hunt  the  white  bears.  Their 
skins  are  used  for  trimming  clothes. 


sail,  behind  which  he  creeps  unseen  by  the 
seal,  in  order  to  see  if  the  animal  continues  to 
lie  still.  When  he  has  got  within  shot,  ge- 
nerally 40  or  bO  paces,  he  fires.  If  fortune 
favors  him,  he  can  catch,  in  this  manner,  ten 
or  twelve  seals  in  a  day. 

The  whale  fishery  is  not  carried  on  by  the 
Greenlanders  on  their  own  account,  but  in 
conjunction  with  the  Danes,  with  the  boats 
and  apparatus -of  the  company.  Their  own 
apparatus  is  so  imperfect,  that,  though  they 
indeed  sometimes  killed  a  whale,  their  prey  too 
often  escaped  them.  Cranz  describes  the  whale- 
fishery  as  it  was  formerly  carried  on  nearly 
as  follows.  "  When  the  Greenlanders  go 
upon  the  whale-fishery,  they  dress  themselves 
tn  their  best  clothes,  for  they  believe  that  the 
whale  flies,  or,  as  soon  as  he  is  dead,  sinks,  if 
any  one  has  dirty  clothes  on,  particularly  if 
he  had  touched  a  dead  body  in  them15.  The 
men  row  boldly  to  the  whale,  and  throw 
several  harpoons  at  him,  to  which  bladders 
made  of  large  seal-skins  are  fastened.     These 

(15)  It  is  possible  that  this  belief  formerly  prevailed;  but  at 
present  the  Greeulander  dresses,  because  he  is  coming  to  a 
large  assembly,  where  those  who  are  ill  dressed  are  not  well 
received. 


30 
bladders  prevent  the  fish  from  remaining"  long 
under  the  water,  and   tire  him  out.     When 
he    is     quite    exhausted,     the    Greenlanders 
kill  him  with  their  little  spears.     On  these 
occasions,     the    women    are   present    in    the 
women's  boats,  and  tow  the  dead  animal  to 
shore,  while   the   men,   having-  put  on  their 
cloaks16,  leap  upon  the  fish,  and  into  the  sea, 
(the  cloak  puffs  up  in  the  water,  so  that  they 
do  not  sink,  but,  as  it  were,  stand  in  the  water) 
cut  off  the  blubber,   and  the  barbs,  or  whale- 
bone."    The  proper  whale,   and  the  narval, 
are  caught  only  in  the  north  ♦,    the  pottfish, 
and   the  smaller   kinds,    only  in    the    south. 
The   Greenlanders    take   the  white-fish,   and 
other  smaller  whales,   as    they   do   the   seal, 
with  the   harpoon,   which    is    then   provided 
with  feathers   made   of   whalebone,   about  a 
span  long-,   and  two  or   three  fingers  broad, 
that  they  may  fly  more  steadily. 

To  catch  birds,  that  is  sea  fowl,  the  Green- 
landers use  a  lance  two  ells  and  a  half  long", 
and  three  inches  thick  in  the  middle.  In 
the  fore  end   is   fitted   a  round   blunt   iron, 

(16)  Cloaks  of  seal  skin,  which  have  the  jacket,  breeches, 
stockings,  shoes,  gloves,  and  cap,  all  of  one  piece,  and  are 
drawn  fast  round  the  head. 


31 

about  half  an  ell  long1,  only  once  notched  ; 
but,  as  the  sea-fowl  easily  avoids  the  blow, 
there  are  fixed,  in  the  middle  of  the  shaft, 
three  or  four  pointed  hooks  (which  stand  round 
the  shaft  like  willow  branches  round  the  trunk), 
that  the  bird  may  be  pierced  by  one  of  them 
if  the  point  misses  :  these  hooks  are  about  a 
span  long-,  and  thrice  notched. 

Among*  the  fishing*  tackle  peculiar  to  the 
Greenlanders,  their  lines  of  whalebone  are 
especially  remarkable  ;  they  consist  of  whale- 
bone split  very  fine,  which  are  tied  together, 
and  often  200  fathoms  in  length,  and  even 
longer  :  these  lines  are  used  in  fishing"  on  the 
ice,  to  catch  a  kind  of  hollibut17,  which  are 
found  only  in  the  Greenland  seas.  The  Green- 
landers  spear  salmon  and  salmon-trout  with 
a  shaft,  to  which  two  bone  or  iron  points  are 
fastened.  Sometimes  they  build  a  dam  or 
weir  of  stones  at  the  mouths  of  the  rivers  and 
streams,  over  which  the  fish  pass  at  high  water, 

(17)  This  fish,  which  our  author  mentions,  is  called,  in  the 
Greenland  language,  kalleraglik  (Danish  helleflynder),  and 
is  only  taken  on  the  ice,  between  the  clefts  in  it.  A  larger 
kind  of  fish,  which  is  caught  also  in  the  Danish  seas,  and  is 
called,  in  Greenland,  ntttarnak  (Danish  hellefisk),  is  taken  by 
the  Greenlanders,  in  women's  boats,  with  lines  made  of  hemp, 
which  are  more  manageable  than  the  lines  of  whalebone. 


32 
but  at  the  ebb  are  left  almost  on  dry  land, 
and  are  easily  taken18. 

In  the  chase  on  shore,  the  Greenlanders  for- 
merly made  use  of  bows  and  arrows  ;  but, 
since  they  have  obtained  fire-arms,  these  are 
no  more  to  be  met  with.  Their  bows  were  of 
fir,  about  three  ells  long,  and,  to  make  them 
stiffer,  they  were  bound  round  with  whalebone 
and  sinews ;  the  string  was  of  sinews,  and  the 
arrow  of  wood,  with  a  barbed  bone  point,  and 
with  feathers  to  steady  it.  Hunting  is  more 
an  amusement  to  the  Greenlanders  than  a 
source    of  advantage19,    and   is   chiefly    con- 

(J 8)  The  Danes  catch  the  river  fish  in  nets;  of  late  they 
have  successfully  attempted  to  catch  seals,  and  even  white- 
fish,  in  that  manner.  But  the  Greenlanders  are  not  very  suc- 
cessful in  this  way,  partly  because  they  do  not  much  like  it, 
but  prefer  their  ancient  mode ;  and  partly  because  they  are  in 
want  of  good  nets,  which  they  cannot  procure. 

(19)  Almost  all  the  accounts  from  Greenland  agree  that  it 
were  much  to  be  wished  that  the  Greenlanders  would  give  up 
hunting  entirely,  and  confine  themselves  wholly  to  fishing. 
In  order  to  promote  this  object,  as  far  as  the  Christian  Green- 
landers are  concerned,  some  officers  of  the  company  have 
imagined  it  would  be  advisable  to  change  the  time  for  ad- 
ministering the  sacrament  from  April  to  August,  because  the 
Greenlanders  would  lose  less  by  neglecting  their  fishery  iu 
August  than  iu  April,  when  it  is  very  important ;  and  because 
this  religious  solemnity  now  induces  them  to  leave  their  winter 
habitations  earlier,  and  afterwards  to  roam  about. 


33 
fined  to  the  chase  of  the  reindeer20.  They 
spend  a  great  part  of  the  summer,  with  their 
wives  and  children,  in  this  hunting".  When 
they  have  discovered  a  troop  of  reindeer,  they 
surround  them  ;  the  women  and  children  drive 
them,  by  shouts  and  noise,  to  narrow  paths 
and  passages,  where  the  men  lie  in  wait 
to  shoot  them.  If  they  are  not  in  sufficient 
numbers  to  surround  the  reindeer,  they  set  up 
white  poles,  on  the  top  of  which  a  piece  of  turf 
is  fixed,  on  both  sides  of  the  way,  that  the 
reindeer  have  to  pass,  which  do  not  venture  to 
go  between  the  white  poles. 

The  hunting-  of  the  bear  is  attended  with 
danger ;  because  the  bear,  if  the  ball  misses 
him,  or  if  he  does  not  fall  at  the  first  shot, 
rushes  on  the  hunter,  who  generally  perishes 
if  the  bear  reaches  him.     The  following"  is  the 

(20)  It  is  remarkable  that  the  Greenlandcrs,  though  they 
are  so  fond  of  reindeer's  flesh,  entirely  neglect  to  use  them  for 
domestic  purposes.  They  seem  incapable  of  taming  any  thing 
but  dogs  ;  they  consider  all  other  animals  as  objects  of  chase, 
and  as  useless  till  they  have  deprived  them  of  life.  But  this 
seems  less  surprising  when  we  consider  their  inclination  and 
habit  of  changing  their  abode ;  they  could  not  take  tame 
reindeer  in  their  journies,  because  they  are  performed  by 
water,  and  must  be  so,  since,  in  the  interior  of  the  country,  and 
often  on  the  coast,  it  is  not  possible  to  proceed  far  on  account 
of  the  snow  and  ice. 


34 
usual  method  of  proceeding  in  the  chase  of  the 
bear : — When  one  of  these  animals  appears, 
the  Greenlanders  go  in  their  sledges  to  meet 
him,  and,  when  they  are  within  shot,   loosen 
some  dogs  from  the  sledges,  which  keep  the 
bear  in  check  while  they  are  preparing  to  fire* 
The  bear  is  afraid  of  the  dogs,  which  are  very 
eager  after  him  ;  but  if  one  of  them  comes  too 
near  him,  he  immediately  knocks  him   down 
with  his  paw.     The  Greenlanders  endeavour  to 
wound  him  in  the  shoulder  or  the  belly,  be- 
cause a  shot  in  these  parts  soonest  kills  him. 
It  is  very  seldom  that  one  person  ventures  to 
attack  him  alone,  as  the  danger  is  too  great  if 
the  bear  is  not  immediately  killed.     It   is  re^- 
markable,  however,  that  this  ferocious  animal 
is  afraid  of  the  whip  :  thus,  for  instance,  a  few 
years  ago  a  hunter,  whose  sledge  had  a  better 
team  (of  dogs)  than  those  of  his  companions, 
hastened  before  them,  because  he  was  afraid 
that  one  of  them  would  shoot  the  bear,  which 
he  wished  to  shoot  himself.     In  his  hurry  he 
missed  him  :  the  bear  rushed  furiously  upon 
him,  and  threw  him  down.    The  other  hunters, 
who  by  this  time  had  got  near  enough,  were 
going  to  shoot  at  the  bear   as  he  rushed  on 
their  companion  ;   but   an   old  Greeenlander 


35 
dissuaded  them,  ran  up,   and  gave  the  bear 
some  blows  with  the  dog  whip.     The  bear 
fled,    and   the  first   hunter  escaped  with  his 
fright,  and  some  trifling  bites  in  his  arm. 

The  fox  is  taken  by  the  Greenlanders  alive 
(only  for  the  sake  of  his  skin),  in  stone  traps. 
As  soon  as  the  fox  touches  a  bar,  to  which 
the  bait  is  fastened,  the  door,  which  is  a  large 
flat  thin  stone,  falls  down.  The  snow  fowl 
(Ryper),  which  is  very  stupid,  is  easily  caught 
in  snares,  stoned  to  death,  or  shot. 

The  Greenlanders  make  no  use  of  the  pro- 
ductions of  the  mineral  kingdom,  except  of 
the  talc,  of  which  they  make  lamps  and 
kettles,  particularly  in  the  country  about 
Godthaab.  The  manufacture  of  these  ves- 
sels, and  of  their  boats,  hunting  apparatus, 
their  clothes,  and  some  trifles,  such  as  to- 
bacco pouches,  pocket-books,  &c.  shews  that 
they  have  a  natural  turn  for  mechanical  arts, 
and  extraordinary  patience  in  works  of  this 
kind.  The  men  take  upon  themselves  only 
the  making  of  their  hunting  apparatus,  of 
the  wood  work  for  their  boats,  tents,  houses, 
and  the  like,  because  the  seal  fishery,  being 
their  chief  source  of  subsistence,  requires  al- 
most  all  their  time   and  efforts :    all   other 


36 
domestic  labours  are  left  to  the  women.  The 
latter  build  the  walls  of  the  houses  and  of 
the  tents,  prepare  the  skins,  cover  the  boats, 
sew  the  clothes,  &c.  In  all  these  works,  the 
greatest  industry  is  displayed.  The  hunting" 
apparatus,  and  the  wood- work,  are  made, 
though  only  by  the  eye,  with  the  greatest  ex- 
actness, and  the  parts  are  most  carefully  joined 
together.  The  cloaks,  and  all  the  articles  of 
leather,  are  so  strongly  and  neatly  sewn,  that 
no  furrier  could  do  his  work  better  ;  and  those 
who  have  not  seen  such  sewing,  cannot  form 
an  idea  of  it.  The  preparation  of  the  leather, 
which  is  a  chief  employment  of  the  women, 
is  effected  by  urine,  in  which  the  rough  furs 
are  steeped  a  shorter  time,  in  order  to  draw 
out  the  grease ;  but  the  smooth  skins  a  longer 
time,  in  order  to  loosen  the  hair.  All  the 
skins  are  first  scraped  with  shells,  or  with  bone 
scraping  knives,  and  those  which  are  designed 
for  clothing,  are  at  the  same  time  scraped 
thinner.  From  the  skins  designed  to  cover 
their  boats,  the  fat  is  not  wholly  taken  off. 
The  rough  skins  and  furs,  when  they  are 
sufficiently  steeped,  are  spread  out,  and  dried 
in  the  open  air  ;  but  from  the  others,  when 
the  urine  has  drained  off,  the  hair  is  scraped 


37 
with  a  knife,  or,  which  the  Greenland  women 
find  more  convenient,  pulled  off  with  the 
teeth.  They  are  then  soaked  in  fresh  water, 
spread  out  and  dried.  Those  intended  to  be 
used  for  clothes,  are  lastly  rubbed  between 
the  hands,  and  made  pliable.  If  a  boat  is 
to  be  covered,  the  skins  from  which  the  hair 
has  been  taken  are  sewed  together  according" 
to  the  size  of  the  boat,  soaked  in  sea-water, 
and  then  the  boat  covered  with  them,  while 
they  are  still  quite  wet.  Last  of  all,  the 
seams  are  smeared  with  old  fat  of  seals.  The 
thongs  used  in  fishing,  are  cut  round  the  seal, 
that  they  may  be  of  the  proper  length,  that 
is  eight  or  nine  fathoms.  When  they  are 
tanned,  smooth,  and  dry,  they  are  smeared 
with  well  boiled  train  oil,  generally  that 
which  runs  from  the  lamps.  The  Green- 
landers  use  these  thongs,  also,  to  fasten  the 
dogs  to  the  sledges,  as  they  are  stronger  than 
ropes,  and  do  not  take  in  the  water. 

The  character  of  the  Greenlanders  has  many 
good  features.  They  are  good  natured,  soci- 
able, and  open  hearted;  cheerful  and  con- 
tented. Kindness  has  more  influence  upon 
them,  as  it  has  upon  all  free  men,  than  harsh- 
ness.    They  live  in  great  harmony  with  each 


38 
other.  Quarrels  and  disputes  are  seldom  heard 
among-  them ;  blows  are  still  more  rare, 
for  the  fear  of  giving"  each  other  offence 
seems  to  be  innate  in  them.  If  one  of  them 
is  sensibly  offended,  he  usually  challenges 
his  adversary  to  a  combat,  not  with  the  fist, 
but  in  singing.  He  composes  a  song,  in 
which  he  severely  satirizes  his  adversary,  and 
sings  it,  supported  by  his  friends,  before  a 
great  assembly.  The  adversary  answers  sing- 
ing, also  supported  by  his  friends.  If,  in 
the  opinion  of  the  assembly,  the  former  gains 
the  victory,  he  has  a  right  to  appropriate 
to  himself  the  best  articles  of  the  property  of 
the  vanquished ;  but  if  he  is  defeated,  he  ex- 
poses himself  to  ridicule  and  scorn21.  Their 
cheerfulness  shews  itself  in  jokes,  talkativeness, 
and  singing,  of  which  they  are  very  fond. 
The  reader  must  not  understand  here  any  arti- 
ficial singing :  their  songs  consist  of  short 
sentences  without  rhyme,  and  generally  ter- 
minate in  the  unmeaning  syllables — Amna 
aja,  Aja  aja,  A  ha  hu !  which  is  like  the  Tol 
de  rol  de  rol,  &c.  in  many  of  our  popular 
songs. 

(21)  It  is  true  that  very  great  insults  were  formerly,  and, 
sometimes,  perhaps  are  even  now,  revenged  by  assassination. 


39 
There  are  few  nations  poorer  than  the 
Greenlanders  ;  but  it  would  be  difficult  to 
find  a  people,  who,  in  spite  of  this  poverty, 
are  more  contented  with  their  fate  than  they, 
They  are  very  temperate,  and,  when  they 
have  no  seals  flesh,  are  contented  with  bad 
fish  ;  and  if  they  have  not  even  these,  they 
satisfy  their  hunger  with  sea  weed.  A  con- 
sequence of  this  temperance  is  their  thought- 
lessness, which  often  costs  them  dear.  If  they 
have  a  good  supply,  they  do  not  spare  it, 
and  are,  therefore,  often  obliged  to  endure 
want.  In  winter,  when  the  seals  are  less  nu- 
merous near  the  shore,  or  when  drifting  ice 
and  bad  weather  impede  the  fishery,  the 
Greenlanders  live  on  dried  fish.  The  quan- 
tities of  hollibut,  cod,  and  smelts,  which  are 
found  on  the  coast,  might  furnish  them  with 
an  abundant  provision  for  winter,  but  they  are 
not  so  diligent  in  their  fishery,  as  were  to  be 
wished  for  their  own  advantage22.  Careless  of 
the  future,  they  are  more  eager  to  pass  the  best 
season  of  the  year  in  hunting  reindeer,  than 
to  obtain  abundant  provisions  at  a  good  fish- 
^S)  That  they  make  still  less  use  of  the  river  fishery,  which 
would  supply  them  with  abundance  of  salmon  and  trout,  is 
natural,  as  it  does  not  so  amply  reward  them  as  the  sea  fishery. 


40 
ing  place,  to  lay  up  a  stock  for  bad  times, 
and  thus  escape  the  danger  and  torments  of 
famine.  They  generally  spend  the  short  sum- 
mer among*  the  rocks,  to  hunt  the  reindeer, 
and  to  gratify  the  vanity  of  their  wives  and 
daughters23.  The  little  reindeer  flesh,  on 
which  they  can  reckon,  they  generally  con- 
sume immediately,  and  seldom  bring  any  of 
it  home.  The  reindeer  skins  are  at  that 
season  of  little  value,  and  can  scarcely  be 
used  for  any  thing  except  for  women's  panta- 
loons, which  are  of  little  durability,  and  a 
mere  article  of  luxury.  They  love  finery,  as 
appears  from  the  gay  trimming  of  their  dresses, 
tent  curtains,  &c.  and  keep  their  new  clothes 
very  clean  ;  but  they  are  in  general  very  un- 
cleanly. This  uncleanliness  is,  however,  a 
natural  consequence  of  their  way  of  living 
(as  they  are  always  in  the  midst  of  blubber  and 
train  oil),  their  poverty,  and  the  confined 
space  of  their  dwellings. 

(23)  The  demon  of  vanity  also  reigns  in  Greenland  among 
the  female  sex.  A  dress  of  handsome  reindeer  skins  is  for  a 
Greenland  woman,  what  the  finest  ornaments  are  for  our 
ladies.  A  Greenland  girl  thinks  it  an  honour  to  give  her  hand  to 
a  skilful  reindeer  hunter;  and  a  woman  is  not  a  little  proud, 
when,  talking  with  another  of  her  sex,  she  relates  at  length 
how  many  reindeer  her  husband  has  killed. 


41 
They  possess  much  national  pride,  and  think 
that  no  nation  can  be  esteemed  equal  to  them. 
As  the  Roman,  in  ancient  times,  said  proud- 
ly, "  I  am  a  Roman  citizen,"  so  we  now  hear 
the  Greenlander  say,  in  the  same  manner,  "  I 
am  a  Greenlander."  If  they  are  very  well 
disposed  to  any  one,  and  wish  to  make  him 
a  flattering"  compliment,  they  say,  "  You  are 
a  Greenlander."24  With  the  highest  ideas  of 
their  own  worth,  they  combine  the  conviction 
of  the  superiority  of  their  country,  and  prefer 
the  abode  among  its  naked  sterile  rocks  to 
every  other.  Attempts  have  been  made  to 
make  them  sensible  of  the  better  condition  of 
the  Europeans;  but,  even  Greenlanders  who 
are  acquainted  with  it,  and  who  have  been 
taken  to  Denmark,  and  well  used,  wished 
nothing  so  much  as  to  return  to  the  mode  of 
living"  of  their  countrymen,  and  could,  at 
the  most,  be  brought  to  confess,  that  the  Eu- 
ropeans were  as  happy  as  they.     At  Copen- 

(24)  Tbey  call  themselves  Innuil,  which  in  a  more  extensive 
sense,  means  Inhabitant,  Man.  They  call  the  Europeans 
Kabiuruet,  foreigners.  In  a  more  limited  sense,  this  word 
means  a  Dane ;  and  they  have  proper  names  for  the  nations 
who  go  to  Greenland  on  the  whale  fishery.  Thus  they  call 
the  Norwegians  by  a  name  which  is  equivalent  to  Longbeards, 
because  the  ancient  inhabitants  of  Norway  wore  long  beards. 

G 


42 
hagen,  they  said  there  was  not  Heaven  enough, 
and  no  reasonable  degree  of  cold.  They  also 
found  that  riches  were  too  unequally  divided, 
and  could  not  reconcile  themselves  to  seeing 
the  rich  refuse  to  assist  the  poor,  which  is 
quite  contrary  to  the  custom  of  the  Green- 
landers. 

They  are  excessively  fond  of  their  children, 
and  allow  them  the  fullest  liberty.  They  are 
even  angry  with  the  Europeans  when  they 
beat  their  children,  and  say,  they  do  not 
deserve  to  have  children.  They  are  surprised, 
too,  when  they  hear  the  Europeans  scold 
their  servants  or  dependants,  and  say,  "  You 
treat  your  fellow-creatures  as  the  Greenlander 
does  his  dogs."  They  are  not  disposed  to 
theft,  as  some  persons  have  believed.  The  real 
Greenlanders  are  in  this  respect  much  superior 
to  the  lower  classes  of  the  Europeans  and  to 
the  Blendlings  (or  children  of  an  European 
father  and  a  Greenland  mother). 

If  they  ever  do  take  any  thing  from  the  Eu- 
ropeans, it  is  a  trifle  ;  and  these  pilferings, 
which  are  very  rare,  are  mostly  committed  only 
by  boys,  who,  perhaps,  may  take  a  little  bread 
and  a  piece  of  candle  (which  are  among  their 
delicacies),  a  little  tobacco,  a  few  nails,  &c.;; 


43 

for  they  think  it  is  no  sin  to  take  some- 
thing" from  the  Europeans,  of  whom  they, 
in  general,  have  not  the  best  opinion.  Their 
bad  opinion  of  foreigners  is  but  too  often 
strengthened  by  the  excesses  of  the  sailors. 
That  they  have  taken  things  from  ships  which 
were  stranded,  and  afterwards  abandoned,  can- 
not seem  strange,  as  these  things,  according 
to  their  ideas,  are  without  an  owner,  and 
the  example  of  the  Europeans  has  confirmed 
them  in  this  opinion.  How  strict  their  ideas 
of  the  right  of  property  are,  appears  from 
this,  that  if  a  Greenlander  finds  upon  a  distant 
island  a  piece  of  ship  timber,  or  other  wood, 
which  has  been  driven  on  shore  at  high 
water,  and  which  he  thinks  may  be  useful 
to  him,  and  is  not  able  to  take  it  away 
with  him  at  the  time,  he  only  lays  one  or 
two  stones  upon  it,  as  a  sign  that  it  has 
an  owner,  and  he  is  then  fully  secure  that 
nobody  will  take  it  away. 

It  scarcely  needs  to  be  observed,  that  we 
speak  here  of  the  Greenlanders  in  general,  and 
that  there  are  bad  people  among-  them  who 
do  not  answer  to  this  description ;  but  these 
are  exceptions,  few  in  number  in  proportion  to 
the  whole ;  and  great  crimes  are  very  rarely 


44 

committed,  unless  superstition  should  interfere. 
Superstition  formerly  led  the  Greenlanders,  and 
sometimes  leads  them  even  now,  to  the  com- 
mission of  the  most  revolting"  cruelties.     The 
belief  in  witchcraft  is  not  quite  eradicated  in 
Greenland,  any  more  than  in  some  other  coun- 
tries ;  and  if  any  body  is  so  unfortunate  as  to 
be  suspected  of  witchcraft,  he  is  not  sure  of 
his    life.      The    Greenlanders,    according  to 
ancient  custom,  kill  those  whom  they  consider 
as  witches,   or   as  the  cause  of  the  misfortunes 
which  befal  them  ;   and  the  unhappy  persons 
who  suffer  this  fate  are  particularly  old  women. 
In   former  times,  many  drew  this  fate  upon 
themselves,  by  pretending-  to  cause  and  cure 
diseases,  to    enchant    arrows,    to  drive  away 
spirits,  &c.  ;  and   practised  their  mummeries 
for  payment,  in  order  to  obtain  a  livelihood. 
The    Greenlanders    call    by    the    name    of 
Illiseetsok  such  witches,  of  whom  they  believe 
that  they  can  do  good,  but  that  they  do  much 
more  evil.     Several  of  these  unhappy  persons 
have  fallen,  however,  the  victims  of  covetous- 
ness,  revenge,  and  other  base  passions,  when 
they  were  accused  of  witchcraft,  and  murdered. 
Thus,  for  instance,  in  1793,  a  young  Green- 
lander,  of  good  character,   named  Aventak, 


45 

was  murdered,  in  the  district  of  Umanak,  by 
two  brothers.     He  was  a  very  active  hunter, 
went  constantly  upon  the  chase,  or  fishing-,  so 
that  he  was  much   more   fortunate  than    his 
murderers :  the  latter  believed  that  he  was  the 
cause  of  their  inferior  success,    and  murdered 
him  one  day  when  he  had   rowed   out  in  his 
Kajak.     His   wife,   of  whom  they  also  enter- 
tained suspicions,  was  obliged  to  fly  to  another 
island,  where  an  equally  hard  fate  awaited  her. 
A  married  Greenlander,  named  Apine,  sought 
to  obtain  more   familiar  intercourse  with  her 
than  she  would  allow  ;  and,   incensed  at  the 
failure  of  his  design,  he  accused  her  of  witch- 
craft.    As  he  could  not  entice  her  out  of  the 
house,    he    resolved    to    murder    her    in   it. 
She   learned   his  design,   and   fled,   with   her 
child,  to  a  third  island,  where  a  family  had 
set  up  their  tent :  she  left  behind,  her  women's 
boat   and  tent,  together  with  the  Kajak  and 
gun  of  her   late  husband.      Apine  followed 
her,    entered    the    tent,    and   killed   her  by 
stabbing  her  several  times  with  a  knife  ;  then, 
without  taking  any   thought  of  the  unhappy 
child  of  the  woman  whom   he  had   murdered, 
he  returned  to  the   island  where  she  had  left 


46 
her  effects,  and  shared  them  with  the  murder- 
ers of  her  husband,  who  then  also  resided  there. 
After  superstition,  revenge  is  the  chief  motive 
for  murder,  and  the  sons  or  relations  of  the 
murdered  person  (that  is,  if  he  was  not  an 
Illiseetsok)  are  bound,  according  to  the  tra- 
ditional opinion  of  theGreenlanders,  to  revenge 
the  murder  upon  the  murderer  in  the  same 
manner.  But  murders  are  become  more  rare 
since  the  dissemination  of  Christianity  in 
Greenland,  even  among-  the  heathens,  the 
number  of  whom  is  now  very  small ;  who, 
as  the  minority,  must  conform  to  the  manner 
of  the  rest,  and  have  acquired  more  enlighten- 
ed ideas  from  their  Christian  fellow-country- 
men. Yet  these  ideas  of  the  right  of  retalia- 
tion have  not  been  wholly  eradicated,  not- 
withstanding the  spreading  of  Christianity  ; 
and,  but  a  few  years  ago,  a  young  Greenlander, 
whose  father  and  brothers  had  been  murdered 
about  sixteen  years  before,  returned  from  South 
Greenland,  whither  he  had  fled  when  a  boy, 
back  to  Disco  Bay,  in  order  to  revenge  the 
murder  of  his  family.  He,  however,  desisted 
from  his  purpose,  as  his  countrymen  took  upon 
them  to  punish  the  murderer.    His  family  was 


47 

dispersed,  and  he  left  to  provide  for  himself, 
by  which  he  was  reduced  to  the  greatest  po- 
verty, and  was  obliged  to  endure  want  in  his 
old  age. 

With  respect  to  the  religious  notions  of  the 
Greenlanders,  they  believed  in  two  great 
spirits  and  many  inferior  ones,  the  last  of 
which  ruled  the  elements,  &c.  ;  and  that  the 
human  soul,  after  death,  joined  to  an  ethereal 
body,  will  be  happy  in  a  state  resembling 
this  life.  The  great  spirits  were  Torngarsuk25, 
and  a  female  spirit  for  whom  they  had  no 
name.  They,  indeed,  considered  Torngarsuk 
as  the  greatest  and  most  powerful  in  the  whole 
world  ;  and  wished  to  come  to  him  after  death, 
because  they  believed  that  in  his  subterranean 
abode  there  was  constant  summer,  and  abun- 
dance of  birds,  fish,  seals,  and  reindeer,  which 
were  easily  caught  ;  but  they  did  not  look 
upon  him  as  the  creator  of  the  world.  They 
had  not  much  respect  for  the  female  spirit, 
because  she  often  enticed  the  sea  animals  into 

(25)  Torngarsuk  is  a  contraction  of  Torngarsoak  ;  i.  c,  the 
Grtat  Spirit,  which  word  again  is  composed  of  torngak, 
spirit,  and  the  augmentative  nominal  affix,  rsoak.  It  is  re- 
markable that  the  North  American  savages  also  speak  of  the 

Oreat  Spirit. 


48 
the  abyss.  They  paid  no  adoration  or  worship 
to  any  spirit  whatever  ;  nor  had  they  any 
priests,  though  the  Angekoks  have,  perhaps, 
been  considered  as  such.  These  were  their 
wise  men,  enchanters,  and  magicians,  who 
pretended  to  be  honoured  with  a  more  intimate 
intercourse  with  Torngarsuk,  their  oracle,  and 
to  have  received  from  him  a  Torngak  (spirit), 
who  communicated  to  them  all  wisdom,  and 
accompanied  them  to  Torngarsuk,  and  to  the 
female  spirit,  when  they  undertook  a  journey 
to  consult  with  the  former  about  the  cure  of 
the  sick,  good  weather,  success  in  fishing,  &c, 
and  to  the  latter  about  the  dissolving  of  the 
charm  which  bound  the  sea  animals.  Some 
of  them  were  not  without  knowledge  of  nature, 
and  were,  therefore,  able  to  draw  pretty  cer- 
tain conclusions  respecting  the  change  of  the 
weather,  good  or  ill  success  in  fishing,  &c,  and 
to  give  good  advice.  They  endeavoured  to 
cure  the  sick  by  a  regimen  which  was  not  at 
all  ridiculous ;  but  they  gave  their  advice  and 
their  prescriptions  with  many  mummeries, 
horrid  grimaces,  and  pretended  conversations 
with  their  Torngak,  in  order  (as  they  them- 
selves confessed,  when  they  were  spoken  to 
rationally  on  the  subject)  to  make  themselves 


49 
respected  by  the  ignorant,  and  to  give  im- 
portance to  their  prescriptions.  Some  of  them 
were,  perhaps,  enthusiasts,  who  fell  into  trances, 
and  fancied  they  had  visions  and  revelations ; 
but  most  of  them  were  arrant  impostors,  who 
muttered  over  the  sick,  and  blew  upon  them, 
in  order  to  cure  them,  and  pretended  to  repair 
the  damaged  soul,  or  even  to  fetch  a  new  one. 
With  the  belief  in  their  art,  these  conjurors 
have  also  vanished26 ;  and  there  are  now  no 
Angekoks  in  all  North  Greenland,  except 
perhaps  the  most  northerly  part  of  the  colony 
of  Upernavik  ;  or  ihey  have  so  lost  their  credit, 
that  if  any  one  ventures  to  pretend  that  he 
understands  something  of  the  ancient  arts,  he 
is  ridiculed,  or  perhaps  permitted  to  practise 
his  tricks  and  grimaces  to  amuse  the  spectators. 

(26)  Even  Cranz  speaks  of  the  decline  of  the  credit  of  the 
Angekoks,  after  the  Missionaries  had  exposed  several  of  their 
impostures.  He  even  says  that  already  in  his  time  there  were 
instances  of  heathens  having  thrown  an  Angekok  out  of  the 
house,  during  the  pretended  journey  of  his  soul  to  Torn- 
garsuk;  but  that,  notwithstanding,  they  were  respected  by 
many,  because  now  and  then  a  prediction  was  fulfilled,  or  a 
patient  recovered,  over  whom  they  had  acted  their  mummeries; 
and  because,  when  the  prediction  was  not  accomplished,  or  the 
cure  failed,  they  prudently  laid  the  blame  on  the  obscurity  ol 
tlie  oracle,  or  on  the  witchcraft  of  an  lllitseetsok. 

B 


50 

In  the  most  southerly  part  of  Greenland,  where 
the  Missionaries  did  not  penetrate  till  a  later 
period,  and  where  the  heathens  are,  conse- 
quently, more  numerous,  there  may,  perhaps, 
be  still  some  Angekoks,  and  it  is  possible  they 
may  still  enjoy  some  consideration. 

The  Mission  in  Greenland  has  now  subsisted 
above  eighty  years ;  and,  if  we  reckon  from 
1721,  when  Hans  Egede  first  arrived  in  Green- 
land, nearly  100  years.  If  we  except  the 
most  northerly  colony,  Upernavik,  where  the 
mission  was  established  about  twenty-five  years 
ago,  and  the  most  southerly  colony,  Julianes- 
haab,  where  a  mission  was  not  established  till 
about  forty  years  ago,  there  are  scarcely  any 
heathens  left  in  the  known  part  of  Greenland, 
and  these  few  old  people,  who  will  be  all  dead 
in  a  few  years. 

Some  persons  fancy,  notwithstanding,  that 
the  Greenlanders  have  not,  upon  the  whole, 
been  much  benefited  in  respect  to  morals  and 
intellectual  improvement ;  and  that  the  Chris- 
tians are  neither  less  vicious,  nor  believe  less 
in  witchcraft,  than  the  heathens.  It  is  true, 
there  are  wicked  people  here,  who  are  guilty 
of  excesses,  and  superstition  still  leads  to  cruelty, 


51 

and  even  to  murder27 ;  but  are  there  not  wicked 
people  every  where  ?  Are  there  not  examples, 
even  in  the  most  enlightened  and  civilized 
nations,  that  superstition  leads  to  cruelties  ? 
And  was  it  ever  otherwise  ? 

It  cannot,  indeed,  be  denied,  that  the  mis- 
sion has  by  no  means  produced  the  advantage, 
of  late  years,  which  it  might  have  done,  had  it 
been  better  directed  ;  but  to  affirm,  for  this 
reason,  that  the  Greenlanders  have  not  gained 
much  by  it,  either  in  morality  or  in  knowledge, 
would  be  absurd.  Many  immoral  customs, 
which  were  practised  among  the  heathens28, 
have  now  vanished  ;  the  impostures  of  the 
Angekoks  have  ceased  ;  the  belief  in  witches 
is  not  so  general,  at  least  the  dreadful  conse- 
quences of  it  are  not  so  frequent ;  and  such 

(27)  Within  the  last  ten  years,  an  elderly  woman,  who  was 
accused  of  witchcraft,  was  cut  in  pieces ;  and  a  young  man, 
who,  in  a  fit  of  madness,  threatened  to  eat  up  all  present,  was 
shot  by  his  own  mother. 

(28)  One  amusement  of  the  Greenlanders  is,  for  example, 
dancing.  The  company  form  a  circle,  in  the  middle  of  which 
the  dancer,  with  a  drum  in  his  hand,  makes  all  kinds  of  grimaces 
and  contortions,  singing  and  drumming  at  the  same  time. 
The  company  sings,  in  chorus,  Amna  qja,  &c.  Wheu  one 
dancer  is  tired,  another  takes  his  place.  On  such  occasions 
the  song  generally  contained  obscene  allusions,  and  the  motions 
of  the  dancers  were  accompanied  with  indecent  attitudes. 


52 

revolting"  cruelties,  as  effects  of  superstition, 
of  which  Collin  mentions  an  example,  now  no 
longer  occur.  He  relates  that  a  father,  by 
the  advice  of  his  brother,  who  was  an  Ange- 
kok,  buried  alive  his  child  of  two  years  of  age, 
in  order  to  be  himself  cured  of  a  disorder.  The 
wife  of  a  merchant's  clerk  heard  the  child  cry, 
saved  it,  and  took  it  to  herself.  About  a  fort- 
night after,  the  relations  were  informed  of  it ; 
they  came  to  the  woman,  and  begged  her  to 
give  up  the  child,  assuring"  her  that  no  harm 
should  be  done  to  him.  From  confidence  or 
fear,  the  woman  gave  up  the  child ;  and  the 
relations  again  committed  the  same  cruelty, 
which  was  discovered  too  late  to  save  the  inno- 
cent victim. 

Among"  a  people  who  have  neither  magis- 
trates nor  laws,  a  decrease  of  immorality  can 
hardly  be  ascribed  to  any  thing  but  mental 
improvement.  It  would  be  difficult  to  find  a 
country  in  which  the  lower  orders  of  people 
are  more  civilized  than  the  baptized  Green- 
landers  :  they  are  almost  all,  without  excep- 
tion, able  to  read  and  write  ;  and,  in  general, 
they  are  fond  of  reading-  the  religious  books 
which  are  translated  for  them  ;  not  because 
they  believe  there  is  any  merit  in  it,  nor,  as  it 


53 

were,  as  a  task,  but  in  order  to  learn,  and  not 
forget  what  they  have  learned  :  this  cannot 
fail  to  have  good  consequences  ;  and  the  mis- 
sion has,  at  least,  the  merit  of  having  taught 
the  Greenlanders  to  read  well,  and  furnished 
them  with  the  means  of  farther  improvement. 
It  is  also  a  general  custom  among  the  baptized 
Greenlanders,  to  say  their  prayers  every  night 
and  morning  ;  and  nobody  will  deny  that 
this  custom,  introduced  by  the  Missionaries, 
and  which  turns  the  mind  to  religious  senti- 
ments, is  very  suitable  to  the  Greenlander, 
whose  way  of  life  exposes  him  to  such  conti- 
nual danger,  and  cannot  fail  to  produce  good 
effects. 

Formerly,  Greenland  had  ten  ordained 
Missionaries  (few  enough  on  an  extent  of  coast 
of  about  300  miles);  but,  since  1792,  the 
number  has  been  reduced,  out  of  economy,  to 
the  half !  In  the  latter  years,  when,  on  account 
of  the  war  with  England,  almost  all  commu- 
nication was  intercepted,  even  this  insufficient 
number  was  not  complete  ;  at  last  there  was 
only  one  Missionary  in  Greenland  :  when  he 
left  Greenland,  last  year,  there  was,  in  the 
whole  country,  only  one  clergyman,  who  was 


54 
a  native,  and  formerly  a  Catechist,  and  was 
ordained  by  the  beforementioned  Missionary, 
and  is  now  clergyman  at  Godthaab.  In  the 
month  of  April,  this  year  (1817),  four  Mis- 
sionaries went  to  Greenland,  of  whom  two  are 
placed  in  South  Greenland  (namely,  one  in  the 
district  of  Julianeshaab,  and  the  other  in  the 
districts  of  Holsteinborg  and  Sukkertop),  and 
two  in  the  north  of  Greenland  (namely,  one  in 
Disco  Bay,  and  the  other  at  Umanak)  ;  so  that 
the  regular  number  is  now  complete.  The 
business  of  the  Missionaries,  according"  to  the 
present  arrangement,  is  principally  to  exercise 
the  ministerial  functions  ;  to  engage,  instruct, 
and  examine  Catechists.  From  the  smallness 
of  their  number,  and  the  large  districts  which 
are  assigned  to  each,  their  time  for  these  em- 
ployments is  very  limited.  In  some  districts 
but  very  few  Greenlanders,  or  none  at  all,  live 
in  the  place  where  the  Missionary  resides ;  so 
that  his  opportunities  of  instructing  them  are 
chiefly,  indeed  entirely,  confined  to  the  jour- 
nies  which  he  is  to  make  in  his  district.  When 
he  arrives  at  the  most  distant  part  of  it  (thirty 
or  even  sixty  miles  from  his  place  of  abode), 
the  Greenlanders  are  dispersed  far  and  near, 


« 


55 

perhaps  over  an  extent  of  twenty  to  thirty 
miles.  They  are,  indeed,  summoned  tog-ether, 
but  do  not  all  come,  and  thus  even  this  op- 
portunity is  often  only  partially  made  use  of. 
I  do  not  know  upon  what  footing  the 
salaries  of  the  Missionaries  are  now  placed, 
but  a  few  years  ago  it  was  300  rixdollars, 
and,  besides,  an  allowance  of  European  pro- 
visions ;  this  allowance  consists  in  the  fol- 
lowing articles,  which  he  receives  every  twen- 
tieth day.  Twenty-eight  pounds  of  ship 
biscuit,  nine  pounds  of  butter,  twelve  pounds 
of  salt  meat,  eight  pounds  of  bacon,  six 
pounds  of  stock-fish,  one  bushel  of  peeled  bar- 
ley, and  half  a  bushel  of  peas.  As  the  Mis- 
sionary was  to  keep  his  housekeeper  with  this, 
the  allowance  was  not  very  abundant,  and 
the  salary  not  sufficient,  particularly  as  he 
must  make  many  and  often  long  journies  at 
his  own  expense.  The  following  passage, 
taken  from  a  short  essay  of  a  former  Mission- 
ary, will  place  this  matter  in  the  true  light. 
To  the  remotest  part  of  my  district,  I 
had  a  journey  of  fifty-six  long  miles,  that 
is  a  hundred  and  twelve  miles  there  and  back. 
This  journey  could  not  be  completed  in  less 
than  eight  weeks,   if  I  executed  in  a  proper 


56 
manner  the  various  duties  of  my  office,  which 
awaited  me  among-  the  Greenlanders  there 
assembled.  During  this  long  period,  I  had 
to  feed  eight  always  hungry  Greenlanders, 
who  attended  me,  daily  with  European  food, 
which  is  dearer  in  Greenland  than  elsewhere, 
because  the  merchants,  in  the  sale  of  the  pro- 
visions, very  justly  reckon  the  freight  for  send- 
ing them  over.  These  Greenlanders  received 
pretty  high  wages,  in  money  or  goods.  In 
this  manner  more  than  the  half  of  my  salary 
of  300  dollars  was  expended.  And  if,  as  was 
my  duty,  I  now  and  then,  during*  the  sum- 
mer, visited  the  Greenlanders  in  the  bay  and 
on  the  islands,  which  occasioned  a  propor- 
tionate expense,  what  had  I  left  to  procure 
myself  the  few  conveniences  to  which  I  had 
been  accustomed  in  my  mother  country  ? 
Nothing-.  My  salary  was  not  even  suffici- 
ent for  the  necessary  journies.  These  must, 
however,  be  made  ;  and  if  it  is  necessary  in 
any  country  in  the  world  to  make  home 
comfortable,  it  is  truly  in  Greenland.  Remote 
from  friends,  relations,  and  country,  between 
mountains  of  ice,  and  the  storms  of  the  pole, 
with  poor  nourishment  and  fatiguing  labour, 
the  life  of  a  Missionary  in  Greenland  is  hard 


57 
enough.  The  Missionaries  should  be  so  paid, 
that,  besides  the  expenses  which  the  perform- 
ance of  their  functions  requires,  they  might 
have  something-  over,  to  make  life  comforta- 
ble. Even  if  their  number  were  doubled, 
and  the  district,  and,  consequently,  the  dis- 
bursements of  each  Missionary  less,  his  salary 
must  still  be  larger  than  it  has  hitherto  been. 
Strength  to  perform  the  duties  of  his  office, 
greater  zeal  in  the  fulfilment  of  them,  and 
the  cheerfulness  necessary  to  accomplish  his 
hard  vocation,  would  be  the  happy  conse- 
quences. The  Missionary,  who  is  too  con- 
scientious to  break  his  oath,  to  rob  the  king, 
and  to  disgrace  himself  and  his  office  by 
prohibited  trade,  goes  poor  to  Greenland,  and 
returns  poorer  still." 

The  assistants  of  the  Missionaries,  the  Ca- 
techists,  are  natives.  In  every  district,  where 
there  are  several,  one  of  them  is  chief  Ca- 
tehist.  These  chief  Catechists  are  generally 
Blendlings  of  good  understanding,  who  speak, 
or  at  least  understand,  Danish.  They  have  a 
salary  of  30  or  40  rixdollars,  and  an  allow- 
ance of  European  provisions,  like  the  work- 
men in  the  colonies;  but  the  other  Cate- 
chists, who  are  for  the  most  part  Greenlanders, 

l 


58 
have  4,  6,  or  at  the  most  10  dollars  per 
annum,  and  no  allowance.  Such  a  salary 
is  not  indeed  very  tempting- ;  and  it  cannot 
be  wondered  at,  if  such  a  native  Catechist 
prefers  the  employments,  which  he  has  to 
follow,  as  a  Greenlander  for  the  support  of 
himself  and  his  family,  to  his  duties  as  a 
Catechist.  Only  the  little  honour  which  is 
united  with  the  post  of  a  Catechist,  and  the 
consideration,  which,  if  he  is  an  honest  man, 
he  enjoys  among  his  countrymen,  can  tempt 
a  Greenlander  to  accept  of  such  a  place. 
The  Missionaries  have  also  Sub-teachers  in 
their  service  ;  but  all  they  are  capable  of 
(with  few  exceptions)  consists  in  being"  able 
to  repeat  the  catechism,  and  to  read  it,  as  well 
as  what  is  translated  from  the  Bible.  It  is 
extremely  seldom  that  one  of  these  Sub- 
teachers  ever  succeeds  any  farther,  than  in 
teaching*  the  Greenlanders  to  read,  and  this 
is,  in  fact,  all  that  can  be  expected,  if  we 
consider  the  education  he  has  received,  and 
the  small  recompence  that  he  obtains  (perhaps 
one  or  two  dollars  per  annum).  It  is  difficult 
to  procure  capable  persons  for  the  places  of 
Catechists,  and  Sub-teachers,  because  they 
have  no  prospect  of  a  tolerable  situation  in 


59 
the  future,  and  the  Missionaries  can  give  them 
only  uncertain  promises  of  farther  promotion 
in  the  service  of  the  Mission. 

In  former  times,  many  things  were  very 
different.  There  were,  formerly,  two  Provosts 
in  Greenland,  but  now  there  is  no  superintend- 
ance  whatever  on  the  spot.  It  is,  therefore, 
possible  that  a  Missionary  may  neglect  his 
duties,  and,  considering  the  disproportionate 
extent  of  them,  as  the  exact  fulfilment  of 
them  almost  exceeds  all  human  ability,  and 
considering  the  exceedingly  small  and  in- 
sufficient income  of  the  Missionaries,  there 
can  be  no  want  of  temptations,  even  for  the 
most  honest  man,  and  the  most  sensible  of  his 
duties.  When  there  were  ten  Missionaries  in 
Greenland,  each  of  them  could,  in  some  mea- 
sure, attend  to  his  district,  now  and  then 
visit  the  Greenlanders,  when  they  are  dispersed 
in  summer  in  the  islands,  and  the  interior  of 
the  bays,  to  superintend  the  conduct  of  the 
Catechists,  &c.  In  the  present  extensive  dis- 
tricts, a  great  deal  must  be  neglected.  The 
Catechists  neglect  to  give  instructions ;  ac- 
counts are  heard  of  excesses,  which  would 
scarcely  happen  under  the  nearer  inspection  of 
the  Missionaries,  whom  the  Greenlanders  fear 
as  moral  censors.     Fathers  of  families,  instead 


60 
of  providing1  for  the  winter,  spend  the  best 
part  of  the  summer  season  in  unprofitable 
hunting-,  which  would  more  rarely  happen  if 
the  Missionary  could  visit  them,  and  advise 
for  their  good,  &c. 

Young*  Students,  who  had  not  yet  undergone 
their  examination  in  divinity,  were  formerly  re- 
ceived into  the  seminary  for  future  Missionaries, 
and  instructed  in  the  Greenland  language,  till, 
after  their  academical  course  was  ended,  they 
could  enter  upon  a  vacant  place  of  Missionary 
in  Greenland ;  but  many  poor  Students,  who 
had  enjoyed  the  emoluments  appointed  for 
these  seminarists,  afterwards  chose  another 
career,  without  being  able  to  repay  the  sup- 
port they  had  enjoyed.  The  college  of  the 
Mission  was  often  embarrassed  to  obtain  can- 
didates* for  the  vacant  offices;  and,  there- 
fore, resolved  to  receive  into  the  seminary 
only  candidates  of  theology,  who  had  passed 
their  examination.  This  arrangement,  indeed, 
caused  a  considerable  saving  of  expense,  but 
had  bad  consequences  in  other  respects.  The 
Candidates  seldom  engage  as  Missionaries,  till 
a  few  weeks  before  they  are  to  go  to  Green- 
land,   for   most  of  them   avoid    as   long   as 

*  Candidates  are  clergymen  who  have  not  yet  obtained  any 
church  preferment. T. 


61 

possible  going  to  a  country,  of  which  they  en- 
tertain the  most  frightful  ideas  ;  and  when  they 
do,  at  length,  suffer  themselves  to  be  engaged, 
the  time  before  their  departure  is  hardly  suf- 
ficient to  learn  the  first  elements  of  the  Green- 
land language. 

With  such  a  trifling  knowledge  of  this  dif- 
ficult language''9,  the  newly  arrived  Missionary 

(29)  The  language  of  Greenland  (with  the  exception  of  a 
few  words  resembling  the  Icelandic,  and  which  are,  undoubt- 
edly, remains  of  the  language  of  the  extirpated  Icelanders  and 
Norwegians)  has  no  resemblance  with  any  of  the  northern 
or  other  European  languages.  On  the  other  hand,  it  is  said 
to  be  almost  the  same  as  the  language  of  the  Esquimaux  in 
Labrador ;  as,  indeed,  the  Greenlanders  and  the  Esquimaux 
are  said  to  resemble  each  other  so  nearly  in  every  respect, 
that  there  is  no  doubt  of  their  being  of  the  same  origin. 
The  pronunciation  is  very  difficult  for  an  European.  The  many 
words  which  eud  in  K  and  T,  make  it  disagreeable  to  an  ear 
not  accustomed  to  it.  In  things  upon  which  the  Greenlanders 
have  been  accustomed  to  think  and  to  speak,  from  ancient 
times,  their  language  is  extremely  rich,  and  has  a  peculiar 
word  for  every  thing  and  action,  when  they  have  the  slightest 
difference :  it  is,  therefore,  possible  to  say  a  great  deal  in  this 
language  in  a  few  words.  On  the  other  hand,  for  objects, 
with  which  the  Greenlanders  have  become  acquainted  at  a 
later  period,  such  as  subjects  relative  to  morals,  religion,  arts 
and  sciences,  their  language  is  poor  in  expressions,  which  it 
therefore  borrows  from  the  Danish.  The  words  are  declined 
in  various  ways ;  thus,  for  example,  it  has  three  numbers, 
the  singular,  the  dual,  and  the  plural ;  and  the  verbs  have 
twelve  modes.    The  words  too  are  variously  compounded  with 


U2 
can   expect  little  or   no  assistance  from  the 
native  Catechists,  who   understand  very  little 
Danish.     In  this  manner,  several  years  elapse 
before  he  can  converse  with  the  Greenlanders 
upon  every-day  subjects,  much  less  upon  the 
doctrine  which  he  is  to  teach.     Before  he  can 
be  of  any  real  service   in  enlightening-  the 
Greenlanders,    half  the  time  of  his  stay   ha9 
generally  expired30.     There  can  be  no  want 
of  opportunity  to  speak  the  Greenland  lan- 
guage, if  he  does  not  avoid  the  society  of  the 
friendly,  cheerful,  and  talkative  Greenlanders, 
and   is  not    offended,   that   their  ever  lively 
humour   sometimes  excites  a  smile  or  a  sar- 
castic  remark  when   an  European  is  embar- 
rassed by  their  very   difficult   language.     It 
must  not,  however,  be  believed  that  the  Green- 

affixes  and  suffixes.  You  may,  therefore,  express  yourself  in 
this  language  very  concisely,  and  yet  very  forcibly  and  pre- 
cisely ;  but  it  appears,  from  what  we  have  said,  that  it  is  very 
difficult  for  a  foreigner  to  learn  it.  He  generally  requires 
several  years  before  he  learns  thoroughly  to  understand  the 
Greenlanders,  and  to  converse  with  them  at  his  ease,  and  he 
very  seldom  acquires  that  ease  and  force  of  expression  which 
the  natives  possess. 

(30)  This  is,  for  an  unmarried  Missionary,  six  years,  and 
for  a  married  Missionary,  ten  years ;  because  the  latter  re- 
ceives a  half  allowance  more  provisions  for  his  wife  and 
family. 


63 
landers  indulge  in  such  a  smile  at  church  :  on 
the  contrary,  they  take  a  pleasure,  when  divine 
service  is  over,  in  pointing-  out  to  the  preacher 
those  passages  of  his  sermon,  where,  as  far  as 
the  language  is  concerned,  he  might  have  ex- 
pressed himself  more  clearly. 

In  the  former  times  of  the  Mission,  it  was 
usual  to  send  to  Greenland,  boys  from  the 
Foundling  Hospital,  after  they  had  been  con- 
firmed. By  their  intercourse  with  the  natives, 
they  soon  learned  the  language,  and  became 
naturalized  in  a  short  time.  When  their  age 
admitted  of  it,  they  were  employed  as  chief 
Catechists  ;  and  were  of  great  use  to  the  Mis- 
sionaries, particularly  to  those  who  had  but 
lately  arrived,  till  they  had  learned  the  lan- 
guage. To  these  Catechists,  who  were  amena- 
ble to  the  laws,  and  might  be  brought  to 
account,  the  Missionary  could,  with  more  con- 
fidence, entrust  the  remote  places  in  his  district, 
than  to  a  native  Catechist,  who,  being  an  in- 
dependent Greenlander,  can  only  be  punished 
by  a  reproof,  which  indeed  afflicts  him,  and 
makes  him  ashamed,  or  by  his  discharge, 
which  he  but  little  regards.  The  youth,  who 
are  extremely  desirous  of  learning,  and  are 
endowed  with  rare  quickness  of  comprehension, 


64 
then  received  much  better,  and,  at  least,  more 
constant  instruction,  than  they  now  obtain  from 
the  native  Catechists,  who,  as  we  have  ob- 
served, rather  apply  (and  indeed  from  neces- 
sity) to  their  own  business  than  to  the  instruc- 
tion of  youth  -,  and,  after  the  manner  of  the 
Greenlanders,  are  fond  of  roving-  about  the 
country. 

From  all  that  has  been  said,  it  appears,  that 
the  Mission,  if  it  were  regulated  in  a  better 
manner,  might  effect  far  more  good  than  it  at 
present  does.  To  this  may  be  added  a  moral 
obstacle,  which  the  Mission  is  but  little  able 
to  check.  Many  Europeans,  of  the  labouring 
class,  bring  moral  corruption  with  them,  and 
even  make  a  point  of  honour  of  spreading  it. 
The  Greenlander  is  like  a  child,  and  follows 
every  example  without  reflection  5  hence  so 
many  offences  against  morality  among  the 
Greenlanders,  which  were  formerly  unknown 
among  them.  In  their  language,  for  instance, 
there  is  no  other  word  of  affirmation  than 
*  truly?  and  formerly  they  had  an  abhorrence 
for  strong  liquors.  They  called  brandy 
mad  water ;  and  if  one  of  their  countrymen 
was  drunk,  they  said,  to  ridicule  him,  that  he 
was  become  a  foreigner.     Now  we  see,  if  not 


65 
often,  yet  more  frequently  than  formerly, 
drunken  Greenlanders ;  and  most  of  them  are 
able  to  roar  out,  in  their  intoxication,  all  kinds 
of  sailors'  oaths.  How  much  the  bad  example 
of  some  Europeans  hinders  the  good  effects  of 
the  Mission,  is  shewn  by  the  answer  of  a  Green- 
lander,  which  is  mentioned  by  Wolf  in  the 
Essay  which  we  quoted  before.  He  had  sent 
for  the  Greenlander,  to  give  him  a  serious 
reproof  for  his  disorderly  way  of  life.  "  Re- 
prove your  countrymen,"  said  he ;  "  they 
should  be  better  and  wiser  than  we  •,  but  they 
are  much  worse.  When  you  have  corrected 
them,  then  call  me  to  account." 

It  can  therefore  scarcely  be  wondered  at,  con- 
sidering the  defects  in  the  establishment  of  the 
Mission,  that  no  more  has  been  done  towards 
the  moral  and  intellectual  improvement  of  the 
Greenlanders  ;  but  we  must  be  rather  sur- 
prised that  so  much  has  been  effected  by  it. 
Only  the  susceptibility  of  the  Greenlanders  for 
religious  sentiments,  and  their  respect  for  the 
teachers  of  religion,  can  explain  this.  Wolf, 
in  his  Essay,  expresses  himself  on  these  subjects 
as  follows : — "  I,  for  my  part,  do  not  know  in 
what  country  it  should  be  more  encouraging  to 
be   a  teacher,  than  precisely    in    Greenland, 

I 


66 
The  Greenlander  has  understanding-  enough  to 
see,  that  the  European  must  labour  diligently 
and  incessantly,  and  struggle  with  many  diffi- 
culties, before  he  acquires  sufficient  knowledge 
of  the  Greenland  language,  before  he  can  in- 
struct, edify,  and  comfort  the  children  of  the 
country.  For  this  reason,  he  loves  and  respects 
the  honest  Missionary,  who,  by  indefatigable 
industry,  has  so  far  succeeded :  I  might  almost 
say  he  honours  him  as  a  superior  being  ;  if  we 
add,  that  the  Greenlander  has  much  respect  for 
religion  (I  might  say  of  many  of  them,  that 
they  have  a  true  sense  of  the  value  of  religion, 
and  I  have  never  met  with  a  scoffer  of  religion 
among  the  natives,  except  one,  who  was 
hypochondriac),  how  much  good  might  a 
conscientious  teacher  effect  there,  if  other  ob- 
stacles did  not  oppose  him  !" 

The  Moravian  brethren  have  three  settle- 
ments in  South  Greenland.  Their  Missionaries, 
particularly  those  in  New  Herrnhut,  employ 
the  influence  which  they  have  over  the  Green- 
landers  of  their  community,  in  a  manner  which 
renders  their  situation  much  worse.  They  are 
often  in  want  of  the  first  necessaries ;  and  the 
opportunity  to  bring  up  the  youth  to  gain 
their  subsistence,  is  taken  from  them ;  because 


67 
the  brethren,  not  so  much  to  render  the  labour 
of  instructing*  more  light,  as  because  it  is  con- 
formable to  their  religious  notions,  collect  the 
Greenlanders  round  their  place  of  abode,  where 
there  is  little  opportunity  to  obtain  food,  even 
for  a  few  families,  much  less  for  so  many. 
The  representations  made  to  the  brethren  upon 
this  subject  have  been  in  vain  ;  and  the  con- 
sequences will  be,  that  the  produce  of  the 
colony  of  Godthaab,  which  has  already  so 
much  diminished  that  it  no  longer  pays  the 
expenses,  will  decline  so  much,  that  the  colony 
must  be  given  up.  In  the  other  settlements 
of  the  brethren,  particularly  at  Lichtenau, 
in  the  district  of  the  important  colony  of 
Julianeshaab,  the  drawing"  tog-ether  of  the  Green- 
landers,  and  the  inactivity  produced  by  it, 
have  so  much  increased,  that  the  consequences 
will  be  felt  by  the  trade,  unless  they  are 
checked  in  time  :  the  houses  of  sisters,  usual 
among  the  brethren,  are  checks  upon  the  popu- 
lation and  the  productiveness  of  the  colony31. 

The  Geographical  knowledge  of  Greenland 
extends  but  little  beyond  the  settlements  of  the 
Europeans  on  the  western  coast,  and  that  coast 

(31)  See  Efterretn  om  Gronl.  af  Colliu. 


68 
itself.  The  Danish  settlements  are,  eighteen 
larger  and  some  smaller  establishments  :  the 
former  are  called  colonies,  and  the  latter  fac- 
tories3", and  communicate  immediately  with 
Copenhagen  ;  the  latter,  the  produce  of  which 
is  brought  to  some  colony,  are  called  out-places 
(udsteder).  All  the  settlements  extend  from 
Nennortalik  to  the  north  of  Upernavik,  from 
about  the  59th  to  the  74th  degree  of  north 
latitude,  and  are  divided  into  two  inspector- 
ships. The  northern  inspectorship  contains 
the  following  settlements : — 

1.  The  colony  of  Upernavik,  the  most 
northerly  settlement,  was  laid  aside  in  the 
year  1790,  and  made  dependent  upon  the  facto- 
ry of  Godhavn,  because  the  communication  by 
sea  was  attended  with  so  many  difficulties.  In 
the  year  1806,  it  was  again  made  an  inde- 
pendent colony  ;  but  afterwards,  during  the 
war,  entirely  abandoned :  this  colony  is  now 
settling  again. 

2.  The  colony  of  Umanak  (formerly  Noog- 
soak),  founded  in  1758,  is  distinguished  by 
its  excellent  seal  fishery,   which  is  carried  on 

(32)  Colonies  and  factories  differ  from  each  other  only  so 
far,  that  the  latter  are  subordinate  to  the  former  in  commer- 
cial concerns. 


69 
by  the  Greenlanders,  in  their  Kajaks,  and  upon 
the  ice,  and  by  the  Danish  garrison  with  nets, 
which  are  let  down  between  the  openings  of 
the  ice.  There  are  here  coal  mines,  which 
supply  the  colony  with  that  article. 

3.  The  colony  of  Ritenbenk,  founded  in 
1 755  (and  transposing  the  letters  of  the  name), 
called  after  Count  Berkentin,  then  President 
of  the  Board  of  Trade,  has  a  good  whale- 
fishery.  Large  quantities  of  seal  blubber  and 
seals'  skins  are  obtained  from  the  natives. 

4.  The  colony  of  J  akobshavn(  Jacob's  haven), 
founded  in  1741,  was,  for  some  time,  one  of 
the  most  advantageous  establishments  in  Disco 
Bay. 

5.  The  colonies  of  Christianshaab  (Christian's 
Hope)  founded  in  1734  ;  and, 

6.  The  factory  of  Claushavn,  under  it, 
founded  in  1752,  both  in  Disco  Bay,  have  a 
good  fishery  of  seals  and  whitefish.  The  whale 
fishery  is  more  precarious.  What  was  formerly 
the  dwelling  of  the  Missionary  at  Claushavn, 
is  converted  into  a  chapel. 

7.  The  colony  of  Egedesminde  (Egedes- 
Memory),  in  Disco  Bay,  founded  in  the  year 
1759,  by  Captain  Egede,  and  called  after  his 
father,  Hans  Egede,  consists  of  a  great  many 


70  " 
large  and  small  islands.  The  proper  settle- 
ment is  on  the  island  of  Ausiet.  Between 
this  and  the  Fox  Island  (Roevoe)  there  is  a 
remarkably  safe  harbour.  A  great  many  seals 
are  caught  here,  especially  in  nets  ;  but  the 
collecting  of  eider-down  is  the  most  important 
branch  of  industry  :  about  1000  pounds  are 
annually  collected.  Among  many  abandoned 
fishing  places,  the  island  of  Akkonak  was  very 
well  peopled,  previously  to  the  year  1786; 
but  an  epidemic  carried  off,  in  the  years 
1785  and  1786,  almost  all  the  inhabitants, 
and  the  Greenlanders  are  not  to  be  persuaded 
to  settle  again  in  such  a  place.  There  are 
astonishing  quantities  of  salmon  here,  parti- 
cularly near  Ekalurksuit,  where  the  houses  of 
the  colony  formerly  stood  (about  fifteen  miles 
more  to  the  south  on  the  continent).  At  the 
distance  of  half  a  mile  from  this  spot,  there  is 
a  lake,  which  is  said  to  be  twelve  miles  in 
length,  and  surrounded  by  a  fine  country. 
From  this  lake  a  large  river  flows  into  the  sea ; 
and  in  this  river  there  is  such  an  incredible 
quantity  of  large  salmon,  that,  in  the  year 
1 792,  three  thousand  five  hundred  were  caught 
in  a  week.  This  colony  has  two  dependen- 
cies, Rif  kol  and  Wester -Eiland,  where  a  few 


71 
colonists  are  settled  in  order  to  purchase  their 
articles  from  the  Greenlanders.  Near  Rif  kol, 
on  the  north  side  of  the  island  of  Nunnursoak, 
there  is  a  roomy  and  safe  harbour,  which  was 
settled  in  1792. 

8.  The  factories,  Kronprindsens-Eiland,  and 

9.  Hunde-Eiland  (Dog  Island),  both  in 
Disco  Bay,  are  settlements  for  the  whale 
fishery.  The  first  was  settled  in  1778,  and 
consists  of  fifty  larger  and  smaller  islands,  in 
which  there  is  a  great  deal  of  scurvy-grass 
(cochlearia)  and  good  turf  moor.  On  the 
factory  island  there  grows  about  as  much 
grass  as  would  suffice  for  winter  provision  for 
a  few  goats  or  sheep.  In  the  year  1806, 
an  epidemic  distemper  carried  off  the  greater 
part  of  the  strongest  Greenlanders,  so  that 
they  have  been  scarce  since  that  time.  In  the 
years  1796  and  1798,  an  extraordinary  num- 
ber of  little  children  died  of  a  singular  disease : 
though  their  appetite  was  good,  they  pined 
away  ;  their  belly  swelled  ;  and,  after  linger- 
ing for  some  months,  they  died,  without  suf- 
fering any  great  pain.  By  this,  the  Green- 
landers who  have  children  have  been  deterred 
from  settling  here.  The  factory  of  Dog 
Island,  the  inhabitants  of  which   escaped   the 


72 
epidemic    in    1786,    consists  of  twenty-two 
islands. 

1 0.  The  factory  of  Godhavn  (Good  Haven), 
in  Disco  Island,  subsists  chiefly  by  the  whale 
fishery  and  the  produce  of  a  coal-mine,  by 
which  the  settlements  in  Disco  Bay  are  sup- 
plied with  that  article  for  fuel. 

In  the  southern  inspectorship  there  are  the 
following  settlements : — 

1.  The  colony  of  Holsteenborg,  founded  in 
1 759,  and  called  after  Count  Holstein,  then 
President  of  the  Missionary  College,  and  the 
factories  dependent  on  it. 

2.  Kirgurtursuk,  and 

3.  Omanarsuk,  subsist  chiefly  by  the  whale 
fishery.  Here,  too,  about  a  thousand  pounds 
of  eider-down  are  annually  collected.  In 
the  year  1773,  a  wooden  church  was  erected 
in  this  colony, — the  first  that  has  been  built 
by  the  Danes  in  Greenland.  In  the  district 
of  this  colony,  near  Amertlok,  there  are  found 
remains  of  the  habitations  of  the  ancient  Green- 
landers  :  farther  to  the  north,  none  such  are 
met  with.  A  colony  had  been  settled,  at  first, 
in  Sydbay,  which  was  repeatedly  destroyed  by 
the  Dutch,  and  was  wholly  abandoned  after 
Holsteinborg  was  founded. 


73 

4.  The  colony  of  Ny-Sukkertop  is  one  of 
the  most  important  settlements,  on  account  of 
the  quantity  of  seals'  blubber  which  is  procured 
there,  and  has  one  of  the  safest  and  best  har- 
bours in  the  country.  The  colony,  which 
was  founded  in  the  year  1755,  under  the  name 
of  Sukkertop,  but  was  removed,  in  the  year 
1783,  much  farther  to  the  south,  under  the 
present  name,  is  called  after  three  pointed 
hills,  which,  at  a  distance,  resemble  sugar- 
loaves. 

5.  The  colony  of  Godthaab  (Good  Hope), 
the  oldest  in  the  country,  was  first  founded  in 
the  year  1721,  by  Hans  Egede,  on  the  island 
of  Kangek,  which  is  called  by  the  Danes 
Haabets-Oe  (Island  of  Hope),  but  was,  in 
1 728,  removed  to  the  continent.  There  be- 
long under  this  colony, 

6.  The  factory  of  Fiskernaes  (Fisher  Point, 
or  Fisher  Cape),  founded  in  1754.  The  Danes 
here  carry  on  the  seal  fishery  with  nets,  which 
are  fifty  fathoms  long,  and  often  longer,  and 
eight  or  ten  fathoms  deep,  and  are  set  between 
the  islands,  where  the  seals  frequent,  so  that 
numbers  are  taken  at  once.  The  trade  with 
the  natives  is  inconsiderable,  because  the  po- 
pulation is  only  small,  and  the  greater  part 

L 


74 
belongs  to  the  community  of  the  Moravian 
Brethren,  who  have  here  two  settlements,  and 
fix  their  abode  as  near  as  possible  to  the  house 
of  meeting".  The  best  places  for  fishing  are, 
therefore,  not  occupied  ;  and  the  Greenlanders, 
who  are  often  reduced  to  want  the  first  neces- 
saries of  life,  have  nothing  left  to  sell.  The 
settlements  of  the  Moravian  Brethren  are, 
New  Herrnhut,  in  the  neighbourhood  of 
Godthaab,  founded  in  1733;  and  Lichtenfels, 
not  far  from  Fiskernaes,  founded  in  1758. 
In  this  district,  particularly  in  an  arm  of  JBals 
Revier,  talc  is  found,  of  which  the  Greenland- 
ers make  lamps  and  kettles :  here  also  are 
many  remains  of  ancient  dwellings. 

7.  The  colony  of  Frederikshaab  (Frederick's 
Hope),  founded  in  1742,  has  a  district  extend- 
ing so  far  to  the  south,  that  it  has  been  found 
necessary  to  establish  an  out-place  at  Arsut, 
where  a  colonist  is  settled,  who  purchases  of 
the  Greenlanders  the  articles  they  have  to  sell, 
that  they  may  not  be  lost  to  the  trade.  In 
this  district  also  there  is  some  talc. 

8.  The  colony  of  Julianeshaab  (Juliana's 
Hope),  the  most  southerly,  and  on  account  of 
the  pretty  certain  purchase  of  seals'  blubber, 
seals' skins,  and  foxes'   skins,  the  most  im- 


75 
portant  colony,  was  founded  in  1775,  and  its 
district  extends  to  the  most  southerly  point  of 
Greenland,  Statenhuk,   and  beyond  it,  along 
the  east  side,  as  far  as  inhabitants  are  known 
to  exist.     As  these  are  so  far  remote  from  the 
colony,  that  it  is  difficult  for  them   to   bring 
thither  any  thing"  but  seal  skins,  an  out-place 
is  established  at  Nennortalik  (Bear's  Island), 
where  a  colonist  is  fixed,    to  buy   the  seals' 
blubber,  that  it  may  not  be  lost.     This  colony 
is  the  only  one  where  the  servants  of  the  com- 
pany  can   keep   horned  cattle,    though  it  is 
difficult  enough  to  procure  winter  fodder  for  a 
few  beasts,  because  the  breeding  of  cattle  can 
be  carried  on  only  as  an  accessary  branch  of 
employment,  and  not  in  a  manner  adapted  to 
the  nature  of  the   country.     Farther  up  the 
bays,  some  single  families  living  there  find 
good   pasturage  for  a  few   sheep.      A  small 
wood  of  low  birch  trees  has  furnished  the  co- 
lony with  the  necessary  fuel ;  but  it  has  been 
found  more  advantageous  to  supply  the  colony 
with  fuel  from  Copenhagen,  because  the  felling 
of  wood  caused  more  important  labours  to  be 
neglected.     The  difficulty  of  sending  vessels 
to  this  colony,  which  occasioned  frequent  losses, 
induced  the  purchase  of  a  galliot,  which  re- 


76 
mains  constantly  in  Greenland,  to  convey 
the  produce  of  Julianeshaab  to  Frederiks- 
haab,  and  to  carry  back  to  the  former  colony 
every  thing-  necessary  for  its  supply.  In  the 
district  of  this  colony,  a  great  many  bays 
go  deep  into  the  land,  and  on  these  bays  are 
found  numerous  vestiges  of  the  habitations 
of  former  inhabitants.  Here  also  is  the  most 
southerly  settlement  of  the  Moravian  Brethren, 
Lichtenau,  near  the  island  of  Onartok,  which 
has  three  warm  springs. 

Among  the  many  bays  along  the  whole 
coast  which  run  up  into  the  country,  the  fol- 
lowing appear  to  be  the  most  remarkable. 

1 .  Isefjord  (Ice  bay,  Icecreek),  between  the 
colony  of  Jacobshavn  and  the  factory  of 
Claushavn. 

2.  Balsrevier,  in  which  the  colony  of  God- 
thaab  lies. 

3.  Amarilikfjord,  rather  farther  to  the 
south.  This  bay  runs  many  miles  up  the 
country,  and  then  divides  into  several  arms* 

4.  Bjoernesund  (Bear  Sound),  and 

b.  Iisblink  (generally  called  in  the  maps, 
Witte  blink),  between  the  factory  of  Fisker- 
naes  and  the  colony  of  Frederikshaab.  Over 
the  mouth  of  this  bay,  there  is  a   dreadful 


77 
bridge  of  ice,  upon  which  you  may  pass  from 
one  side  to  the  other,  and  from  which,  at  the 
distance  of  many  miles,  a  light  is  seen  in 
the  air,  like  that  of  the  Aurora  Borealis. 
These  arches  of  ice  being*  from  twenty  to 
sixty  ells  in  height,  it  would  be  easy  to 
sail  under  them,  if  there  were  not  reason  to 
fear  the  falling  pieces  of  ice:  within  this 
icy  bridge,  the  water  is  open. 

6.  Sermeliarsok,  south  of  Frederikshaab. 
Before  this  bay  lies  the  island  of  Nunarsoak 
(Desolation). 

This  last  bay  has  been  long  considered  to 
be  Frobisher's  Strait,  and  we  find  this  strait 
so  misplaced  in  an  English  Chart  (the  Green- 
land Pilot),  published  in  the  year  1800, 
though  there  cannot  well  be  the  least  doubt 
but  that  it  is  to  be  looked  for  much  far- 
ther westward,  and  to  the  north  of  Hud- 
son's bay.  In  the  same  manner  it  is  con- 
jectured there  was  formerly  a  passage  to  the 
east  side,  through  the  Bear  sound  and  Ise- 
fjord.  That  these  bays,  and  perhaps  others, 
go  through  the  country,  is  not  incredible ; 
but  whether  they  formerly  afforded  a  passage 
through,  is  another  question.  This  opi- 
nion is,  perhaps,  chiefly  founded  on  ancient 


7S 

uncertain  traditions  of  the  Greenlanders :  the 
old  Icelandic  accounts  of  Greenland,  as  far 
as  I  am  acquainted  with  them,  make  no  men- 
tion of  such  a  passage. 

The  population  of  Greenland  is  very  small 
in  proportion  to  the  extent  of  the  country. 
According  to  an  account  taken  in  1798,  the 
number  of  the  natives  was  found  not  to 
exceed  about  5100  persons.  In  the  year 
1805,  the  population,  so  far  as  it  could  be 
ascertained,  was  full  6000  persons.  These 
two  statements,  however,  are  neither  of  them 
quite  to  be  depended  on,  as  may  be  pre- 
sumed from  the  rambling  life  of  the  Green- 
landers.  The  more  frequent  marriages  of  Da- 
nish subaltern  officers  of  the  company  with 
Greenland  women,  have  probably  much  con- 
tributed to  the  increase  of  the  population. 

For  the  administration  of  the  Colonies  and 
of  the  Trade,  there  are  two  Inspectors,  and 
about  thirty  superior  officers  (Merchants  and 
Clerks).  In  the  several  settlements  there  are 
about  160  inferior  officers,  as  artisans,  sailors, 
and  workmen,  among  whom  there  have  al- 
ways been  some  natives.  Of  late  years,  the 
number  of  these  natives  has  been  particularly 
increased  with  Blendlings,  who,  when  well 


79 
directed  and  treated,  are  by  no  means  infe- 
rior to  the  Europeans  in  capacity  for  labour ;  by 
which  much  is  gained,  both  in  an  economical 
and  moral  point  of  view ;  for  these  Blendlings 
are  satisfied  with  smaller  wages  than  the  Eu- 
ropeans, whose  morals,  in  general,  are  no  good 
example  for  the  Greenlanders. 

Of  the  interior  of  the  country,  little  or  no- 
thing is  known,  because  no  trouble  has  been 
taken  to  explore  it,  on  the  supposition  that, 
since  the  passage  to  Old  Greenland  has  been 
forgotten,  the  country  has  lost  in  respect  to 
vegetation  and  pasturage.  That  such  a  sup- 
position is  entertained  is  no  great  wonder. 
People  had  formed  exaggerated  ideas  of  the 
beauty  of  Old  Greenland,  and,  on  the  first 
rediscovery  of  the  country,  hardly  any  thing 
was  found  but  naked  rocks  and  rude  coasts. 
The  first  thought  which  naturally  arose,  was, 
that  the  country  had  grown  worse,  and  no- 
thing more  was  thought  of  than  to  make 
use  of  it  for  the  purposes  to  which  it  seemed 
adapted ;  namely,  for  the  whale  and  seal  fish- 
ery, and  for  trade  :  new  colonies  were  founded 
in  the  most  convenient  places,  that  is  upon 
the  coasts*  The  new  settlers  were  too  much 
occupied   with  their  trade  to  be  able  to  ex- 


80 
amine  whether  their  preconceived  opinion  of 
the  country  was  well  founded. 

The  daily  sight  of  moss,  and  naked  rocks 
of  snow  and  ice,  served  to  confirm  this  opi- 
nion, and,  probably,  still  serves  rather  to  in- 
crease the  bad  idea  of  Greenland,  which  the 
colonists  bring  with  them,  than  to  make  them 
recognize  in  it  the  former  abode  of  a  people 
whose  employment  was  the  breeding  of  cattle; 
but  how  much  the  outside  may  deceive  us 
here,  as  it  does  in  other  cases,  appears  from  this 
circumstance,  that  the  frightfully  desolate  and 
naked  island  of  Nunarsoak,  which  lies  before 
the  fine  bay,  in  the  district  of  the  colony 
of  Julianeshaab,  gave  occasion  to  call  this 
better  part  of  the  country,  "  Desolation.' ' 
The  circumstance  that  the  natives  live  al- 
ways on  the  coast,  and  use  the  interior  of 
the  country  only  a  short  time,  for  the  pur- 
poses of  hunting,  may  also  have  contributed 
to  make  people  entertain  no  better  opinion 
of  it  than  of  the  coast ;  but  among  a  peo- 
ple, who,  from  ancient  times,  have  lived  by 
the  sea,  and  have  no  conception  of  agri- 
culture and  breeding  of  cattle,  this  circum- 
stance cannot  be  taken  into  account. 

The  Europeans  had  settled  an  Greenland 


81 
above  half  a  century  before  they  paid  any 
attention  to  the  many  traces  of  former  in- 
habitants which  are  found  in  the  district  of 
Julianeshaab  ;  and  the  remains  of  ancient  ha- 
bitations found  in  the  more  northern  parts, 
which  are  mentioned  already  by  Egede,  Cranz, 
&c,  are  so  inconsiderable,  that  they  rather 
strengthen  the  general  prejudices  of  the  un- 
fitness of  the  country  for  the  breeding  of 
cattle,  than  give  a  clear  idea  of  the  means 
which  it  affords  for  subsistence,  and  of  its 
former  application  to  the  breeding  of  cattle, 
and  the  possibility  of  still  turning  it  to  the 
same  use".  It  is  hardly  to  be  doubted  that 
in  the  interior  of  the  country,  on  the  shores 

(S3)  According  to  ancient  accounts,  there  were  upon  the 
east  side  of  the  country  (Oesterboigd)  1 90  Bygde  or  Boigde 
(a  collection  of  habitations,  which,  in  some  measure,  lie  upon 
one  spot,  and,  therefore,  form  straggling  villages),  several 
Convents,  one  Bishop's  see  at  Gardar,  and  on  the  west  side 
(Vesterboigd),  ninety  Bygde,  and  four  or  five  churches.  The 
country  was  rich  in  pasture,  oxen  and  sheep,  and  the  inhabit- 
ants paid  a  tribute  in  cheese  and  butter,  which,  on  account  of 
the  superior  quality  of  these  articles,  at  the  time  of  Queen 
Margaret,  was  delivered  into  the  Royal  buttery.  On  the 
other  band,  the  land  produced  but  little  corn,  and  most  of  the 
inhabitants,  as  is  said,  in  Kongs-Skugg-Sio  (King's  looking- 
glass),  did  not  know  what  bread  was,  and  never  sowed  corn. 

M 


82 
of  the  gulphs,  which  run  far  inland,  there 
are  many  places  where  numerous  families 
might  find  ample  means  of  subsistence,  as 
well  as  the  ancient  inhabitants  who  have  been 
extinct  for  some  centuries.  Thus,  for  exam- 
ple, on  the  Amaralikfjord,  which  extends  five 
or  six  miles  inland,  and  then  divides  in 
many  branches,  there  are  upon  these  branches 
beautiful  vallies,  which  contain  considerable 
remains  of  the  habitations  of  the  ancient  in- 
habitants. The  reindeer,  which  are  there 
numerous,  and  the  agreeable  climate,  entice 
the  Greenlanders  thither  in  summer,  and 
they,  as  well  as  the  Danes  who  have  been 
there,  cannot  sufficiently  extol  the  beauty 
of  these  vallies. 

Even  now,  it  is  evident  that  many  families 
might  subsist  in  several  places  of  the  dis- 
trict of  Julianeshaab,  like  the  ancient  pas- 
toral inhabitants ;  for  the  few  cattle  kept  there, 
thrive  very  well,  though  they  are  but  ill  at- 
tended to.  At  least  it  must  be  as  easy  to 
make  use  of  the  reindeer  in  Greenland,  as  in 
Lapland,  and  this  must  be  attended  with 
profit. 

The  east   side  of  the  country  is  not  at 


83 
all  known,  for  every  attempt  to  land  there 
has  failed34.  That  this  coast  is  inhabited  by 
a  race  of  men,  the  same  as  the  Greenlanders 
on  the  west  coast,  is  beyond  all  doubt  (for 
the  inhabitants  come  now  and  then  to  Nen- 
nortalik,  and  even  to  Julianeshaab,  to  trade)  j 
and  it  is  to  be  presumed  that  it  is  inhabited 
beyond  the  polar  ice,  as  it  is  affirmed  that 
one  of  these  inhabitants  said,  that  in  his 
country,  in  the  summer  time,  the  sun  did 
not  set  for  many  days  together.  But  whether 
this  coast  is  inhabitable  by  Europeans, 
or  whether  it  ever  has  been  inhabited  by 
them,  cannot  be  decided,  on  account  of  the 
total  want  of  knowledge  of  its  nature  ;  but 
it  is  asserted  that  in  two  places  there  are 
remains  of  ancient  habitations.  If  this  were 
really  the  case,  it  would  be  much  in  favour 
of  the  general  opinion,  which  however  has 
been  much  contested   in  modern  times,  that 

(34)  It  is  said,  indeed,  that  Admiral  Godske  Linden o\v, 
who  was  sent  by  Christian  IV  to  look  for  Greenland,  suc- 
ceeded in  landing  upon  the  east  coast,  in  the  year  16*05. 
But  if  this  landing  on  the  east  coast  really  took  place,  which 
is  not  proved,  no  other  consequence  resulted  from  it,  than 
that  some  of  the  unfortunate  inhabitants  were  dragged  to 
Copenhagen. 


84 
the    Oesterboigd  of  the    ancients    lay   upon 
this  coast. 

This  opinion    has   been    disputed   princi- 
pally by    H.  P.  Von  Eggers,  in  his  essay, 
Om  Gronlands  Osterbygds  sande  Beliggenhed 
(on   the  real   Situation  of  the  Osterbygd  in 
Greenland),  in  the  collection  of  "  det  konge- 
lige  danske  Landhuusholdnings  Selskabs  Skrif- 
ter,  4Deel,  1794,"  and  defended  by  Wormsk- 
jold,    in  his   essay,  "Gammelt  og  Nyt   om 
Gronlands,  Viinlands  og  nogle  af  Forfaedrene 
kjendte  Landes  formeentlige  Beliggende"  (Old 
and  New  Observations  on  the  presumed  Situ- 
ation  of  Greenland,    Weinland,    and   other 
Countries   known  to   our  Ancestors),  in   the 
writings   of  the    Scandinavian   Literary  So- 
ciety, 1814.     Whether  the  opinion  supported 
by  Eggers,  that  the  Osterboigd  of  the  anci- 
ents  was  situated   in   the  district  of  Julian- 
eshaab ;  or  Wormskjold's  opinion,  that  by  Ves- 
terboigd,  in  the  more  extensive  sense,  we  are 
to   understand  the  now  known  west  coast  of 
Greenland,   and  by  Vesterboigd,  in  a  more 
limited   sense,    the  district   of  Julianeshaab, 
and  that  the  Osterboigd  is  to  be  looked  for 
on  the  east   coast   of  the   country,   but  not 


85       . 
more   to  the  south  than  62°,    and  not  more 
to  the  north  than  65°,   is  the  best  founded, 
time  must  shew. 

So  much  is  certain,  that  the  situation  of 
the  east  coast,  on  the  map  drawn  by  Torfceus, 
which  is  looked  upon  by  Geographers  as  cor- 
rect, and  has  been  generally  copied,  is  in- 
correct ;  but  he  himself  did  not  attach  so 
much  value  to  his  map  as  others  have  done. 
In  his  note  upon  the  back  of  this  map  (added 
to  his  work,  Gronlandia  Antiqva)  he  says  very 
honestly,  after  touching  upon  the  difference 
between  it  and  the  maps  of  his  predecessors : 
"  Consultissimum  igitur  duco  reservare  hsec 
omnia  futurae  experiential,  et  neqve  meam 
neqve  aliorum  tabulas  credere  cum  terra  ipsa 
ad  amussim  concord  are35."  Under  the  65°  of 
latitude  this  coast  is  placed  from  4°  to  6°  lon- 
gitude too  far  east :  more  to  the  north  and 
to  the  south,  this  coast  may,  perhaps,  be  laid 
down  more  accurately. 

Lieutenant  Egede  says,    that  in  his   voy- 
ages, in  the  years  1786  and  1787,  to  attempt 

(35)  "  I,  therefore,  consider  it  as  the  best  way  to  leave 
all  this  to  future  experience,  and  not  to  believe  that  my 
map,  or  others,  exactly  agree  with  the  situation  of  the  coun- 
try itself." 


86 

a  landing1  on  the  east  coast  of  Greenland, 
he  found  in  latitude  64°,  and  in  longitude 
from  40  to  41°  west  of  Paris,  ice,  beyond 
which  he  could  not  see  from  the  mast  head  : 
here,  therefore,  the  coast36  must  fall  away  to 
the  west,  and  form  a  bay.  In  David  DanelPs31 
voyages,  it  is  stated,  in  a  remark  of  the  6th 
of  June,  1652,  that  the  coast  in  the  65°  of 
latitude  extends  east  and  west  with  Sneef- 
jeldsjokel  (a  glacier  near  Sneefjeldsnces),  and 
that,  on  the  4th  of  June  of  the  same  year, 
they  saw  the  land  at  a  distance  of  ten  miles  to 
the  north. 

That  part  of  the  east  coast  of  Greenland, 
the  situation  of  which  is  known  with  some 
certainty,  extends,  according'  to  the  map  pub- 
lished by  Lieutenant  Egede,  in  1789,  under 
the  65s  and  66°  of  latitude,  and  36°  and  39° 
of  longitude  west  from  Paris,  south-south- 
west, and  north-north-east,  and,  therefore,  ap- 
proaches Iceland  under  the  66°.  Now,  as  the 
north-west  coast  of  Iceland  lies  much  more 
west  than    the  more   southern    parts  of  the 

(36)  That  b  to  say,  if  this  account  may  be  depended  upon. 
He  does  not  say  when  he  was  in  this  longitude  and  latitude. 

(37)  D.  Danells  or  de  Nelles  went  in  the  years  1052  and  53 
to  discover  the  Osterboigd. 


37 
country,  this  seems  to  indicate  that  the  coast 
of  Greenland  projects  to  the  east,  exactly 
towards  the  north-west  part  of  Iceland,  and 
forms  a  point ;  which  agTees  at  least  with  the 
theory  of  nature  (of  which  we  may  be  con- 
vinced by  looking"  at  any  good  map  re- 
presenting coasts  opposite  each  other),  name- 
ly, that  where  one  coast  projects  consider- 
ably, the  opposite  coast  generally  projects 
also38. 

In  Iceland  (as  I  have  heard  from  my 
friend  Lieutenant  Von  Born,  who  has  mea- 
sured the  north-west  part  of  Iceland),  they 
estimate  the  distance  of  Greenland  from  that 
part  of  Iceland,  at  between  thirty  and  forty 
miles.  Dutch  captains  have  also  assured  him, 
that,  in  the  channel  between  the  two  coun- 
tries, they  had  seen  at  the  same  time  the  Sneef- 
jeldsjokel  and  the  Hvidserk,  a  very  high 
mountain,  which,  according  to  ancient  ac- 
counts, is  situated  on  the  Greenland  coast. 

From  what  has  been  said  above  of  the  pos- 

(38)  Lieutenant  Egede  also  mentions  in  his  voyage,  that  on 
the  17th  of  May,  1787,  a  signal  was  made  from  the  ship  de- 
tached by  him,  in  about  65°  16'  north  latitude,  and  34°  47' 
longitude  west  from  Paris,  that  they  could  see  land  about  ten 
miles  to  the  north. 


88 

sible  and  probable  projection  of  the  Green- 
land coast  towards  the  north-west  part  of 
Iceland,  the  above  estimate  of  the  distance 
between  both,  seems  not  to  be  absurd  -, 
but  as  for  the  assertion  of  the  captains,  it 
is  to  be  conjectured  that  an  illusion  took 
place,  which,  perhaps,  was  occasioned  by  the 
ancient  tradition  that  the  two  abovemen- 
tioned  mountains  might  be  seen  half  way 
between  Greenland  and  Iceland. 

If  we  place  the  Hvidserk  according  to 
P.  Egede's  chart,  under  67°,  the  distance  be- 
tween that  and  Sneefjeldsjokel  must  be  at  least 
seventy  miles,  and  the  middle  of  the  channel 
about  thirty-five  miles  from  each  of  the  two 
mountains,  a  distance  at  which  it  cannot  be 
supposed  possible  to  see  them  from  the  sur- 
face of  the  sea  ;  if,  with  Worm skj old,  we  sup- 
pose that  the  Hvidserk  may  lie  under  6b°, 
the  distance  from  Sneefjeldsjokel  will  be  still 
greater,  and  the  assertion  of  the  captains  still 
more  incredible.  But  that  the  Hvidserk  can- 
not well  lie  under  the  first  mentioned  la- 
titude appears  to  be  evident,  from  the  fact, 
that  from  the  rocks  within  the  bay,  on  the 
north-west  coast  of  Iceland,  which  rise  into 
and  above  the  clouds,  and  from  which  you 


89 
may  see  above  thirty  miles  into  the  coun- 
try, neither  the  Greenland  coast  nor  a  moun- 
tain upon  it  are  to  be  seen,  and  from  so 
elevated  a  point  of  view,  a  mountain,  which 
was  visible  from  the  surface  of  the  sea, 
at  the  distance  of  thirty  or  thirty-five  miles, 
might  surely  be  seen  at  the  distance  of  fifty 
miles,  or  more,  as  no  object  intervenes  to  im- 
pede the  prospect39.  However,  that  Green- 
land is  not  to  be  seen  from  these  rocks,  can- 
not well  lessen  the  probability  of  the  con- 
jecture, that  it  is  not  above  forty  miles  dis- 
tant, partly  because  these  high  rocks  do  not 
lie  in  the  extreme  west  coast  of  Iceland, 
but  many  of  them  several  miles  farther  to 
the  east  ;  partly  because  the  convexity  of  the 
earth  is  to  be  taken  into  account,  in  so  con- 
siderable a  distance. 

That  the  distance  between  Iceland  and 
Greenland  is  considerably  less  under  the  66° 
than  in  a  more  southern  latitude,  may  be 
indeed  taken  for  granted;    but   this   smaller 

(39)  Born,  though  his  eyesight  is  uncommonly  keen,  and 
though  he  has  frequently  looked  from  the  rocks  of  Iceland  for 
the  purpose,  was  never  able  to  descry  the  coasts  of  Greenland ; 
but  he  sometimes  saw  the  ice,  which  is  collected  before  it,  even 
when  the  channel  between  Greenland  and  Iceland  is  free 
from  it. 

N 


90 
distance  will  hardly  afford  the  advantage  which 
our  author  seems  to  expect  from  it  (Chap.  III). 
Every  attempt  to  approach  the  land  on  this 
side  would  probably  be  fruitless,  as  the  ice, 
in  this  narrower  channel,  which  is  frequently 
blocked  up  by  it,  will  be  always  more  col- 
lected, particularly  on  the  coast  of  Greenland. 
This  was  probably  the  case  also  in  ancient 
times,  as  the  old  sailing*  directions,  at  least 
as  far  as  I  have  any  knowledge  of  them,  men- 
tion no  more  northern  passage  than  from 
Sneefjeldnss.  A  passage  in  the  King's  Look- 
ing-glass seems  to  refer  to  this ;  it  says  that 
the  ice  to  the  north-east,  or  north,  lies  more  out 
before  the  land  than  in  the  south  and  south- 
west, and  that,  therefore,  every  one  who  seeks 
to  reach  the  coast,  must  not  attempt  to  ap- 
proach it  till  he  has  passed  all  this  usual  ice. 
Besides,  it  might  be  difficult  to  find  in  the 
north-west  parts  of  Iceland,  ports,  which, 
without  some  previous  arrangement,  would  af- 
ford secure  winter  retreat  for  the  ships  to  be 
sent  out  for  this  purpose.  Any  future  attempt 
to  sail  to  the  east  coast,  if  it  should  ever  be 
undertaken,  will  probably  be  best  made  in  a 
more  southern  latitude,  viz.  as  has  been  al- 
ready said,  according  to  Wormskjold's  opinion, 


i 

between  the  sixty-second  and  sixty-fifth  de- 
grees, where  this  coast  must  be,  on  average, 
much  more  than  a  hundred  miles  distant  from 
Iceland. 

With  respect  to  the  map  which  I  have 
drawn,  according"  to  the  wish  of  my  pub- 
lisher, I  find  it  necessary  to  make  the  following 
remarks : — The  west  coast  of  Greenland,  as  the 
principal,  is  laid  down  according  to  P.  Egede's 
chart,  the  best  that  has  yet  been  published. 
In  order  to  introduce  some  parts  qf  Iceland 
and  other  points,  I  was  obliged  to  draw  the 
meridians  in  other  angles  to  the  basis  of  the 
chart,  by  which  a  larger  piece  of  James  Island 
is  introduced  than  in  P.  Egede's  map.  For 
this  I  had  no  other  model  than  a  map  of  Ame- 
rica, published  this  year  (1817)  by  the  Royal 
Marine  Chart  Office,  the  scale  of  which  is  much 
smaller  than  that  of  my  map.  This  island  is, 
therefore,  merely  laid  down  according  to  its 
situation  ;  but,  as  James  Island  is  here  of  little 
consequence,  the  imperfect  drawing  of  it  is  of 
no  importance.  The  piece  of  the  north-west 
coast  of  Iceland  is  laid  down  according  to  a 
plan  communicated  to  me,  made  after  the 
latest  admeasurements  undertaken  since  1815. 
The  grounds  upon  which  I  have  laid  down, 


by  approximation,  the  direction  of  the  east 
coast  of  the  southernmost  point  of  Greenland, 
up  to  the  latitude  of  Iceland,  are  contained  in 
what  is  said  above  on  this  subject ;  but  on  the 
direction  of  this  coast  above  Iceland,  I  was 
quite  in  the  dark,  in  respect  to  the  longitude. 
Now,  as  the  latitude  of  one  point,  and  the  di- 
rection of  the  coast,  were  given  (see  Chap.  I, 
Note  1 ),  I  took  the  longitude  (as  near  as  may 
be)  according  to  the  beforementioned  map  of 
America.  The  whole  direction  of  the  east 
coast,  therefore  (excepting  the  part  laid  down 
with  some  certainty  after  Lieutenant  Egede's 
map),  is  merely  conjectural,  but  probably 
more  accurate  than  on  other  maps.  If  I  ex- 
cept the  names  of  the  waters,  my  map  contains 
only  those  which  are  mentioned  in  what  pre- 
cedes, and  even  some  of  these  are  omitted, 
because  I  did  not  find  them  in  my  model,  and 
do  not  exactly  know  their  positions. 

To  the  Danish  original,  is  prefixed  a  Letter 
from  Dr.  F.  Plum,  Bishop  of  Fuhnen,  to  the 
Privy  Counsellor,  John  Biilow,  who  has  de- 
frayed the  expenses  of  the  original.  The  fol- 
lowing passages  seem  particularly  interesting, 
partly  in  a  scientific  point  of  view,  and  partly 
-in  other  respects : — 


93 

tf  I  confess,"  says  the  Bishop,  "  that  the 
interest  which  the  book  excited  in  me,  was 
heightened  by  the  manner  in  which  I  became 
acquainted  with  it.  The  author,  a  venerable 
clergyman,  seventy-one  years  of  age,  read  me 
some  passages  out  of  the  manuscript,  on  a 
journey  to  visit  the  churches  of  my  diocese. 
He  read  to  me  about  the  country  where  the 
Egedes,  his  mother's  father  and  brother,  had 
formerly  performed  such  services,  and  where 
he  himself,  as  a  new  Apostle  of  Greenland,  so 
faithfully  trod  in  their  footsteps.  He  first 
read  to  me  the  chapter  of  *  The  Avenger  of 
his  Father,'  a  piece  of  which  I  may  affirm, 
that  it  would  be  received  with  universal  admi- 
ration, if  I  could  boast  of  having  discovered  it 
as  a  fragment  of  an  ancient  Apologist." 

"  In  the  year  1540,  about  which  time  the 
author  supposes  that  Bishop  Amund  (Aug- 
mund,  or  Ogmund)  may  have  made  the  voyage 
in  the  neighbourhood  of  Greenland,  of  which 
Torfoeus  speaks,  this  Bishop  had  already  been, 
blind  for  some  time,  and  had  intended  to  lay 
down  his  office  (see  Finni  Johannaei  Hist. 
Eccles.  Isl.  torn.  2,  p.  541).  Torfoeus  says, 
expressly,  that  he  resigned,  in  this  year,  the 
bishop's  see  of  Skalholt :  the  year  of  his  voyage 


94 

must,  therefore,  be  put  farther  back48.  The 
passage  in  Torfceus  is  as  follows : — '  Traditur, 
qvod  Episcopus  Skalholtensis  Augmundus,  qvi 
anno  1502  initiatus  erat,  sed  1540  officio  se 
abdicavit,  aliqvando  in  reditu  in  Islandiam 
tempestate  in  occidentalem  oceanum  ad  Grbn- 
landiam  pulsus,  cum  aliqvantisper  juxta  littora 
in  aqvilonem  navigasset,  circiter  vesperam  pro- 
montorium  Herjolfsnesiam  agnoverit,  tamqve 
prope  terram  vela  fecerit,  ut  homines,  oves  et 
agnos  in  septa  compellentes,  perspicue  viderit ; 
inde  ferentem  ventum  nactus,  postridie  in  sinu 
Patreksfjordensi  occidentalis  Islandize  navim 
ad  anchoras  alligaverit,  idque  mane,  cum 
pecora  mulgarentur,  id  est  circiter  horam 
nonam  antemeridianum,  id  quod  minime  con- 
sistit,  vix  etiam  si  nonam  vespertinam  intel* 
lexisset41"  (Grbnlandia  Antiqua,  Hafn.  1706, 

(40)  Most  likely  about  the  year  1530,  as  I  remember  to 
have  read  somewhere. 

(41)  It  is  related,  that  Bishop  Augmund  of  Skalholt,  who 
was  consecrated  hi  1502,  and  laid  down  his  office  in  1540, 
once  returning  from  Iceland,  was  driven,  by  a  storm  in  the 
western  ocean,  towards  Greenland;  that,  as  he  had  sailed 
some  time  along  the  coast  to  the  north-east,  towards  evening 
he  perceived  the  cape  of  Herjolfsnxs ;  and,  as  he  sailed  along 
near  the  coast,  he  plainly  saw  sheep  and  lambs  driven  to  the 
fold ;  and  that  the  next  day,  having  a  good  wind,  he  anchored 
in  the  bay  of  Patreksfjord,  on  the  west  side  of  Iceland,  and 


m 

p.  261).  The  idea  of  the  discovery  of  the 
Osterboigd,  by  extending"  the  southern  colo^ 
nies  up  to  and  round  Statenhook,  to  the  eastern 
part  of  the  country,  was  not  brought  forward, 
as  far  as  is  known,  in  the  years  1786, 7,  and  8, 
when  so  much  was  written  about  Old  Green- 
land ;  nor  does  Wormskjold  mention  it  in  his 
Essay  on  the  probable  Situation  of  Greenland, 
&c,  by  which  the  hope  of  again  finding  the 
Osterboigd,  which  was  destroyed,  in  the  opi- 
nion of  many  persons,  by  the  well-known 
Essay  of  Von  Eggers,  was  again  revived  and 
made  probable,  by  a  truly  scientific  investi- 
gation42. 

that  early,  when  the  people  were  milking  the  cows,  i.  e.  about 
nine  o'clock  in  the  morning.  This,  however,  is  not  possible, 
even  if  we  would  understand  nine  o'clock  in  the  evening. 

It  is  not  known  where  the  cape  that  was  called  Herjolfsnxs 
lay.  Wormskjold,  with  Danell,  supposes  its  latitude  to  be 
about  65°.  If,  now,  we  assume  its  longitude  in  the  direction 
of  the  tract  of  coast  marked  in  Lieut.  Egede's  Chart  (it  cannot 
in  any  case  be  placed  nearer  to  Iceland),  the  distance  from 
Patreksfjord,  in  a  direct  line,  is  seventy  miles.  The  justice 
of  the  remark  with  which  Torfceus  concludes  the  passage  above 
quoted,  is,  therefore,  beyond  all  doubt. Fries. 

(42)  It  might  be  advisable  to  examine,  by  a  voyage  under- 
taken for  the  purpose,  whether  the  plan  of  the  author  is  prac- 
ticable, before  greater  expenses  were  risked  upou  attempts,  the 
success  of  which  is  so  uncertain.    If  the  inhabitants  of  the 


96 

"  Cranz  will  have  Torngarsuk  be  looked 
upon  as  a  good  being-.  A  man  of  learning, 
acquainted  with  the  country,  is  of  the  same 
opinion,  and  has  observed  to  me,  that  had  not 
this  word  been  used  in  the  very  beginning  to 
signify  the  Devil,  it  might  have  done  very 
well  as  the  name  of  God  ;  by  which  the  adop- 
tion of  the  Danish  word  Gud  (God),  in  the 
Greenland  language,  would  be  avoided.  But 
Hans  Egede  and  Paul  Egede  relate  things  of 
Torngarsuk,  which  can  hardly  be  reconciled 
with  our  ideas  of  God." 

"  At  the  conclusion  of  his  letter,  Dr.  Plum 
calls  our  Author's  work  a  fine  monument  of 
the  golden  times  of  the  Mission  in  Greenland. 

east  coast  can  come  down,  in  their  leather  boats,  to  Nennor- 
talik,  it  must  also  be  possible  to  sail  up  that  coast  in  small 
vessels;  though  it  is  to  be  conjectured,  not  as  our  author 
supposes,  that  the  current  of  all  the  bays  on  the  east  coast 
flows  towards  the  sea,  but,  in  some,  sets  inwards  up  the  coun- 
try. That  this  is  the  case  with  one  far  to  the  north,  indeed, 
we  know  (see  Chap.  I,  Note  1);  and,  according  to  the  opinion, 
that  the  sea  on  the  east  and  west  coasts  is  connected  by  the 
Bearsouud  and  Sermeljarsok  (which  opinion  is  probable  from 
the  south-west  direction  of  the  current  of  the  sea  on  the  east 
coast),  it  must  be  the  case  in,  at  least,  two  places  in  that  part 
of  the  east  coast  which  is  here  under  consideration.  Perhaps 
Mr.  Giseke  has  undertaken  such  a  journey :  the  result  of  his 
researches  is  not  yet  published.- Fries, 


97 
How  well  founded  this  opinion  is,  is  evident 
from  what  has  been  said  before,  chiefly  after 
Wolf's  Essay  on  the  present  Obstacles  to  the 
Mission.  We  must  observe,  that  the  Bishop 
not  only  caused  the  publication  of  this  Work, 
but  that  we  owe  to  his  suggestions  several  ex- 
planatory and  very  interesting*  remarks  of  our 
Author.' ' 


END    OF    THE    INTRODUCTION. 


JOURNAL  IN  GREENLAND. 


Chap.  I. 

The  Isefjord,  in  Disco  Bay. 


This  remarkable  gulph  extends  between  the 
tracts  of  land  in  which  the  colonies  of  Claushavn 
and  Jakobshavn  are  situated.  It  is  from  five 
to  six  miles  long,  and  from  a  quarter  to  half  a 
mile  in  breadth.  It  is  said  that,  in  former 
times,  it  was  free  from  iceberg's,  and  was  navi- 
gable ;  nay,  old  Greenlanders  even  relate,  after 
a  tradition  of  their  forefathers,  that  at  times 
it  was  possible  to  navigate  upon  it  to  the  east 
side  of  the  country,  between  the  rows  of  moun- 
tains which  are  now  covered  with  eternal  ice. 
They  even  relate,  that,  in  later  times,  a  piece 
of  square  timber  was  driven  down,  between 
these  mountains,  from  the  east  side,  and  that 
it  was  used  as  a  beam  in  a  house.  If  this 
were  true,  it  would  certainly  prove  that  there 
was  formerly  'a  passage  through  the  gulph, 
frons  the  east  to  the  west  side,  which  has  since 


99 
been  stopped  up  by  icebergs1.     The  ridge  of 
mountains    itself,    which    extends   along  the 
country,  and  divides  the  east  side  from  the 
west,  has  been  long  since  a  boundless  ocean  of 

(1)  Volquard  Boon,  a  whale-fisher,  of  the  island  of  Fcebr, 
gives  the  following  account  of  a  bay  on  the  east  side : — 
"  From  the  21st  of  June  till  the  31st  of  July,  176 1,  he  came 
along  the  coast  from  76°  30'  to  68°  40',  north  latitude,  at  the 
distance  of  from  one  and  a  half  to  six  miles  from  the  coast, 
the  direction  of  which  he  found  by  the  compass  to  be  north- 
east and  south-west.  On  the  27th  of  July,  in  the  latitude  of 
70°  40',  he  was  carried,  by  a  strong  current,  into  a  great  bay, 
the  breadth  of  which  he  estimated  to  be  fifteen  miles,  and  the 
direction  of  which  was  north-west  by  west.  He  could  not 
perceive  the  end  of  the  bay  ;  for,  though  the  air  was  clear, 
no  land  was  to  be  seen  (i.  e.  beyond  it) ;  and  he  therefore 
conjectured,  especially  as  the  stream  flowed  up  the  country, 
that  this  bay,  in  which  there  was  a  pretty  strong  current  and 
a  considerable  quantity  of  ice,  probably  intersected  the  coun- 
try entirely." 

Wormskjold  conjectures  that  this  bay  is  that  which  the 
ancients  called  Allum  lengri  Fjordz  (the  longest  bay  of  all), 
one  of  the  most  easterly,  which  was  narrow  before,  but  broader 
farther  from  the  mouth,  along  which  they  had  built  no  habi- 
tations, and  the  end  of  which  was  unknown  to  them.  As  the 
stream  in  the  Isefjord,  on  the  west  side,  always  flows  out- 
wards, there  arises  almost  more  than  a  conjecture,  that  this 
and  the  abovementioned  bay  have  a  connection  with  each 
other. — See  Wormskjold  Gamm.  og  Nyt,  on  Gronl.  Beligg., 
in  the  Memoirs  of  the  Scandinavian  Literary  Society,  vol.  xiii, 
p.  383-4. Fries. 


100 
ice,  which,  at  a  distance,  seems  to  blend 
with  the  clouds.  The  ice  increases  every 
year  ;  but  the  large  quantity  of  snow  which 
falls  in  the  winter  is  melted  by  the  sun  in 
summer,  flows  down  in  streams,  and  makes 
dangerous  opening's  in  the  ice,  in  which  the 
Greenlanders,  in  pursuit  of  the  reindeer,  often 
find  their  grave.  When  this  ice  projects  over 
the  water,  it  breaks  by  its  own  weight,  and 
falls  into  the  bay  -,  hence  the  terribly  magni- 
ficent mass  of  icebergs  which  I  attempt  to 
describe. 

When  such  a  piece  of  ice  falls,  the  noise 
may  be  heard  at  the  distance  of  many  miles  : 
it  rebounds  several  times  before  it  recovers  its 
equilibrium,  and  frequently  brings  up  pro- 
digious stones  with  it  from  the  bottom.  The 
whole  bay  is  in  commotion  ;  the  water  swells 
and  roars  ;  the  mountains  burst  asunder,  with 
a  loud  crash,  and  tumble  about  in  a  terrible 
manner,  till  they  either  obtain  a  firm  footing, 
or  roll  farther.  The  sea  is  covered,  to  the 
distance  of  several  miles,  with  drift  ice,  which 
impedes  the  navigation.  On  such  occasions,  the 
swelling  of  the  water  often  lifts  up  the  greater 
part  of  the  icebergs,  and  carries  them,  with 


101 
incredible  rapidity,  farther  out  into  the  bay, 
or  even  into  the  open  sea.  Here  they  often 
appear  to  us  like  ships,  which  approach  the 
land  under  full  sail :  we  are  deceived,  and 
deceived  again,  and  yet,  so  great  is  the  resem- 
blance, we  remain  standing,  with  joyful  ex- 
pectation, till  they  change  their  course,  and 
shew  themselves,  on  another  side,  in  their  true 
shape.  If  a  person  who  has  never  seen  this 
bay  were  to  exert  his  imagination  to  the  ut- 
most, he  would  not  be  able  to  form  a  just  idea 
of  it.  Conceive  a  tract  of  so  many  miles  in 
extent,  full  of  icebergs,  so  large  that  they  reach 
200  or  300  fathoms  below  the  surface  of  the 
sea.  They  look  as  if  they  would  bid  defiance 
to  time,  and  yet  they  are  deceitful  as  water.  In 
sailing  by,  you  see  houses,  castles,  gates,  win- 
dows, chimnies,  &c.  It  is  a  very  agreeable  illu- 
sion, as  long  as  we  do  not  know  how  dangerous 
it  is  to  approach  them  ;  but  even  when  we  know 
this  danger,  we  take  pleasure  in  looking  at 
them.  I  saw,  among  other  magnificent  build- 
ings, the  great  gate  of  the  Palace  of  Christian- 
burg,  with  its  pillars  and  side  doors ;  and  my 
eye  dwelt  on  the  mezzanine  story,  which  was 
astonishingly  resembling.  As  these  masses  of 
ice,  accordingly  as  they  are  formed  of  sweet  or 


102 
salt  water,  are  white,  blue,  or  green2,  this 
difference  of  colours  heightens  the  illusion, 
particularly  when  it  is  assisted  by  the  power- 
ful beams  of  the  sun.  These  masses  of  ice 
have  an  attractive  power,  to  which  the  stream 
doubtless  contributes  in  a  great  degree,  so 
that  even  large  ships  are  in  danger  of  being 
driven  against  them,  if  they  do  not  take 
care,  in  time,  to  keep  at  a  proper  distance. 
The  Greenlanders  are  very  familiar  with  them, 
though  many  lose  their  lives  by  their  con- 
fidence ;  but  as  the  seals  like  to  be  near  them, 
the  Greenlanders  must  follow  them  thither, 
and  seek  food  or  death.  The  echo  is  so  very 
strong  among  the  icebergs,  that,  not  only 
when  you  speak  as  you  sail  by  them,  you 
hear  your  words  plainly  re-echoed  from  the 
top ;  but  the  latter,  when  it  is  rotten,  as 
they  call  it  there,  is  so  shaken  by  the  sound, 
that  it  falls  down  ;  and  woe  then  to  him 
who  is  near  it !  The  following  accident 
happened    while   I   was    in  Greenland  :     A 

(2)  Our  learned  O.  Fabricius  denies  the  green  colour :  see 
his  essay  on  Drift  Ice  in  the  Northern  Seas,  in  the  new  Col- 
lection of  the  Writings  of  the  Royal  Danish  Society  of  Sciences, 
vol.  3,  page  67  ;  but  Crana,  in  his  History  of  Greenland, 
page  35,  agrees  with  roe. 


women's  boat  passed  from  my  side  of  the 
bay  to  the  other  ;  the  people  in  the  boat 
exhorted  each  other,  as  usual,  as  they  ap- 
proached the  icebergs,  not  to  speak,  and  did 
not  suffer  the  oars  to  make  any  noise ;  but  a 
young-  lad  wantonly  struck  with  apiece  of  wood 
on  the  skin  stretched  over  the  boat.  The 
sound  was  propagated  in  a  few  moments  to 
the  top  of  a  rotten  iceberg  ;  the  latter  fell  down, 
and  all  the  people  in  the  boat,  seven  in  num- 
ber, were  drowned3. 

(3)  A  remark  communicated  to  me,  by  a  friend,  which  was 
occasioned  by  the  above  account,  makes  the  following  expla- 
nation necessary. 

"  In  Greenland,  and  particularly  in  Disco  Bay,  where  the 
Isefjord  lies,  it  is  notorious,  that  every  sound,  whether  of 
speaking  or  other  noise,  under  an  iceberg,  is  quickly  propa- 
gated to  its  summit,  from  which  it  is  returned  with  a  loud  echo. 
It  is  equally  notorious,  that  when  such  a  mountain,  either  by 
the  effects  of  the  sun,  or  by  revolutions  in  the  bay,  has  become 
brittle,  or,  as  they  call  it  in  that  country,  rotten,  the  summit 
of  it  is  broken  off  by  the  vibration  of  the  sound,  falls  down, 
and  dashes  to  pieces  whatever  is  under  or  near  it.  I  have, 
myself,  frequently  spoken  under  icebergs  when  they  seemed 
sound,  and  admired  the  uncommonly  loud  echo.  I  always  es- 
caped happily;  and  though  1  saw  such  tops  of  icebergs  fall 
down,  I  never  saw  them  fall  upon  any  body.  But  the  case  is 
unhappily  not  so  rare.  Not  only  the  abovementioned  seven 
persons  perished  in  this  manner,  but  single  Greenlanders 
also,  who  went  there  in  pursuit  of  seals,  and  fired  their 
guns  under  these  icebergs,  without  first  examining  whether 


104 
In  this  gulph,  they  catch,  in  winter,  a  kind 
of  turbots,  which  are  indeed  much  smaller, 

they  seemed  to  be  rotten :  that  the  seven  persons  lost  fheir 
lives  by  the  abovemeutioned  sound,  and  the  fall  of  the  sum- 
mit occasioned  by  it,  was  told  us  by  a  Greenlauder  who  had 
accompanied  the  women's  boat  in  his  Kajak,  and  being  in  the 
neighbourhood,  though  not  quite  close  to  the  women's  boat, 
or  under  the  iceberg  itself,  had  been  witness  of  the  action  of 
the  boy,  and  of  the  misfortune  that  ensued." 

"  When  the  Greenlanders  travel  in  their  women's  boats,  they 
generally  have  one  or  two  attendants  in  Kajaks,  partly  because 
it  does  not  become  them  as  men  to  sit  idle  in  a  women's  boat, 
and  still  less  to  row  the  boat,  which  is  the  women's  business, 
and  partly  in  order  to  catch  a  seal  on  the  way,  if  an  opportu- 
nity should  offer.  Only  the  master  of  the  family  is  in  the  boat 
as  steersman ;  the  rest  are,  as  already  said,  in  their  Kajaks. 
But  if  they  make  a  voyage  over  the  Isefjord,  they  have  always 
a  Kajak  with  them,  the  proper  business  of  which  is  to  recon- 
noitre the  bays  and  the  icebergs,  to  examine  where  there  are 
openings  in  these  icebergs,  that  is  shorter  ways,  and  whether 
these  are  so  broad  that  they  can  venture  to  row  through  them. 
It  was  in  such  an  opening,  or  icy  vault,  that  the  abovemention- 
ed  women's  boat  perished,  but  solely  by  the  imprudence  com- 
mitted ;  for,  according  to  the  report  of  the  Kajak  rower,  the 
opening  was  broad  enough  to  pass  through.  The  pieces  of  ice 
floating  in  the  bay  often  cut  holes  in  the  women's  boat :  we  aft 
first  stop  them  up  with  fat,  and  row  on,  but  the  holes  may  be- 
come so  numerous  (I  once  had  nine  in  my  boat),  that  the  water 
pours  in,  and  then  it  is  necessary  to  go  on  shore  to  sew  up 
these  holes.  While  this  is  doing,  or  when  they  go  on  shore 
in  the  evening  to  put  up  tents,  the  boat  is  turned  upside  down, 
yet  not  quite  with  the  keel  uppermost,  but  with  one  side  a 
little  raised  from  the  ground,  and  supported  by  a  kind  of  props 
or  forks,  the  pointed  end  of  which  is  fixed  in  the  ground;  aud 


105 
but  more  delicate,  and  much  fatter,  than  the 
common  ones.  The  Greenlanders  catch  them 
with  lines,  which  they  make  of  whalebone. 
The  fishing"  place  is  always  surrounded  with 
iceberg's,  but  sometimes  the  latter  stand  like 
lofty  buildings  round  a  market  place.  There 
a  great  many  people  assemble ;  those  who  live 
at  a  distance  come  to  purchase,  and  the  fisher- 
men sell.  It  is  quite  a  fair !  Every  iceberg" 
threatens  them  with  death,  and  yet  they  are  as 
cheerful  and  secure  as  if  no  danger  was  near. 
I  once  visited  their  market.  The  fishing  place 
was  very  large,  the  ice  thick,  and  the  number 
of  people  assembled  very  great.  They  had 
already  been  fishing  above  eight  days  in  this 
place,  and  the  surrounding  icebergs  did  not 
seem  rotten.  I  was  delighted  with  their  cheer- 
fulness and  activity,  and  at  their  trade.  They 
fished  and  caught  in  my  presence,  that  I  might 

the  fork  supports  the  edge  of  the  boat,  in  order  that,  while  they 
are  sewing  it,  or  by  drying  in  the  sun,  it  may  not  get  out  of 
shape  (which  might  easily  happen,  as  the  boat  is  quite  wet  from 
the  voyage)  :  three  or  four  such  props  support  the  boat,  and 
they  are  as  indispensible  on  a  voyage  in  a  women's  boat,  as 
fat,  needles,  and  thread,  and  a  kind  of  pitch,  to  strengthen  the 
seams.  It  was  with  one  of  these  props  that  the  boy  gave  the 
blow  upon  the  boat  which  produced  such  unhappy  conse- 
quences. 


106 
see  how  they  proceeded.  Some  lent  me  their 
lines,  with  which  I  measured  the  depth,  and 
I  found  it  in  several  places,  as  mentioned 
above,  from  two  to  three  hundred  fathoms. 
After  staying  about  two  hours,  I  left  them, 
because  it  grew  late,  and  I  had  three  quar- 
ters of  a  mile  to  go  home.  Not  half  an 
hour  after  I  had  left  them,  an  iceberg  near 
the  fish  market  fell  down,  broke  the  ice  to 
pieces,  and  deprived  several  fishermen  of  their 
lines  and  fish.  Some  fell  into  the  water, 
were  crushed  between  the  pieces  of  ice,  and 
severely  injured.  The  greatest  part  of  them 
escaped  uninjured,  although  they  departed 
with  empty  hands.  I  should  scarcely  have 
been  saved  had  I  been  still  there,  because 
every  one  had  enough  to  do  to  save  him- 
self. Besides,  we  Europeans  are  not  so  skil- 
ful as  the  Greenlanders  in  jumping  from  one 
piece  of  ice  to  another,  or,  when  we  fall  into 
the  water,  in  climbing  up  again. 

It  may  easily  be  supposed,  that  such  a 
prodigious  number  of  icebergs,  by  the  cold 
which  proceeds  from  them,  must  make  the 
air  near  them  much  more  raw,  than  it  is, 
even  much  farther  to  the  north.  I  lived 
half  a  mile  from  them:   when  a  mountain 


107 
fell  in  ruins,  I  heard  the  noise  like  loud 
peals  of  thunder  ;  I  daily  saw  these  icebergs, 
and  felt  the  effects  of  their  neighbourhood. 
When  I  returned  home  from  Christianshaab, 
which  lies  four  miles  more  to  the  south,  the 
tears  flowed  from  my  eyes  for  cold,  even  at 
Whitsuntide,  when  my  back  was  in  a  per- 
spiration. 

Chap.    II. 

The  Mission  at  Claushavn  is  extended. 


When  I  came  to  Greenland,  only  my  co- 
lony of  Claushavn  was  provided  with  a  Cate- 
chist.  He  was  a  Dane,  and,  perhaps,  the 
ablest  in  the  whole  country.  In  Christians- 
haab, on  the  contrary,  where,  besides  the 
married  Danes,  who  had  many  children,  two 
or  three  Greenland  families  lived,  they  made 
shift  with  an  old  married  Danish  sailor,  who 
had  lost  an  eye  in  his  youth,  in  a  drunken 
affray,  and  had  broken  one  thigh.  It  may 
easily  be  supposed,  that  his  instructions  and 
the  fruits  of  them  were  nothing-  extraordi- 
nary 5    I,  therefore,   considered  of  means  to 


IOS 
supply  this  want.  As  soon  as  my  acquaint- 
ance with  the  Greenlanders  and  their  lan- 
guage in  some  measure  permitted  it,  I  en- 
deavoured to  qualify  a  young  Greenlander 
to  become  a  national  Catechist,  and  allowed 
him  a  certain  salary.  After  he  was  employed, 
things  went  on  better,  and,  by  practice,  in- 
struction, and  encouragement,  better  and  bet- 
ter still.  This  successful  attempt  induced 
me  to  instruct  some  more  of  the  young 
men  of  my  place  of  abode,  who  seemed  to 
have  the  clearest  heads,  in  order  to  place 
them  among  the  heathens,  where  the  latter 
dwelt  •,  for  when  the  heathens  asked  for  in- 
struction, though  Claushavn  was  a  thriving 
place,  yet  they  wished,  in  general,  to  re- 
main at  their  usual  abode,  rather  than  remove 
to  the  colony :  to  gratify  their  wishes  in 
this  respect,  was  removing  an  obstacle,  and 
was  in  itself  just  and  reasonable. 

In  this  manner,  I  sent,  some  years  after- 
wards, a  national  Catechist  to  some  families, 
who  settled  a  quarter  of  a  mile  to  the  north 
of  me.  The  Catechist,  who  was  the  son  of 
a  deceased  Dane  of  mixed  race,  was  tolera- 
bly clever,  and  could  dedicate  the  greatest 
part  of  his  time    to   his  office,    because  he 


109 
had  not  much  success  in  fishing";  but  it  was 
necessary,  on  this  account,  to  give  him  a 
larger  salary,  that  he  might  not  suffer  want, 
and  from  want  become  indifferent  to  his  of- 
fice. Two  years  after  this,  a  family  which 
lived  a  quarter  of  a  mile  farther  north,  wanted 
a  teacher.  I  promised  to  fulfil  their  wish  •, 
but  as  I  did  not  know  whether  I  might  de- 
pend upon  their  perseverance,  or  on  the  parti- 
cipation of  several  families  in  the  instruction, 
and,  besides,  the  way  was  not  farther,  I  pre- 
vailed on  the  same  Catechist  to  undertake  the 
instruction  of  this  family  also.  In  the  morn- 
ing, he  instructed  the  first  mentioned  families  ; 
and  in  the  evening  the  latter  ;  but  I  was 
obliged  to  give  him  an  addition  to  his  salary, 
in  consideration  of  this  increase  of  his  labour. 
Afterwards,  more  families  applied ;  and  as  long 
as  I  was  in  Greenland,  and  could  pay  attention 
to  it,  this  method  went  on  very  well ;  but 
whether  it  continued  after  my  departure,  I 
do  not  know,  for  almost  a  year  elapsed  before 
my  successor  arrived.  My  neighbour  Provost 
Sverdrup  had  indeed  promised  me  to  do  his 
utmost,  and  punctually  kept  his  word;  but 
his  own  Mission  employed  him  so  fully,  that 
he  very  seldom  came  to  mine,  and,  when  he  did 


110 

come,  he  had  not  time  enough  to  see  after 
every  thing*.  It  is,  therefore,  possible  that 
this  last  arrangement,  for  want  of  being"  at- 
tended toy  has  ceased ;  perhaps  even  before 
my  successor  arrived.  Happily  I  did  not 
baptize  anybody,  either  here  or  at  Tus- 
sangme*. 

I  must  add  a  few  words  about  this  island, 
the  real  name  of  which  is  Tussak,  which 
lies  six  miles  from  Claushavn.  In  my  pas- 
toral journeys,  I  sometimes  went  there,  and 
that  with  the  more  pleasure,'  because  some 
families  lived  there,  among  whom  was  a  Poly- 
gamist,  who  always  liked  to  hear  my  con- 
versation. These  families  once  asked  me  for 
a  teacher  :  I  had  one  in  readiness,  but,  when 
I  proposed  to  him  to  go  there,  he  felt  no 
inclination.  He  said  the  island  was  too  far 
off,  &c;  I  was,  therefore,  obliged  to  ask 
my  national  Catechist  at  Christianshaab,  to 
undertake  it.  He  consented,  and  resided  a 
week  alternately  at  each  place,  but  on  the  con- 
dition of  receiving  an  addition  to  his  salary. 

I  engaged  these  national  Catechists  on  my 
own   account,   and  also   paid   them   the  first 

(4)  Cranberries  CTyltebaer)  grow  here  in  abundance,  and,  a* 
fur  as  1  know,  nowhere  else  in  Disco  Bay. 


in 

year  myself.  The  Missionary  College  ap- 
proved of  my  proposal,  and  also  repaid  me 
the  money  I  had  laid  out,  as  far  as  I  ventured 
to  make  it  known  j  but  this  College  was, 
however,  very  sparing"  with  its  salary,  and  not 
inclined  to  give  Danish  provisions,  especially 
bread,  which  is  so  great  an  inducement  to  these 
men  to  lead  a  sedentary  life,  so  different  from 
that  to  which  they  are  accustomed.  If,  there- 
fore, I  wished  to  have  them  do  any  thing,  I 
was  obliged  to  give  them  what  the  College 
refused. 


Chap.  III. 

It  is  still  possible  to  come   to  the  East  Side 
of  Greenland. 


The  Icelanders  landed  early,  perhaps  about 
the  year  982,  on  the  east  side  of  Greenland  ; 
and,  finding  the  country  agreeable,  they  after- 
wards visited  it,  and  settled  there.  In  process 
of  time  the  population  increased  ;  and,  by 
their  diligence,  not  only  procured  subsistence, 
but  even  had  articles  for  exportation.  Nu- 
merous communities,  churches,  convents,  and 


112 

bishops'  sees,  arose  there.  Even  in  the  southern 
part  of  the  west  side,  there  were  many  villages 
and  churches,  of  which  some  remains  are  still 
shewn.  The  inhabitants  tilled  the  land,  and, 
besides  other  kinds  of  grain,  are  said  to  have 
raised  the  finest  wheat.  The  pastures  were 
rich,  and  fed  numbers  of  oxen  and  sheep,  which 
supplied  milk,  butter,  and  cheese,  not  only 
in  great  abundance,  but  of  such  excellent 
quality,  that  the  royal  kitchen,  at  Drontheira, 
was  supplied  with  them.  There  were  forests 
there,  in  which  were  hares  and  other  game  ; 
and  lakes  well  stocked  with  fish.  It  is,  there- 
fore, no  wonder  that  this  side  of  the  country 
became,  in  a  few  years,  so  populous  as  it  is 
stated  to  have  been. 

According  to  ancient  accounts,  the  Ice- 
lander, Erik  the  Red,  or  Redhead,  was  the  first 
who  discovered  the  east  side  of  Greenland, 
and  landed  there.  In  an  old  Latin  his- 
tory book,  which  was  lent  to  me  in  Green- 
land for  a  short  time,  this  Erik  is  said,  pro- 
perly, to  have  fled  thither,  because  he  had 
killed  his  adversary  in  a  duel ;  but  that  he  was 
afterwards  reconciled  with  the  relations  of  the 
deceased  ;  and,  as  he  could  now  sail,  unmo- 
lested,  backwards   and  forwards,  he  induced 


113 
many  families  to  accompany  him  thither.    The 
following*   anecdote,    which  I  took  from  this 
book,  has  its  place  here : — Erik,  probably  he 
who  is  beforementioned,  arrived,  with  his  wife, 
who   was  pregnant,  on    the  east  coast.      He 
first   built  a  hut,  and   supported  himself  and 
his   wife  by  the  chase.      He   always   returned 
home  in  the  evening-,  as  well  out  of  tenderness 
for  his  wife,  as  to  prepare  every  thing  for  her 
approaching-    delivery,     and    for   the    winter, 
which  was  at  hand.     One  evening-,  when   he 
came  home,  he   found  his  wife  dead,    and   a 
new-born  male  infant  crying-   at    her  breast. 
He  stood  for  a  few  moments  as   if  petrified. 
The  cries   of  the  child  roused  him   from   his 
stupor  ;  but  irresolute,  and  almost  in  despair, 
he  knows  not  how  he  shall  preserve  its  tender 
life.      Soon,   however,   he    collected  himself; 
took  a  small    sharp-pointed    instrument,  and 
pricked  his  breast  round  the  nipples,  so  as  to 
draw  blood  ;    then  he   put    the    child  to   his 
breast ;  it  sucked  eagerly,  and   thus  obtained 
sustenance.     He  was  now  forced  to  remain,  for 
the  most  part,   with  the  child  ;  and  repeated 
the  operation  as  often  as  it  required  food.     By 
degrees,  the  blood  became  milky,  and,  at  last, 
real  milk.     In  this  manner  he  suckled  his  son, 

0 


114 

of  whom  he  became  extremely  fond,  and  who 
grew  up  to  be  an  active  and  courageous  man, 
as  his  father  had  been3.  I  regret  that  the  title 
page  of  this  book  was  torn  ofF.  The  book 
had  every  appearance  of  high  antiquity,  and, 
in  my  opinion,  of  historical  credibility :  it 
contained  many  very  interesting,  and  (to  me  at 
least)  unknown  notices  of  Iceland,  and,  parti- 
cularly, of  the  population  and  fertility  of  the 
east  side  of  Greenland. 

It  is  uncertain  by  what  particular  cause  the 
navigation  to  this  fine  part  of  the  country,  and, 

(5)  The  same  anecdote  is  related  of  Thorgils  Orrabeinst- 
jupa,  but  with  other  circumstances.  Cranz  speaks  (p.  331 
and  322)  of  this  Thorgils  in  the  following  words : — "  Fresh 
colonies  continued  to  arrive  from  Iceland  and  Norway,  who 
were,  in  part,  Christians :  among  them  was  Thorgils,  a  new 
but  zealous  Christian,  who  had  gone  to  Greenland  against 
the  repeated  warnings  of  his  former  idol,  and  of  whom  they 
relate  a  strange  and  wonderful  history  of  many  years'  perse- 
cutions by  the  Devil,  and  severe  misfortunes  by  water  and  by 
land  ;  after  which,  he  at  last,  like  Job  and  Tobias,  obtained 
honours  and  happiness."  Setting  aside  that  part  which  con- 
forms with  the  inclination  of  the  ancient  inhabitants  of  ihe 
north,  like  other  nations,  to  believe  in  prognostics,  and  to  re- 
gard dreams,  the  contents  of  the  Floamanna  Saga  are  not  so 
strange  and  marvellous,  but  very  credible.  In  the  writings 
of  the  Scandinavian  Literary  Society,  vol.  7,  there  is  a  transla- 
tion of  this  very  interesting  Saga,  by  Professor  B.  Thorlacius. — 
Fries. 


115 

at  the  same  time,  all  connection  between  the 
inhabitants  and  the  mother  country,  ceased. 
It  cannot  have  been  what  is  called  the  black 
death,  for  the  navigation  continued  long  after 
this  plague.  Troubles,  arising  from  war,  may 
have  interrupted  it  for  some  years  ;  but  it 
can  scarcely  be  believed  that  it  could  have 
been  neglected  in  more  peaceable  times ;  be- 
cause it  afforded  important  advantages,  and 
the  inhabitants  of  the  two  countries  were 
united  by  the  ties  of  friendship  and  affinity. 
There  is,  indeed,  a  general  tradition,  that  the 
natives  of  the  country,  at  that  time  called 
Skroellinger6,  fell  upon  the  new  inhabitants, 
and  extirpated  them  (so  the  descendants  of 
the  former,  namely,  the  Greenlanders,  relate 
the  story)  ;  but  to  me  this  appears  improbable. 
The  ancient  Norwegians  and  Icelanders  were 
tall,  stout,  and  warlike  ;  the  Greenlanders,  on 
the  other  hand,  were  little,  cowardly,  or,  at 
least,  not  accustomed  to  combat.  Neither  could 
they  well  expect  a  successful  result  even  from  a 
surprise,  because  the  population  was  so  great ; 
for,  that  they  should  have   ventured  on  open 

(6)  A  nickname,  given  to  signify  the  small  stature  and 
weakness  of  the  Greenlanders,  in  comparison  to  the  tall  and 
robust  Norwegians  and  Icelanders.  Skroelling  still  means,  in 
the  Daniib,  weak, puny. Fries. 


116 

war  is  what  I  cannot  imagine.     But,  supposing 
that  they  attacked,  by  surprise,  and  destroyed 
the  Europeans  on  the  west  coast  of  the  coun- 
try, where  they  were  not  numerous,   yet  those 
on  the  east  side  must   have  been   taught,  by 
the  misfortune  of  their  countrymen,   to   be  on 
their  guard,  particularly  as  they  were  not  only 
informed  of  it,  but  are  even  stated  to  have 
come  to  their  assistance :  the  history,  indeed, 
says,  that  they  came  too  late,  and  found  only 
cattle  running   about    the    fields    without    a 
master.     In  whatever  manner  this  extirpation 
was  effected,   it  took  place  first  on  the  west 
and  afterwards  on  the  east  side7.     Only  a  few 

(7)  It  is,  however,  probable,  that  the  black  death  was  the 
first  and  principal  cause  of  the  neglecting  of  the  intercourse 
with  Greenland,  and  of  the  extirpation  of  the  Icelandic  and 
Norwegian   settlers.      This  plague,  which  raged  about  the 
year  1350,  carried  off  about  two-thirds  of  the  population  of 
the  north.     One  consequence  was,  that  navigation  in  general, 
and  consequently   that   to  Greenland  also,   was  very  much 
diminished  in  the  succeeding  period.     The  greater  part  of  the 
inhabitants  of  Greenland  were,  doubtless,  carried  off  by  this 
plague ;  consequently,  the  articles  for  trade  must  have  been 
much  diminished,  and  the  trade  itself  wholly  declined.     Poli- 
tical troubles  contributed   to  check  the  little  intercourse  that 
was   still    kept    up.      Meantime   the  savages  who  came  to 
Greenland,  long  after  the  Normans,  advanced  farther ;  and  it 
could  not  be  difficult  for  them  to  overpower  the  diminished 
population,  now  left  entirely  to  its  own  resources. — Fries. 


117 
remains  of  the  ancient  Icelanders  are  said  still 
to  exist  on  the  east  coast.     The  tradition  has 
been  preserved  from  ancient  to  modern  times  ; 
when    some  Greenlanders  affirmed  that  they 
had  seen  tall,  bearded  men,  who  were  terrible, 
and,  doubtless,   man-eaters  ;  others  said  they 
had  been  so  far  to  the  east,  that  they  had  seen 
the  sun  rise  from  the  sea,  and  that  they  saw 
people  in  the  country.     Torfceus  relates,    in 
his  Historia  Gronlandica,  that  the  Icelandic 
bishop,  Amund,  in  a  voyage  from  Norway  to 
Iceland,  was  driven,  by  a  storm,  to  the  coast 
of  Greenland,    and    sailed  along"   the  coast, 
where  he  plainly   distinguished  people  driving 
their  sheep  and  lambs  on  the  meadows.     This 
voyage  must  have  taken  place  about  the  year 
1540,  and  the  east  coast  must  then  have  been 
inhabited,   though  the    intercourse    with  the 
mother  country   was  broken  off.     If  we  may 
believe  all  this,  we  may  conjecture  that  de- 
scendants of  those  robust  Icelanders  and  Nor- 
wegians are  still  to  be  found  there.     But  were 
this  not  the  case,  the  country,  however,  remains ; 
and  this  must  still  be,  what  it  was  formerly,  a 
fine,  fertile  country,  worth  looking  for,  and, 
if  possible,  settling  in. 

Many  fruitless  expeditions  and  voyages  have 


US 

been  undertaken  with  this  view,  from  time 
to  time,  under  our  king's,  from  Christian  III 
io  Christian  VII,  under  whose  reign  the  last 
attempt  was  made.  Our  present  King-,  then 
Crown  Prince,  promoted  this  expedition,  and, 
as  far  as  I  know,  bore  the  expense  of  it.  Two 
ships  were  fitted  out,  and  wintered  in  Iceland. 
Repeated  attempts  were  made :  they  sailed 
along  the  ice,  as  well  to  the  south  as  to  the 
north ;  were  exposed  to  many  dangers,  once 
even  to  total  shipwreck  ;  but  saw  no  possi- 
bility of  approaching-  the  coast,  respecting- 
which  the  particulars  are  contained  in  Egede's 
Journal,  1789.  However,  this  last  account 
of  the  voyage  to  East  Greenland  gives  (as  well 
as  more  ancient  accounts)  hints  of  the  possi- 
bility of  some  time  or  other  attaining-  the 
end  proposed.  The  ice  is  terrible,  but  does 
lie  fast ;  is  not  every  year  alike  $  does  not 
come  at  the  same  time,  or  in  the  same  quan- 
tity -,  it  changes  its  position  ;  nay,  it  is  pre- 
tended it  was  once  found  to  have  wholly 
vanished.  May  happy  times  one  day  re- 
turn to  our  country !  Who  would  not  then 
be  allowed  to  hope  for  another  attempt  to 
re-discover  East  Greenland  ?  It  would,  indeed, 
require  considerable  expense  -,  but  if  it  sue- 


119 
ceeded,  the  advantage  reaped  by  it  would  be 
great :  at  least  we  should  acquire  the  country, 
which  many  would  be  glad  to  acquire,  if  an 
opportunity  offered. 

The  attempts,  like  some  earlier  ones,  must 
be  undertaken  from  Iceland.  Two  small 
copper-bottomed  vessels  must  remain  there, 
not  one,  but  two  or  three  winters.  From  the 
beginning  of  spring,  and  as  long  as  the  season 
allowed,  they  must  reconnoitre.  They  need 
not,  indeed,  keep  the  sea  all  the  time  ;  but, 
as  the  passage  from  Iceland  thither  is  said  to 
be  but  forty8  miles,  they  might  sail  over  to  the 
ice  several  times ;  coast  along  it,  northwards 
and  southwards  ;  and  observe  the  situation  of 
it,  and  the  changes  that  might  have  taken 
place  between  one  trip  and  another.  Accounts 
of  this,  as  well  as  of  the  whole  enterprize,  must 
be  sent  in,  every  autumn,  by  the  trading 
vessels.  If  this  were  continued,  as  I  wish,  for 
three  years,  perhaps  the  object  would  be  ob- 
tained, and  then  all  the  expense  and  all  the 
dangers  would  be  forgotten.  But,  even  sup- 
posing that  we  could  not  get  thither,  we  should 

(8)  According  to  Lieutenant  Egede's  Chart,  the  least  dis- 
tance from  Iceland  is  sixty-seven  miles.  For  farther  parti- 
culars on  this  subject,  see  the  Introduction. Fries. 


120 
obtain  greater  certainty  respecting"  the  coming, 
the  situation,  and  the  chang-es,  &c.  of  the  ice. 
In  short,  we  should  obtain  some  degree  of 
certainty  respecting  the  possibility,  or  the  im- 
possibility of  getting  to  East  Greenland  on 
this  side. 

But,  even  should  these  attempts  be  wholly 
fruitless,  we  must  not  yet  give  up  the  coun- 
try as  lost.  There  remains  still  a  possibility 
left,  which  would,  indeed,  require  time,  but 
would  be  less  expensive,  less  dangerous,  and 
more  promising.  We  had  already,  in  my 
time,  colonies  far  to  the  south  on  the  west  side, 
which  we  inhabited.  If  the  Government  would 
make  an  arrangement,  that,  every  second  or 
third  year,  a  new  colony  should  be  established, 
always  some  miles  farther  to  the  south,  we 
should,  in  time,  reach  Statenhook,  then  go 
beyond  it,  and  so  in  the  same  manner  up  the 
east  side.  As  the  colonists  advanced,  they 
must  endeavour,  by  trade,  if  any  opportunity 
offered,  and  by  their  own  industry,  to  make 
good  a  part  of  the  expenses  of  the  undertak- 
ing ;  but  the  main  object,  that  of  examining 
the  nature  of  the  country,  and  to  obtain  cer- 
tain information  respecting-  its  population,  its 
fertility,  the  ice,  &c,  must  not  be  forgotten. 


121 
As  the  currents  always  flow  outwards,  and 
partly  keep  the  ice  at  some  distance  from  the 
shore,  it  would  doubtless  be  possible  to  pro- 
ceed, in  small  vessels,  between  the  coast  and 
the  ice,  and  for  one  colony  to  assist  another, 
where  larger  vessels  cannot  approach ;  for  it 
can  hardly  be  doubted  but  that  supplies 
might  be  annually  sent  from  the  mother 
country  to  the  most  southerly  of  the  eastern 
colonies.  This  method  of  gradually  approach- 
ing the  end  in  view  would  have  this  advan- 
tage,— that  report  would  precede  the  new 
comers,  would  so  far  make  them  known,  and 
prepare  the  inhabitants  to  receive  them. 

By  one  or  other  of  the  methods  here  pointed 
out,  I  consider  the  re-discovery  of  the  east 
coast  to  be  possible,  without  any  great  ex- 
pense to  the  state.  I  am  almost  convinced 
that  it  will  be  one  day  found,  and  that  one 
of  these  projects,  or  perhaps  both  united,  will 
lead  to  the  accomplishment  of  this  wish. 
Happy  the  man  for  whom  the  decrees  of 
Providence  have  reserved  this  discovery9.    The 

(9)  The  late  H.  Egede,  after  his  return  from  Greenland, 
not  only  made  similar  proposals  for  the  re-discovery  of  the 
east  coast,  of  which  he  speaks  in  his  Natural  History ;  but 
be  even  offered  to  go  with  the  expedition,  if  it  should  be 

B 


122 

land,  and  the  possession  of  it,  even  without  in- 
habitants, would  be  a  real  addition  and  ad- 
vantage to  our  country  :  with  inhabitants, 
perhaps  more  would  be  gained.  Religion 
would  accompany  us  thither,  and  spread  her 
beneficent  light,  with  purer  splendor  than  it 
formerly  shone  there.     May  this  happen  ! 


Chap.  IV. 

The  Polygamist. 


To  take  more  wives  than  one  at  the  same 
time,  is  not  indeed  very  common  in  Green- 
land, but  not  absolutely  uncommon.  A  man 
who  loves  change,  and  is  so  skilful  in  fish- 
ing, that  he  can  support  more  than  one, 
sometimes  takes  two  wives ;  nay,  a  few  miles 
from  my  place  of  abode,  there  was  a  man 
who  had  three.  These  women  often  agree 
very  well ;  but  if  the  reverse  is  the  case,  a  black 

undertaken,  in  order  to  convince  himself,  that  nothing  was  neg- 
lected that  might  tend  to  ensure  success.  But  his  proposal,  and 
his  petition  to  the  king,  for  what  reason  is  not  known,  were 
laid  on  one  side.— See  Life  of  H.  Egede,  by  J.  J.  Lund. 


123 
eye  cures  the  one  who  is  quarrelsome.  The 
first  wife  is  always  the  most  respected,  and 
properly  the  mistress  of  the  family,  if  she 
is  not  the  most  loved.  If  she  has  borne 
her  husband  children,  particularly  sons,  she 
is  sure  of  his  continued  respect ;  but  if  she 
is  barren,  she  must  behave  with  great  pru- 
dence towards  him,  and  with  good  humour 
to  the  other  wives,  not  only  to  preserve  her 
precedence,  but  even  to  avoid  being  repu- 
diated. 

Among  the  inhabitants  of  Tussangme,  there 
was,  as  I  have  said,  a  Polygamist.  This  man, 
who  was  the  ablest  of  the  whole,  was  always 
very  eager,  when  I  came,  to  hear  something 
about  our  country.  I  fulfilled  his  wish,  and  en- 
deavoured, as  usual,  to  direct  his  thoughts  to  the 
great  Creator.  "Kaf  Kaf  Pelesse10!  Usomakau! 
i.  e.  Go  on,  Priest !  He  is  glorious,  and  worthy 
of  praise  If  exclaimed  he.  "  Send  us  a  teacher ; 
we  will  be  obedient,  we  will  all  be  obedient." 
"  If  I  can  be  certain  that  you  are  serious," 
I  replied,  "  I  will  with  pleasure  look  out  a 
teacher  for  you,  and  visit  you  myself  as  often 
as  I  can."     "  We  are  quite  serious,"  said  he. 

(10)  So  the  Greenlanders  pronounce  the  Danish  word 
Proett  (Priut). Fbies. 


124 
"  When  you  have  been  here,  we  talk  of 
what  you  have  told  us ;  we  will  acknowledge 
the  Great  Being,  who  is  so  good."  I  did 
not  say  a  word  on  this  occasion  of  his  two 
wives ;  it  would  have  been  wholly  misplaced, 
and  have  destroyed  his  good  intention.  I  per- 
suaded, as  I  have  before  said,  the  national  Ca- 
techist  at  Christianshaab  to  divide  his  time, 
and  to  go  there  every  other  week.  I  accom- 
panied him  the  first  time  he  went,  presented 
him  to  them  as  their  teacher,  and  exhorted 
them  to  be  attentive  to  his  instructions.  They 
promised  it,  and  kept  their  word.  Every  time 
that  I  came,  I  had  reason  to  be  satisfied  with 
their  diligence  and  conduct,  in  which  the  Po- 
lygamist  encouraged  them.  I  wrote  on  ac- 
count of  this  man  to  the  Missionary  college, 
and  represented,  that  as  it  seemed  as  if  the 
apostles,  when  any  had  two  wives  before  they 
were  converted  to  Christianity,  had,  in  this 
case,  connived  at  it,  I  wished  to  have  per- 
mission to  baptize  him  ;  but  I  received  for 
answer,  that  this  permission  could  not  be  grant- 
ed, especially  on  account  of  the  consequences. 
One  day,  towards  the  end  of  the  second 
winter,  he  asked  me,  "  You  will  baptize  me, 
Priest  ?"     "  I  would  do  it  with  pleasure,"  I 


125 
replied,  "  but  you  have  two  wives." — 
"  What !"  exclaimed  he,  hastily,  "  cannot  I 
then  become  a  believer  ?" — "  You  know," 
said  I,  "  that  the  great  Lord  in  heaven  cre- 
only  one  man  and  one  woman,  to  shew  that 
only  two  such  should  live  together  in  wed- 
lock. " — "  You  grieve  me,  Priest."  He  cried, 
and  pointed  to  his  second  wife,  "  Can  I  reject 
her  ?  she  has  borne  me  sons,  and  how  can 
I  abandon  these  little  ones  ?" — "  You  shall 
continue,"  said  I,  "  to  provide  for  them 
all,  but  abstain  from  conjugal  intercourse  with 
your  second  wife." — "  That  is  difficult,"  an- 
swered he.  "  Will  the  good  God  reject  me, 
because  I  cannot  reject  her  ?  You  know  that 
I  wish  to  become  a  believer.  You  know, 
too,  that  I  know  him,  and  that  I  live  like 
a  believer." — "  Yes,"  1  answered,  "  I  know 
all  this,  and  I  wished  to  baptize  you ;  but, 
besides  what  I  have  already  said  to  you,  my 
masters  in  our  country  have  forbidden  me." 
I  unwillingly  said  this,  and  he  heard  it  with 
some  displeasure.  "  Do  you  not  think,  Priest," 
continued  he,  "  that  the  great  Master  of  hea- 
ven is  more  benevolent  than  those  in  your 
country  ?"  "  Certainly,  he  is,"  continued  I : 
"he  is  all  goodness :    he  judges  differently 


126 

from  man,  because  he  knows  the  heart  better." 
"  I  wish  to  be  a  believer,  and  I  dare  not  !** 
said  he,  affected  :  "  but  I  will  continue  to  obey 
God,  and  to  avoid  evil  ;  and  I  hope  that  he 
will  not  reject  me  when  I  die."  I  affirmed 
this,  took  his  hand,  and  looked  at  him, 
with  emotion.  It  was  a  short  time  before 
I  returned  home.  "  God  in  heaven,"  said  I, 
"  thy  Father,  and  my  Father,  and  the  Father 
of  us  all,  be  merciful  to  thee,  for  Jesus  Christ's 
sake,  here  and  for  ever  !" — "  Be  happy, 
Priest,"  answered  he,  with  tears  :  "before  the 
good  God  in  heaven  I  shall  see  thee  again  !" — 
"  Yes,  there  we  shall  meet  again  in  happi- 
ness," said  I,  and  went  away.  He  accom- 
panied me  in  silence  to  the  shore,  and  long 
followed  me  with  his  eyes. 


127 

Chap.  V. 

Greenland  Courtship. 


Decorum  requires  that  a  girl  must  not  choose 
to  marry,  and  that  the  parents  must  not  give 
their  consent  to  the  marriage  of  their  daugh- 
ters :  but  then,  the  young  men  carry  off  their 
girls  by  force.  Some  friends  accompany  the 
suitor  into  the  house  of  the  parents,  and  carry 
off  the  girl,  without  ceremony,  even  in  the 
presence  of  the  parents.  Often  she  knows 
nothing  of  her  lover's  attachment  to  her  ;  but 
even  if  she  does,  she  must  make  all  possi- 
ble resistance,  which  often  goes  so  far,  that 
she  suffers  herself  to  be  dragged  along  by 
the  hair ;  nay,  if  she  persists  in  not  getting 
up,  and  in  refusing  to  go  quiely,  she  receives 
some  hearty  boxes  on  the  ear.  When  she  at 
length  arrives  in  the  house  of  the  lover,  she  sits 
desponding  with  dishevelled  hair,  and  seizes 
the  first  opportunity  to  run  away  again.  She 
is  fetched  back,  runs  away  again,  and  is  again 
fetched  back«   If  her  repugnance  is  only  feign- 


128 
ed,  she  laments,  perhaps,  for  a  day  or  two  ; 
but  then  she  yields.  If,  on  the  other  hand,  she 
dislikes  the  suitor,  she  continues  to  run  away, 
till  he  either  ceases  to  go  after  her,  or,  if  he  is 
desperately  in  love,  really  employs  constraint. 
In  ancient  time,  the  suitor,  in  such  cases, 
used  to  cut  a  few  slits  in  the  soles  of  the 
feet  of  the  obstinate  girl,  and  was  then  pretty 
certain  that  she  would  yield,  before  she  was 
able  to  walk  again.  At  present,  indeed,  this 
rough  manner  of  obtaining  a  girl's  affection  is 
no  longer  in  use  ;  but  I  know,  that,  even  in 
my  time,  a  suitor  threatened  his  mistress,  who 
repeatedly  ran  away  from  him,  with  this 
punishment  for  her  obstinacy.  If  the  girl 
really  dislikes  the  marriage,  for  some  reason 
or  other,  and  if  she  cannot  avoid  it,  in  this 
distress,  she  cuts  off  her  long  hair,  and  seeks  a 
retreat  among  the  rocks :  but  by  this,  she 
renounces  marriage  for  the  future;  it  must 
not,  therefore,  be  wondered  at,  that  this  step 
is  seldom  resorted  to.  When  the  troublesome 
days  of  courtship  are  over,  and  the  girl  has 
become  a  wife,  she  takes  the  place  of  mistress 
of  the  house  on  the  bench,  provides  every 
thing  for  her  husband,   and  superintends  the 


129 
household  ;  but  if  her  husband's  mother  is  still 
living-,  the  latter  manages  the  household,  and 
the  wife  is,  so  far,  only  a  maid. 

Such  a  violent  kind  of  courtship  cannot 
be  allowed  among  the  baptized  Greenlanders  ; 
they,  therefore,  leave  the  business  to  the  Cler- 
gyman, and  the  way  of  proceeding  is  gene- 
rally as  follows.  The  suitor  comes  to  the  Cler- 
gyman, and  says,  "  I  have  a  mind  to  take  a 
wife." — "Whom  ?" — He  names  her. — "  Have 
you  spoken  with  her  ?"  Sometimes  the  suitor 
answers  "  Yes,  she  is  not  unwilling-;  but  you 
know  how  people  are." — Often  he  answers, 
«No!"— "Why  not?"— "That  is  so  diffi- 
cult ;  the  girls  are  so  shy.  Do  you  speak  to 
her."  In  this  case,  the  Clergyman  sends  for 
the  girl ;  she  comes,  and  after  some  indifferent 
questions,  he  begins  his  suit  as  follows.  "  It 
will  soon  be  time  that  you  should  marry." 
— "  I  will  not  marry." — "  That  is  a  pity  :  I 
have  a  suitor  for  you." — "  Whom  ?"  The 
Clergyman  names  him.  "  He  is  good  for 
nothing;  I  will  not  have  him."  Then  the 
Clergyman  enumerates  all  his  good  qualities : 
"  he  is  young,  a  good  and  successful  fisher- 
man, sits  upright  in  his  Kajak,  throws  his 
dart  with  skill  and  strength,  and,  what  is  the 

s 


130 

most  important,  he  has  a  good  disposition,  and 
loves  you."  She  listens  very  attentively  ;  her 
looks  betray  her  approbation  ;  yet  she  still 
answers,  "  I  will  not  marry  ;  I  will  not  have 
him." — "  Well,  I  will  not  constrain  you  ;  I 
shall  easily  find  a  wife  for  this  active  young 
fellow."  The  clergyman  now  says  no  more, 
as  if  he  considered  her  "  No"  as  coming  from 
the  heart.  At  last  she  says  softly,  with  a  sigh, 
or  with  tears  in  her  eyes,  "  As  you  will,  Priest." 
— "Noj"  as  you  will:  I  will  not  persuade 
you  any  farther."  Now  comes  a  profound 
sigh,  "  Yes;"  and  the  affair  is  settled.  Mean- 
time, the  suitor  awaits  his  fate.  He  is  sent 
for,  and  made  acquainted  with  his  good 
fortune  ;  but  told,  at  the  same  time,  how 
difficult  it  was  to  prevail  upon  his  bride. 
The  wedding-day  is  fixed,  of  which  the  girl 
is  already  informed.  When  it  arrives,  the 
bridegroom,  in  his  finest  clothes,  appears  with 
his  train,  in  the  house  of  the  clergyman.  He 
advances,  with  becoming  seriousness,  to  the 
altar  ;  the  clergyman  is  obliged  to  take  her  by 
the  hand,  and  shew  her  the  place  where  she 
is  to  stand.  She,  indeed,  takes  her  place,  but 
turns  away  from  the  bridegroom,  that  the 
clergyman  is  often  obliged  to  turn  her  a  little, 


131 

so  that,  when  he  puts  the  questions  from  the 
book,  he  can  lay  her  hand  in  that  of  the 
bridegroom.  This  giving  her  hand,  and  the 
*  yes,'  which  she  must  pronounce  before  all 
the  company,  is  the  most  difficult  part  to  her. 
Generally,  she  answers  only  with  her  eyes, 
and  this,  reasonably,  passes  for  a  full  and 
sufficient  f  yes.'  The  young  couple  now  go 
to  the  house  of  the  bridegroom  ;  he  cheerful, 
she,  as  it  seems,  unmoved  and  cold.  Soon 
after,  the  clergyman  sends  them  a  bushel  of 
peeled  barley,  or  peas,  and  some  stockfish,  with 
his  compliments,  desiring"  them  to  entertain 
themselves  and  their  friends.  Soon  the  kettles 
are  hung"  over  the  lamps  ;  the  g-uests  are 
called  ;  they  chat  together,  and  enjoy  their 
little  repast  with  cheerfulness.  The  bride 
sometimes  suffers  herself  to  be  persuaded  to 
taste  a  little  bit,  but  extremely  seldom  to  lie 
down,  in  the  evening",  in  the  nuptial  bed. 
However,  she  never  runs  away,  as  the  heathen 
brides  do  ;  accustoms  herself  very  well,  in  a  few 
days,  to  be  a  wife  ;  and  her  former  talkative- 
ness and  cheerfulness  return.  If  she,  as  a  girl, 
has  observed  all  this,  and  the  parents  have  not 
shewn  themselves  inclined  to  consent  to  the 
match,  every  one  has  done  his  part :  she  has 


132 
preserved  her  honour,  and  nothing  can  be  said 

to  the  disadvantage  of  the  parents. 
*  *  * 

The  Reader  will  observe,  that  the  clergyman 
takes  a  part  in  the  marriage  concerns  of  the 
baptized  Greenlanders,  only  to  prevent  the 
before  described  manner  of  courtship,  which  is 
so  contrary  to  morality  and  Christian  propriety. 
He  opposes  this,  without  pretending  to  a  right 
to  interfere  farther.  The  suitor,  indeed,  gives 
him  the  commission,  the  consequences  of  which 
are,  order  and  marriage.  Long  before  my 
time  this  was  the  custom  in  Disco  Bay  ;  but 
I  will  not  affirm  that  it  is  the  custom  all  over 
the  country. 


133 


Chap.  V. 

Tke  Baptism  of  a  Catechumen. 


1   had   once  among  my  Catechumens,   at 
Christianshaab,   an  elderly  widow,  who   had 
fled  from   the  southern  part  of  the  country, 
because  she  was  accused,   by  her  neighbours 
there,  of  being  an  llliseetsok  (that  is,  a  wicked 
sorceress),  and  her  life  was,  therefore,   in  dan- 
ger.    Some  years  before,  the  wicked  wretch 
who  accused  her,  had  been  received  by  her  in 
her  house  •,  and  she  had  given  him  the  use  of 
her  tent  and  women's  boat,  on  the  condition 
that  he  should  keep   them  both  in  order  with 
skins.     For  some  time  he  punctually  fulfilled 
this  condition  j  but  afterwards  he  conceived  a 
wish  to  possess  them  himself.     He  was  pretty 
sure  of  obtaining  this  wish,  if  he  accused  her 
of  witchcraft :  no  sooner  thought  than  done  ; 
the    innocent,   forlorn  widow,   who   was  in- 
formed of  it  in  time,  was  forced,  in  order  to 
save  her  life,  to  fly  secretly  with  a  sick  child, 
eight  or  nine  years  of  age,  and  to  abandon  her 
property.      She  found   an    asylum,    for  the 


134 

present,  in  the  dwelling"  of  a  married  colonist, 
near  Christianshaab  ;  and  as  I  came  there  soon 
after,  she  applied  to  me  to  receive  instruction : 
she  received  it  accordingly,  and  shewed  both 
good-will  and  capacity.  Towards  winter  I 
learned  her  unhappy  condition;  spoke  with 
her  upon  it ;  and  promised  to  protect  her  as 
far  as  lay  in  my  power. v 

Time  passed  away,  the  summer  approached, 
and  the  baptism  of  the  Catechumens  was  at 
hand.  After  I  had  performed  this  solemnity 
at  home,  at  Claushavn,  I  went,  the  week 
before  Whitsuntide,  to  Christianshaab,  in  order 
to  go  over,  daily,  the  truths  of  religion  with 
those  Catechumens  whom,  on  account  of  their 
knowledge  and  conduct,  I  thought  worthy  of 
baptism.  Among  these  Catechumens  was  the 
widow  of  whom  I  have  spoken.  "  Will  you 
baptize  her  ?"  said  the  merchant,  when  I  re- 
turned from  the  last  examination.  I  replied, 
*  Yes ;  she  has  the  necessary  knowledge,  and 
expresses  a  desire  for  baptism." — "  I  advise 
you  not  to  baptize  her,"  continued  he,  "  for 
the  Greenlanders  who  live  farther  to  the  south 
intend  to  kill  her !  It  would  really  be  very 
bad  if  they  began  to  kill  baptized  persons  as 
witches  !"—« Should    I     then,"    replied   I, 


135 
"  expose  her  to  the  fury  of  her  persecutors,  or 
rather  deliver  her  up  to  it,  by  refusing  her 
baptism  ?  No ;  that  would  be  a  sin.  I  will 
baptize  her  with  several  others,  and  thereby 
lay  upon  you  and  your  people  an  obligation 
more, — to  defend  the  life  of  an  innocent  per- 
son, who  is  become  your  fellow  Christian. " — 
"  Neither  I  nor  the  people  can  take  upon  us 
to  defend  her,"  said  he ;  "we  are  often  absent : 
her  assassins  (they  lived  about  a  mile  from  the 
colony)  may  watch  their  opportunity  ;  and, 
even  if  we  were  at  home,  we  should  not  expose 
ourselves  to  the  fury  of  the  Greenlanders,  for 
they  have  resolved  upon  her  death." — "  Then 
I  will  take  her  with  me,"  replied  I,  M  when  I 
return ;  and,  till  then,  she  may  surely  be  in* 
safety  here." 

The  morning  came  ;  it  was  Whit-Monday. 
Engaged  in  reading,  I  regarded  nothing  that 
was  passing  ;  till,  at  length,  the  cry  of  "  The 
murderers  come!  they  land!"  called  my  at- 
tention. This  visit  was,  at  this  moment,  as 
unexpected  as  it  was  disagreeable.  I  collected 
myself,  however,  and  remained  faithful  to  my 
purpose,  as  well  to  defend  the  innocent  widow, 
as  to  baptize  her.  Two  of  these  men  came  im- 
mediately to  the  colony,  and  asked  for  the 


136 
priest  :  they  were  shewn  my  room,  and  enter- 
ed abruptly.  After  some  indifferent  discourse, 
one  of  them,  mentioning  her  name,  said, 
"  Will  you  baptize  her  ?" — "  Yes,"  I  replied. 
— "  She  is  good  for  nothing1,"  said  he ;  "  she 
is  an  Illiseetsok." — "  It  is  your  Angekok," 
said  I,  "  who  accuses  her  ;  but  he  is  a  liar. 
I  know  that  you  intend  to  murder  her,  either 
now  or  in  the  sequel ;  but  I  take  her  under 
my  protection,  because  she  has  done  no  evil ; 
and,  when  she  has  become  a  believer,  the 
Danes  and  the  baptized  Greenlanders  shall 
also  defend  her."  They  withdrew  without 
replying. 

Meantime,  the  hour  of  divine  service  was 
come,  and  I  sent  for  the  Greenlanders  ;  but, 
at  the  same  time,  begged  some  sailors  to  ac- 
company the  poor  widow,  who  was  probably 
afraid.  The  murderers,  ten  or  twelve  in  num- 
ber, stood  on  the  place  over  which  she  had  to 
pass,  but  did  not  attempt  to  attack  her,  as 
they  saw  that  she  was  not  without  defenders. 
She  entered  the  room  trembling.  "  Thou  art 
afraid,"  said  I ;  "  but  dost  thou  not  believe, 
then,  that  the  great  God  whom  thou  acknow- 
ledgest  is  more  mighty  than  thy  persecutors  ? 
Place  thy  trust  in  him,  and  be  of  good  cou- 


137 
rage."  After  the  sermon,  she,  as  well  as  the 
others,  rehearsed  her  belief,  and  was  bap- 
tized. Copious  tears  betrayed  her  feelings  ; 
they  were  drawn  from  her  by  joy,  fear,  and 
hope.  When  divine  service  was  concluded, 
I  said  to  her,  "  Now  you  belong  to  God, 
and  to  us.  Thank  him,  and  prove  always, 
by  your  conduct,  that  you  are  a  believer." 
Her  persecutors  were  not  yet  gone ;  I,  there- 
fore, shut  her  up  in  my  room  while  the  peo- 
ple were  attending  divine  service,  and  had 
her  guarded  the  rest  of  the  day. 

The  following  day,  I  departed  to  return 
home  ;  my  wife,  who  had  accompanied  me 
on  this  journey,  the  widow,  and,her  daughter, 
besides  the  steersman,  and  four  women  to 
row,  were  on  board.  When  we  had  got  to 
a  considerable  distance  from  the  colony,  we 
perceived  several  Kajaks,  but  had  not  the 
smallest  idea  of  their  being  the  murderers 
of  yesterday,  till  they  got  nearer.  The  widow 
recognized  them  first,  and  exclaiming,  "  There 
they  are  !"  threw  herself,  with  her  face  down- 
wards, on  the  bottom  of  the  boat.  Her  per- 
secutors had  heard  that  I  would  take  her 
with  me,  and  had,  therefore,  gone  northward, 
my  way,   instead  of  southward,   which   was 

T 


138 
their  own  way  home.  They  rowed  rapidly 
towards  us,  threw  their  darts,  to  shew  their 
strength  and  dexterity  in  hitting-  a  mark,  and, 
at  last,  laid  one  arm  on  the  edge  of  my  boat. 
Then,  certainly,  courage  was  necessary,  and 
it  was  given  me.  After  some  insignificant 
questions,  one  of  them  said,  "  What  woman 
is  that  lying  there  ?"  "  She  whom  you  want 
to  kill,"  replied  I,  with  firmness  ;  "  she  is  a 
believer  :  I  take  her  under  my  protection,  and 
I  shall  find  means  to  protect  her.'*  They  turned 
pale,  and  were  silent.  At  last,  one  of  them 
cried,  "  That  is  the  same  to  us.'*  They 
then  suddenly  tacked  about  to  the  creek, 
where  their  tents  were  set  up.  We  were  now  so 
far  delivered,  and  the  poor  woman  began 
to  breathe  more  freely.  Whether  it  was  the 
eagerness  of  my  women  who  rowed,  to  lose 
sight  as  soon  as  possible  of  these  infuriated 
men,  or  whatever  might  be  the  cause,  one 
of  the  oars  broke  ;  we  could  not  go  on  well, 
and  we  had  nothing  to  repair  the  oar.  We 
had  no  means  left,  but  to  row  into  the  bay, 
to  the  widow's  enemies.  This  was,  indeed, 
extremely  hazardous,  but,  as  it  could  not  be 
otherwise,  I  resolved  upon  it,  confiding  in 
God,  and  my  good  cause.     We  rowed  into  the 


139 
creek,  and,  at  last,  landed  in  the  midst  of 
these  men,  who  were  all  assembled  on  the 
shore.  I  took  the  broken  oar  in  my  hand, 
went  on  shore,  and  said,  "  Who  will  repair 
this  oar  ?  I  will  pay  him  well."  One  of  them 
immediately  took  the  oar,  and  began  to  repair 
it.  "  Akakaknf"  said  some  of  them  to  each 
other  •,  "  he  is  not  afraid."  They  now  invited 
us  to  their  tents  (my  wife  had  now  come  on 
shore)  ;  but  I  could  not  accept  the  invitation, 
for  then,  perhaps,  it  would  have  been  all  over 
with  the  widow.  I,  however,  conversed  with 
them,  till  the  oar,  after  we  had  waited  one 
livelong"  hour,  was  repaired.  They  were  con- 
tent with  what  I  paid  :  we  put  from  the  shore, 
parted  as  friends,  and  reached  home  in  the 
middle  of  the  night.  The  widow  was  now 
in  safety.  I  placed  her  and  her  daughter  with 
a  family,  who  had  room  to  spare.  She  lived 
two  or  three  years  without  suffering  want,  and 
died  in  peace. 

(11)  Exclamation  of  surprise. 


140 


Chap.  VII. 

Some  Journies. 


I. TO    CHRIST1ANSHAAB. 

I   had  to  make  so  many  journies  thither, 
and  many  of  them  so  dang-erous,  that  I  might 
very  easily  fill  some  sheets  with  them.    About 
Christmas,    I  went  there  by  land,  and  rolled 
down  several  times  from  the  summit  of  high 
rocks   to    the  foot  of  them12.     I  travelled  on 
ice  which  was  so  thin,  that  it  could  scarcely 
bear   the   weight   of  four  dog's.     I    travelled 
by  water,  when  storms  were  rising-,  and  often 
when  quantities  of  drift  ice  were  floating-  about, 
which  cut  holes  in  my  women's  boat.     But 
three  of    these   journies    seem    to    me  to    be 
peculiarly  dangerous,  and  worth  relating-. 

I  generally  went  to  Christianshaab  the  day 
before  Easter,  as  well  on  account  of  the  Danes, 
who  lived  there,  as  to  examine  the  Catechu- 
mens. This  time,  the  sea  was  open,  though 
full  of  floating-  ice.     Some  sailors,  who  had 

(12)  This  happened,  when,  after  having  with  infinite  pains 
gained  the  top  of  the  rock,  I  seated  myself  on  the  sledge  to 
descend,  which,  acquiring  velocity  from  the  steepness  of  the 
descent,  was  hurried  past  the  dogs. 


141 
been  at  Claushavn,  on   commercial  business, 
resolved    to    accompany    me ;    but  when  the 
day  for  our  departure  came,  they  were  afraid 
of  the    ice,  and  remained   behind.     I  set  off 
early  with  a  steersman,  six  women  to  row,  and 
a  Greenlander  in  his  Kajak.    With  much  diffi- 
culty   and    labour,    we    rowed    three    miles 
through  the  ice,  by  twelve  o'clock.     We  were 
saying,  that  the  mile  which  we  had  still  to 
go,  was  not  so  dangerous,  when  the  steers- 
man   suddenly  exclaimed,   "  Look  there,   up 
to  the  rock,  Priest  !    a  dreadful  storm  is  rising, 
which  will  soon  overtake  us."     I  saw  it,  and 
answered,     "  We  can   scarcely  proceed,    the 
resistance  is   too  great ;  let  us  put  back  :    we 
shall  find  some  place  in  the  neighbourhood, 
where   we  can  stop  till   the  storm  is  over." 
We  tacked  about,  but  while  we  were  doing  so, 
the  storm  was  already  come  up,  and  would, 
certainly,  have  overset  our  boat,  had  not  the 
Greenlander,    with  his  Kajak,  laid  himself  to 
windward,  and  manoeuvred  in  so  masterly  a 
manner  against  the  mighty  waves.     He  let 
them  pass  over  him,  by  which  they  lost  some- 
thing of  their  violence,  before  they  reached 
us.     The  boat,  however,  laboured  violently, 
by  which   some   knees   were   broken,   which 


142 

made  it  unsteady.     There  was  not  much  ap- 
pearance of  our  being*   saved.     The   women 
lost  their  courage,   and  would  not  work  any 
longer.    "  Row  !"   I  cried,  and  took  an  oar, 
"or  we  shall  be  drowned!" — "  We  shall  be 
drowned  notwithstanding,"  answered  they:  "it 
avails  nothing."   I  encouraged  them  by  words 
and  by  my  own  example,  rowed  with  all  my 
might,    and   said,     "  We  must  do  what   we 
can  for  our  safety,  and  we  shall  be  saved." 
They  now    took  up    their   oars   again  ;    but 
the  storm  continued,  our  boat  became  weaker 
and  weaker,   and,  in  truth,   our  hopes  also. 
After   we  had   laboured  for  about  an  hour, 
with   infinite  exertions,   and  had  been  in  the 
utmost  danger  of  our  lives,  kind  Providence 
conducted  us  into  a  little  bay,  where  the  land 
protected  us  against  the  violence  of  the  waves. 
Here,  we  found  ourselves  saved,  and  thank- 
ed God.     It  cost  us  some  trouble,  indeed,  to 
get  the  boat  up  over  the  crust  of  ice,  but  we 
effected  it.     We  turned  it  upside  down,  laid 
ourselves  under  it  upon  the  snow,  and  spoke 
of  the  danger  which  we  had  escaped.     The 
Kajak  rower  was  not  a  little  proud  of  his  ex- 
ploit -j  and  he  had  reason  to  be  so,  for  he  con- 
tributed the  most  to  our  deliverance.     Some 


143 
refreshment  would  now  have  been  welcome, 
but  this  was  not  to  be  thought  of.  I  had, 
indeed,  two  of  the  biscuits,  called  Skonsogne, 
which  my  wife  had  made  me  take  when  I  left 
home  ;  but  what  was  that  among  so  many  ? 

A  part  of  the  afternoon  was  already  gone, 
when  the  weather  became  more  calm.  "  To- 
morrow is  Easter  Sunday,"  said  I  to  my 
Greenlanders :  "  I  must  go  forward  by  land, 
or  else  back."  "  You  joke,  Priest,"  answered 
my  steersman,  quickly.  "  No,"  answered  I. 
"  I  am  quite  serious."  "  You  cannot  go 
forwards,"  said  he  ;  "  I  have  no  knowledge  of 
any  way.  The  rocks  are  terrible,  and  the 
way  back  is  so  long,  you  cannot  accomplish 
it."  "Let  us  see,"  said  I  ;  "follow  me!" 
At  last  I  prevailed  on  my  steersman  and  two 
women,  and  set  out.  As  long  as  it  was  day- 
light, we  went  on  well,  though  the  snow  was 
deep  ;  but  when  night  came  on,  we  were  un- 
able to  distinguish  rocks  and  vallies  from  each 
other.  We  fell  into  heaps  of  snow,  helped  each 
other  up,  fell  again,  and  again  got  up,  but 
became  more  and  more  fatigued,  and  faint. 
After  we  had  proceeded  for  some  hours, 
my  Greenlander  said,   "  We  have  missed  our 


144 

way ;  I  no   longer   hear    the    sea    roar."    I 
listened,  and  was  also  unable  to  hear  it.    "  We 
must  go  westward,"  said  I ;   "  the  wind  has 
not  changed."     We  did  so,  and,  by  extraor- 
dinary  exertion,    came   in   about  two  hours 
nearer  to  the  strand,  and  soon  after  to  a  plain, 
which  was  inclosed,  on  both  sides,  by  high 
rocks.     I    thought    I    recollected   this   plain, 
walked  up  and  down  on  the  beach,  and  found 
that  I  really  recognised  it,  having  been  there 
the  preceding  autumn.     "  We   are  in   Sand- 
bay,"  said  I  to   my  companions  when  I  re- 
turned to  them,  "  and  are  now  not  far  from 
home."    "  It  is  a  mile,"  said  my  Greenlander, 
M  if  we  go  the  right  way ;  but  we  should  have 
scarcely  half  a  mile,  if  you  could  clamber  up 
that  rock."    "  Wait  a  little,"  said  I,  and  di- 
vided my  two  biscuits  among  us  four.     We 
eat  them,  drank  or  swallowed  some  snow,  and 
felt  ourselves  a  litle  refreshed.     "  Now,  up  the 
rock  !"  I  cried. — "  At  the  top  it  is  perpendicu- 
lar,"  replied  my  Greenlander  ;   "if  your  foot 
slips,  you  fall  into  the  sea,  and  no  one  can 
save  you."  "  We  will  try,"  said  I ;  and  now 
we  began,  with  the  little  strength  we  had  left, 
to  clamber  up.     We  walked  and  crawled,  but 


145 

still  advanced,  however,  till  we  reached  the 
abovementioned  steep  place.  "  Now,  tate 
care,  Priest !  don't  slip  I" — ♦'  Help  me,"  said 
my  Greenlander,  "  and  I  will  help  you  when 
I  have  got  up."  He  began  to  climb,  and, 
by  the  assistance  of  the  women  who  helped 
him,  got  up  happily.  "  Wait  a  little,"  said 
he  ;  "  I  must  rest  myself:"  but  soon  after  he 
laid  himself  on  his  belly,  stretched  himself  out 
as  far  as  possible  over  the  steep  rock,  and  said, 
"  Come  !  I  will  take  hold  of  you."  One  of 
the  women  clambered  up,  I  helped  her,  he 
took  her  hand,  and  pulled  her  up.  Now,  it 
was  my  turn.  Both  those  who  were  up,  and 
she  who  was  behind,  exerted  their  strength 
for  me  :  I  climbed  •,  my  knees  tottered  ;  I  was 
near  falling,  and,  consequently,  perishing,  when 
I  got  hold  of  the  out-stretched  hand  of  the 
Greenlander.  By  this,  and  the  help  of  the 
woman  who  was  behind,  I  got  up1,3  safe. 
"  That  was  good  !  that  was  good  !"  cried 
my  companions.  "  Yes,"  said  I,  "  that  was 
good.  God  be  praised.  But  now,  help  her 
who  is  behind."     That   they   did  faithfully; 

(13)  The  Greenlanders,  accustomed  from  their  youth  to 
climb  up  high  rocks,  have  a  great  advantage. 

U 


146 

both  took  her  hand,  and  we  were  all  saved, 
but  so  exhausted,  that  we  were  obliged  to  sit 
down,  and  rest,  ten  times  during  the  quarter  of 
a  mile  which  we  had  still  to  go. 

At  length,  we  reached  the  colony,  on  Eas- 
er  Sunday,  at  four  o'clock  in  the  morning,  so 
exhausted  that  I  fell  over  the  threshold  of  the 
kitchen  door,  and  my  companions  stumbled. 
I  knocked  at  the  door  of  the  chamber,  and 
pronounced  my  name  :  my  wife  was  awake, 
and  lay  praying  to  God  for  my  safety  ;  for  all 
the  Danes  and  Greenlanders  at  Claushavn 
said,  the  day  before,  while  the  storm  raged, 
that  it  was  impossible  we  should  be  saved  if 
we  were  at  sea,  but  they  hoped  we  might  have 
arrived  at  Claushavn,  before  it  broke  out. 
While  my  wife  got  up,  and  opened  the  door, 
I  went  to  the  chamber  of  my  man  servant,  to 
wake  him,  and  to  tell  him  to  make  a  fire  in  the 
kitchen.  He  had  gone  to  sleep  with  the  idea 
that  we  were  all  drowned.  When  I  awoke 
him,  and  he,  still  half  asleep,  recognized  my 
voice,  he  thought  it  was  my  ghost,  crossed 
himself,  and  said,  "  God,  be  merciful  to  his 
soul !  He  was  a  good  man  !" — "It  is  myself,'* 
said  I ;  "we  are  saved."     Now,  he  became 


147 
thoroughly  awake,  and  thanked  God  from  the 
bottom  of  his  soul14.  Meantime,  my  wife 
had  opened  the  door  of  the  room,  and  fell 
upon  my  neck,  with  tears  of  joy.  "God  then 
has  restored  him  to  me,"  was  all  that  she 
could  pronounce.  Yes !  we  were  restored  to 
each  other.  After  she  had  become  a  little 
calmer,  we  felt  with  grateful  joy  the  miraculous 
deliverance  which  God  had  vouchsafed  me. 
But  now  it  was  necessary  to  think  of  some 
refreshments  for  me  and  my  companions ; 
and  these  were  not  so  easily  to  be  obtained. 
The  fast  time  had  set  in15;  every  thing  that 
custom  had  rendered  necessary,  wine,  brandy, 
coffee,  tea,  sugar,  &c,  was  wanting.  My 
wife,  therefore,  warmed  a  pot  of  good  beer, 
with  a  slice  of  bread,  and  some  butter.  In 
the  condition  in  which  we  were,  this  was,  per- 
haps, the  best  thing  we  could  have  had.  We 
ate  Skonrogn  with  butter,  drank  warm  beer, 
and   found  ourselves  refreshed/    My   Green- 

(14)  He  was  a  good  honest  Jutlander,  and  had  kept  a  shop 
in  some  town  in  Jutland.  Having  been  unfortunate  in  husi- 
ness,  he  was  obliged  to  go  to  Greenland,  and  served  me,  for 
several  years,  with  fidelity,  and  uncommon  zeal. 

(15)  That  is,  the  time  when  the  stock  of  provision  was  ex- 
hausted, and  the  arrival  of  the  ships  anxiously  expected.  It 
often  lasted  long,  and  was  hard  enough  to  bear. 


146 

landers  went  home  quite  cheerful.  I  threw 
myself  on  the  bed  for  a  few  hours,  and  per- 
formed divine  service  at  the  usual  time. 
Though  I  had  been  ill  before  this  journey,  it 
had  no  bad  consequences,  except  a  little  pain. 
At  the  news  of  my  return,  my  good  Green- 
landers  came  early  in  the  morning  to  my  wife, 
to  inquire  after  me,  and  expressed  their  joy  at 
my  safety.  My  boat,  which  the  Kajak-rower 
had  patched  up  a  little,  arrived  in  the  after- 
noon much  damaged.  The  people  were  well, 
but  excessively  hungry  :  they  had  need  of  re- 
freshment, and  received  it  accordingly. 


II. -^-ANOTHER   JOURNEY    TO    CHRISTIANSHAAB. 


About  twenty  or  thirty  paces  from  my 
house  there  flowed  a  small  stream,  with  excel- 
lent water  :  it  came  from  the  mountains  high 
up  the  country  •,  formed  two  fresh-water  lakes ; 
and  afterwards  emptied  itself  into  the  sea. 
In  winter  it  froze  over  i  but  in  spring  it  broke 
forth  with  violence  from  its  sources.  If  care 
had  not  been  taken  to  dig  channels  to  direct 
its  course,  it  took  a  wrong  direction,  and  not 
oniy  overflowed  the  spot  on  which  my  house 
stood,  but  even  threatened  the  house  itself. 


149 
This  was  particularly  the  case  one  spring. 
On  the  24th  of  May  I  was  told  that  we  might 
expect  the  stream.     My  people  had,  indeed, 
already  done   something-  to  guide  its  course, 
but  not  enough.     In  the   forenoon  it  had  al- 
ready spread  over  the  place,   and  approached 
the  colony.     I  had  resolved  to  set  out,  in  the 
afternoon,  on  business,  to  Christianshaab  ;  and 
had,  therefore,  ordered  the  sledge  to  be  ready 
at  two  o'clock.     The  forenoon  was  employed 
in  instructing  the  young  people  j  but,  when  it 
was  time  for  them  to  go  home,  the  way  was 
intercepted  ;  the  swollen  stream  was  already 
above  the  threshold  of  the  house,  and  flowed 
through  my  little  garden.     The  children  were 
obliged  to  get  over  an  out-house,  by  means  of 
a  ladder,  in  order  to  reach  home,  and  this  was 
scarcely  possible.     I  wished  to  dine  before  I 
set  out :  dinner  was  served  up,  and  we  ate ; 
but  as  my  wife  was  going  into  the  kitchen, 
and  opened  the  door,  it  was  torn   out  of  her 
hand,  and  the  water  rushed  into   the   room. 
We  were  at  a  loss  what  to   do.     There  was 
every    appearance   that   the  house   might    be 
broken  through ;  and  I  was  to  depart.     My 
old  Catechist  had  been  already  thrown  down 
by  the  water  in  the  kitchen  ;  and  with  us  in 


150 

the  room  all  was  afloat.     My  wife  and  my 
son  could  not  remain  behind ;  I  should  else 
have   been  tormented    by    anxious    suspense 
respecting"  their  fate  in  my  absence.     At  last 
we  set  out  a  great  table,  put  chairs  upon   it, 
and  endeavoured  to  save  our  beds  by  laying 
them  upon  the  chairs.     We  drew  the  drawers 
from  the  wardrobes,  and  piled  them  up  in  the 
same  manner.     We  wanted  now  only  a  nap- 
kin, with  bread   and  butter,  for  a  few  days, 
and  we   were  ready.     I   prevailed  upon    the 
Catechist   to  accompany    us  ;    and    now    we 
escaped  out  of  the  kitchen  window,   which 
went  out  on  one  side,  where  the  water  was  not 
so  deep,  because  the  ground  was  higher.    But 
now  we  had  to  walk   a  pretty  considerable 
distance  over  the  ice16 ;  my  wife  in  order  to 
take  up  her  abode  in  a  Greenland  house,  and 
I  to  get  to  my  sledge.     But  the  ice  was  ex- 
tremely brittle,  hardly  any  thing  but  foam, 
and  still  more  dangerous  on  account  of  the 
stream,  which  rushed  furiously  along  ;  and  yet 
we  had  to  go  over  this  very  place  !    Resolved 
to  share  the  same  fate,  we  took  our  little  son, 

(16)  The  overflowed  stream  rushed  furiously  between  my 
house  and  the  Greenlanders.  The  ice  was  the  only  way  by 
which  we  could  reach  them. 


151 
two  years  old,  between  us  :  the  Catechist  ac- 
companied us,  and  we  reached,  almost  without 
hoping"  it,  our  destination  for  the  present.    My 
wife  had  never  yet  passed  a  night  in  a  Green- 
lander's    house,    and  could  not  prevail  upon 
herself  to  sleep  upon  the  bench,  among  all  the 
naked  people.      With   her   back   against  the 
wall,    and  her  little   boy    upon  her  lap,  she 
held  it  out  for  three  nights  and  three  days. 
On  the  fourth  day  the  stream  had  returned  into 
its  own  bed  :  it  was  still  rapid  and  furious,  but 
not  so  broad  but   that  she  could  attempt  to 
pass  it,  supported  by  two  Greenlanders,  upon 
a  board  laid  across  ;  and   she  got  home  safe. 
I  will  say  nothing-  of  the  destruction  in  our 
house  and  around   it.      My  wife  did   every 
thing  to  put  it,  in  some  measure,  in  an  habit- 
able state  before  my  return. 

As  soon  as  I  had  placed  her  in  security,  in  a 
Greenlander's  house,  on  the  beforementioned 
24th  of  May,  I  set  out  upon  my  journey.  The 
ice  was  very  brittle  ;  not  like  that  upon  which 
we  are  used  to  venture  at  the  beginning"  of 
winter,  but  like  that  which  the  stream  and  sun 
daily  undermine  and  melt  away.  After  we 
had  proceeded  two  miles,  we  met  with  an 
opening  so  long  that  we  could  not  go  round 


152 
it,  and  so  broad  that  we  could  not  get  over, 
except  by  a  successful  jump.  My  Greenlander 
said,  "  We  shall  not  get  over  unless  we  take 
a  run  before  we  leap  ;  and  then  it  is  a  question 
whether  the  ice  on  the  other  side  is  strong- 
enough  to  bear  us."  We  had  each  of  us  a 
tuk17.  My  companion  took  a  run,  with  his 
pole  in  his  hand,  and  got  happily  over.  I 
also  took  a  run,  aimed  at  the  same  spot  as  he, 
to  obtain  firm  footing,  and  reached  it ;  but  by 
his  weight  the  ice  had  already  so  far  burst, 
that,  when  mine  was  added  to  it,  it  broke 
under  me,  and  I  fell  up  to  the  arms  in  the 
cleft.  In  this  situation  I  should  certainly  have 
got  under  the  ice,  and  have  been  irrecoverably 
lost,  had  not  my  pole,  which  as  I  fell  came 
across  the  cleft,  supported  me.  I  had  sunk 
too  deep  to  be  able  to  help  myself  up ;  and 
my  Greenlander  did  not  like  to  take  hold  of 
me,  as  the  circumstances  required.  "  How 
shall  I  help  you  up,  Priest  ?"  said  he.  M  Dare 
I  take  you  by  the  hair  and  one  arm  ;  for  you 
must  not  let  go  of  the  pole  ?" — M  Take  hold 
of  me  where  you  think  best,"  answered  I ; 
*'  but  as  soon  as  possible,  for  I  grow  every 

(17)  A  pole  about  six  feet  long,  with  an  iron  at  the  end, 
which  is  carried  to  examine  the  ice  with. 


153 
moment  heavier.' '  Now  he  quickly  took  me 
by  the  hair  and  the  left  arm  •,  but  it  was  ne- 
cessary for  him  to  be  very  cautious,  that  the 
ice  might  not  break  while  he  was  helping  me, 
and  thus  both  of  us  perish.  He  pulled  me  up 
so  far  that  I  could  help  myself:  I,  of  course, 
did  this  more  and  more  in  proportion  as  I  was 
able,  and,  at  last,  got  out  happily,  but  was 
wet  through.  In  this  condition,  I  had  still 
two  miles  to  travel18.  The  wind  blew  cold 
from  the  north,  and  I  was,  indeed,  not  warm. 
However,  we  got  to  the  end  of  our  journey. 
On  my  arrival  at  Christianshaab,  I  immedi- 
ately changed  my  clothes  and  linen.  The 
merchant  then  regaled  me  with  coffee,  a 
good  repast,  and  afterwards  with  excellent 
punch,  which  warmed  me  thoroughly.  I  slept 
well,  got  up  in  good  health  and  spirits,  and 
thanked  God.  When  the  business  which  oc- 
casioned my  journey  was  finished,  I  returned 
home  by  water.  My  simple  dwelling  looked 
miserably,  and  yet  it  had  been  repaired  as  far 
as  the  time  had  allowed.     My   little  garden 

(IS)  When  the  Greenlaoder  had  helped  me  out,  he  called 
the  dogs  to  him,  and  they  swam  over  with  the  sledge. 


154 
was  entirely  ruined.     My  wife  and  son  were 
in  good  health,  and  my   Greenlanders  were 
well ;  every  thing,  therefore,  was  well. 


III. A   JOURNEY    TO    JACOBSHAVN. 

I  was  indisposed,  and  resolved  to  go  in  the 
Christmas  holidays  to  Jacobshavn,  to  get  my- 
self blooded  by  the  merchant  there :  he  was 
the  only  person,  for  some  miles  round,  who 
could  perform  this  operation ;  but  the  season 
was  unfavourable  ;  the  20th  of  December  •, 
there  was  no  daylight ;  so  near  the  equinox  ;  the 
sea  was  stormy  ;  the  ice  unsafe ;  and  the  ice- 
bergs, which  were  raised  from  the  bottom  by 
the  high  sea,  extremely  deceitful.  However, 
I  set  out;  necessity  commanded  ;  and  a  Green- 
lander  had  told  me,  the  day  before,  that  it 
was  possible  to  go  over  the  ice  in  the  Isef- 
jord.  Our  party  was  in  two  sledges.  We 
travelled  half  a  mile  by  land,  without  any 
accident ;  but  when  we  had  got  some  part  of 
the  way  over  the  bay,  the  ice  grew  so  thin,  that 
we  were  obliged  to  take  all  the  dogs  except 
four  from  the  sledges  :  we  should  not  have 


155 
been  able  to  do  even  this,  any  more  than  to 
turn,  had  not  a  piece  of  old  ice  given  us  an 
opportunity  to  halt  and  unharness  the  dogs. 
We  now  continued  our  journey.  At  the  dis- 
tance of  a  musket  shot  to  our  left  there  was 
open  sea,  and  on  our  right  some  Greenlanders 
were  sitting  at  the  foot  of  the  neighbouring  ice- 
bergs, to  shoot  seals.  Far  up  the  bay,  icebergs 
were  falling  together  with  a  dreadful  crash.  At 
last,  after  many  dangers,  we  reached  the  op- 
posite coast.  The  way  to  the  colony  passed 
over  a  pretty  high  rock  ;  we  ascended  it ; 
looked  back  ;  and  on  the  spot  over  which  we 
had  just  driven  in  our  sledges,  there  was  no  ice 
now  to  be  seen  !  We  thanked  God  for  our 
escape,  drove  on,  and  reached  the  colony  about 
eight  o'clock  in  the  evening,  just  as  the  mer- 
chant and  the  clergyman  had  sat  down  to 
supper. 

They  had,  indeed,  heard  the  barking  of 
strange  dogs  •,  but  they  could  not  possibly 
imagine  that  an  European  had  ventured  over 
the  bay  at  this  season,  and  did  not  mind  it. 
I  entered  ;  and,  as  I  perceived  that  I  was  not 
recognized,  I  seated  myself  on  a  bench  near 
the  door.  The  conversation  was  respecting 
me.     The  merchant  turned  to  me,  whom  he 


156 

took  for  a  Greenlander,  and  asked  me,  with 
kindness,  whether  I  had  heard  any  thing  to- 
day of  the  clergyman  at  Claushavn  ?  "  I  have 
seen  him  to-day." — "  Seen  him  !**  he  ex- 
claimed ;  "  you  lie  !" — "  No  !"  said  I,  and 
stepped  forwards.  My  arrival,  at  this  time, 
astonished  them  ;  but,  at  the  same  time,  they 
were  happy  to  see  me  alive.  Now  they  made 
me  relate  the  circumstances  of  my  journey  over 
and  over  again.  "  My  business,"  said  I, 
"  among  other  things,  is  to  ask  you  to  bleed 
me  to-morrow." — "  Very  willingly,"  said  he, 
"  if  necessity  requires  it ;  but  it  is  the  equinox, 
and  this  season  is  not  considered  favourable." 
The  day  came  and  went,  without  my  resolving 
on  any  thing :  the  next  day  came  ;  but  whe- 
ther it  was  the  change  of  place,  company,  or 
conversation,  or  whatever  it  might  be,  my 
spirits  were  more  cheerful,  my  blood  cooler, 
and,  as  I  was  advised,  I  deferred,  to  another 
time,  the  bleeding  for  which  I  had  come  with 
such  imminent  danger. 

Now  I  was  to  return  home  again,  as  the 
holidays  were  at  hand.  But  how  ?  No  Dane 
would  venture,  at  this  season,  to  go  in  a  vessel 
out  of  the  Isefjord  (only  the  Greenlander  in 
his  Kajak  ventures  upon  it)  j  and  in  the  bay 


157 

itself,  and  between  the  rocks,  it  was  extremely 
dangerous,  though  it  was  said,  that,  half  a  mile 
above  the  place  where  I  had  passed,  it  was 
still  possible  to  get  over  the  ice.  I  resolved, 
however,  to  return  home,  though  my  friends 
dissuaded  me,  and  my  good  wife  wrote  to  me 
by  a  Kajak,  that  the  old  Catechist  would 
attend  to  the  divine  service  for  the  Green- 
landers,  and  would  read  to  the  two  Danes 
there,  a  printed  sermon  ;  so  that  nothing  should 
be  neglected,  and  that  I  should,  by  all  means, 
remain  where  I  was. 

On  the  23d  of  December,  in  the  morning, 
I  set  out  on  my  return :  my  friends  accom- 
panied me  for  some  time  ;  but,  when  the  road 
began  to  be  difficult,  we  took  leave  of  each 
other,  as  their  accompanying  me  any  farther 
would  only  have  detained  me.  After  great 
exertions,  and  many  dangers,  we  came  to  an 
iceberg,  which,  except  for  the  space  of  two 
fathoms,  was  surrounded  with  open  water. 
We  could  not  pass  over  this  water,  nor  was 
there  any  possibility  of  passing  any  where  else ; 
we  were,  therefore,  obliged  to  resolve  on 
climbing  over  the  iceberg,  which  was  not  high, 
and  seemed  to  be  sound.  A  hazardous  under- 
taking!   However,  we  got  over  the  iceberg 


158 
happily  -,  called  our  dogs,  which  swam  over 
to  us ;  and,  at  last,  reached  our  shore.  But 
the  ice  was  every  where  broken  ;  we  could 
not  land  ;  and  there  was  every  appearance  of 
our  being-  obliged  to  remain  where  we  were. 
For  some  hours  we  drove  and  walked  back- 
wards and  forwards,  till,  at  last,  we  found,  in  a 
little  creek,  a  narrow  slip  of  ice  fast  to  the  land, 
over  which  we  hastened,  and  got  on  shore. 
•But  my  Greenlanders  had  never  been  so  far  up 
the  country  :  they  knew  neither  rocks  nor  val- 
lies ;  all  they  knew  was,  that  we  must  travel 
towards  the  south-west,  in  order,  if  possible,  to 
reach  home.  The  evening  was  at  hand,  and, 
with  that,  the  darkness.  We  did  not  know 
how  long  the  way  was  which  we  had  still 
before  us.  However,  we  had  escaped  the  dan- 
ger of  the  bay,  and  drove  on  full  of  hope ; 
but,  after  we  had  travelled  about  an  hour,  one 
of  our  sledges,  in  descending  a  rock,  struck 
against  a  large  stone  :  the  thong  that  fastened 
the  dogs  to  the  pole  broke  ;  and  the  dogs  ran 
away,  finding  themselves  free.  This  impeded 
our  progress,  for  we  were  obliged  to  give  the 
Greenlander  a  place  in  our  sledge,  and  allow 
him  to  fasten  his  behind  ours.  The  dogs 
reached  home  long  before  us,  and  were,  as 


159 
usual,  received  by  the  other  dog's  in  the  place 
with  noise  and  barking.  This  made  the  Green- 
landers  come  out  of  their  houses ;  and,  as  they 
knew  the  dogs  were  still  wet,  and  their  coats 
full  of  icicles,  it  was  generally  believed  that 
we  had  perished.  In  anxious  expectation,  and 
almost  without  hope,  my  wife  and  the  others 
went  about ;  when  the  dog's  of  the  colony  again 
began  to  bark,  and  thus  announced  our  arrival. 
The  joy  of  my  wife  was  not  to  be  described. 
The  sudden  transition  from  grief  to  joy  had 
such  an  effect  on  my  old  Catechist,  whose  son 
was  my  driver,  that  his  scurvy  seized  him,  and 
held  him  so  fast  to  the  earth,  that  he  could  not 
stir  from  the  spot :  I  went  up  to  him,  and 
saluted  him.  To  shew  him  that  we  were  not  so 
fatigued  as  to  be  unable  to  be  cheerful,  I  said, 
"Are  we  not  active  people?" — "Yes,"  said 
he,  "  so  active,  that  you  will  one  day  perish, 
to  the  sorrow  of  us  all." 


160 


Chap.  VIII. 

Some  Particulars  of  our  Trade  with  the  Green- 
landers. 


+■*••+*-+■*■++ 


The  navigation  to  Greenland,  as  well  as  the 
trade  with  the  inhabitants,  was  carried  on, 
some  years  ago,  for  the  account  of  the  king, 
who,  probably,  seldom  gained  by  any  trade ; 
but,  in  general,  it  has  been  carried  on  by  a 
company  under  the  direction  of  a  board19.  The 
uninitiated  could  only  guess  at  the  profits, 
which,  in  the  manner  that  the  trade  was  ma- 
naged, must  have  been  considerable.  A  cer- 
tain price  or  tariff  was  feed  for  the  goods 
which  were  sent  thither,  and,  at  the  same  time, 
it  was  fixed  what  payment  the  Greenlanders 
should  receive  for  the  articles  which  they  dis- 
posed of.  The  goods  sent  there,  consisted, 
among  other  things,  of  kerseys,  Silesian  linen, 
cottons,  silk  handkerchiefs,  ribands,  beads, 
scraping-knives,    and  other  knives,  harpoon 

(19)  This,  however,  is  after  the  reports  of  others.  I  can- 
not affirm  it  as  certain,  and  it  must  be  indifferent  to  the  reader 
who  carried  it  on. 


161 
irons,  kettles,  powder,  lead,  tobacco,  and  fire- 
arms. The  Greenlanders  sold  blubber,  seals 
skins,  foxes  skins,  sometimes  bears  skins,  whale- 
bone, unicorns  horns20,  eider  down,  &c.  I  do 
not  know  what  the  abovementioned  Danish 
goods  cost ;  but,  in  my  time,  the  tariff  for  us 
Europeans  was  as  follows : 

Marcs.  Schil.  Groschen.  Pfennig. 

1  Ell  of  kersey81....  2  10  or  10  6 

1   Pound  of  powder  2  0  or  8  0 

1   Pound  of  lead....  0  10  or  2  6 

1   Scraping-knife...  1  8  or  6  0 

1   Harpoon   iron   1  Q  8  ^  g  Q 

without  barbs   ) 

1   Do.  with  barbs...  0  12  or  3  0 

The  Greenlanders,  on  the  other  hand,  had  to 
pay,  for  an  ell  of  kersey,  a  pound  of  powder, 
six  harpoon  irons,  two  scraping"  knives,  &c.  a 
tub  of  blubber.  The  tub  called  a  bulge  was 
the  measure  in  which  the  merchant  received 
the  blubber,   and  it  should  contain  a  barrel. 

(20)  Unicorn  (Eenhjorning,  Narhval)  is  a  fish  which  is  from 
sixteen  to  twenty-two  feet  in  length,  and  has  a  long  tooth  pro- 
jecting from  the  left  side  of  the  upper  jaw.  This  tooth  is  what 
is  called  unicorn's  horn. Fries. 

(21)  The  prices  in  marcs  and  schillings  are  probably  in  pa- 
per currency,  and  the  groschen  silver  currency. Trans. 

Y 


162 

A  barrel  of  blubber,  when  boiled  in  Copen- 
hagen, might  yield  about  three  quarters  of  a 
barrel  of  train  oil.    When  we  know  that  a  tub 
or  barrel  of  blubber  was  paid  for  with  no  more 
than  the  value  of  a  rixdollar,  that  the  Danish 
goods   were    sold  to  the  Greenlanders  at   an 
advanced  price,  as  we  have  seen  above,  and 
also  that  the  barrel  of  train  oil  was  worth,  in 
those  years,  from  sixteen  to  eighteen  rixdollars 
(and,  therefore,  three  quarters  of  a  barrel  from 
twelve  to  thirteen  and  a  half  rixdollars),  we 
see,  not  only  what  these  necessaries  cost  the 
Greenlanders,   but  also  what  advantages  the 
company  derived  from  them.     But  of  all  the 
goods,  none  cost  them  dearer  than  a  rifle  gun, 
which  was  so  indispensable  for  them,  in  Disco 
Bay,  where  the  ice  lies  fast  for  many  months, 
and  the  seals  must  be  shot.     I  am  not  certain, 
but  I  was  told,  that  each  rifle  cost  the  com- 
pany six  or  seven  rixdollars :  and  the  Green- 
landers were  obliged  to  give  ten  rixdollars,  or 
ten  barrels  of  blubber,  which,  according  to  the 
calculation   above,    was   a  great  expense   for 
them,  and  a  great  advantage  to  the  company. 
This  expense,  however,  they  could  bear  :   nor 
was  the  profit  unreasonable  when  we  consider 
the  expenses  of  fitting  out  the  ships,  provisi- 


lta 
oning  the  colonies,  and  then  the  payment  of 
the  numerous  persons  employed  in  Copenhagen 
and  in  Greenland  ;  to  say  nothing  of  the  risk 
of  trade  in  such  a  dangerous  sea  :  but  the 
Greenlanders  paid  a  great  deal  more  for  their 
goods,  and  this  more  was  too  much. 

I  will  explain  my  meaning  more  clearly. 
They  gave,  for  example,  not  ten  tubs  of  blub- 
ber for  a  rifle  gun",  but  even  fifteen,  and 
the  tub  did  not  contain  one  barrel  only,  but 
one  barrel  and  a  half,  and  was,  besides,  with- 
out a  bottom.  When  they  were  to  measure, 
the  workmen  very  cunningly  contrived  to  put 
the  tub  over  a  hole,  which  was  to  be  filled 
before  the  blubber  reached  the  bottom  of  the 
tub,  and,  after  that,  the  tub  was  filled.  The 
Greenlanders  knew,  indeed,  that  this  was  not 
as  it  should  be.  Some  were  silent,  others 
laughed  and  said,  "  Well,  it  will  be  full  at 
last,"  and  all  remained  on  the  same  footing. 
I  do  not  exaggerate,  but  affirm  that  the  Green- 
landers, in  my  time,  paid  for  their  guns  in 
this  manner.  Two  or  three  years  passed 
before  they  could  save  so  much.    They  seldom 

(22)  The  rifle  gun  was  the  most  important  necessary.  They 
had  to  pay,  in  the  same  proportion,  for  other  necessaries ;  but 
I  cannot  exactly  say  what  they  gave  for  a  kettle,  for  instance. 


164 
received  the  gun  till  they  had  delivered  the 
half,  and  when  they  did,  there  was  often  a 
crack  in  the  barrel,  or  the  lock  was  damaged, 
and  these  faults  required  new  expenses  before 
it  was  serviceable.  In  short,  they  gave  an 
immense  price  for  a  gun,  which  was  often  very 
indifferent,  and  this  price  is  often  obtained 
with  difficulty,  and  at  the  risk  of  their  lives. 
The  company  received  only  ten  barrels  :  the 
merchants  kept  the  rest  without  any  scruple 
for  themselves"  ;  and  yet  these  were  not  real 
merchants,  but  only  commercial  agents.  They 
risked  nothing  in  the  trade.  If  they  only 
gave  an  account  of  the  goods  sent  over 
to  them,  and  of  the  quantity  of  blubber, 
whalebone,  &c.,  which  they  purchased  for 
them,  and  provided  themselves  with  a  certi- 
ficate from  the  captain,  for  the  goods  which 
they  sent  home,  they  were  exempt  from  all 
loss,  even  should  the  ship  perish  ;  they  ought, 
therefore,  to  have  been  contented  with  a  small- 
er profit.    It  was  absolutely  necessary  to  allow 

(23)  The  Greenlanders  receive,  as  I  have  said,  according  to 
the  company's  tariff,  only  one  rixdollar  for  a  barrel  of  blubber, 
and,  after  the  merchants' tariff,  one  rixdollar  for  one  tub  or 
barrel ;  but  I  do  not  know  what  payment  was  given  them  for 
whalebone,  skins,  unicorns  horns,  and  other  goods. 


165 
them  some  profit ;  for  example,  so  much  per 
cent  on  the  quantity  of  blubber  which  they 
sent  home,  or  premiums  when  they  sent  a  cer- 
tain quantity,  &c. ;  for  most  of  them  know  no 
other  blessing"  than  profit  ;  and,  without  hope 
of  obtaining-  this,  none  of  these  commercial 
agents  would  remain  in  Greenland,  and  the 
trade  would  stand  still.  I  must  be  very  much 
mistaken  if  the  company  does  not  gain  upon 
the  goods  which  it  receives  according"  to  the 
appointed  tariff ;  but  how  much  more  would  it 
gain,  would  the  mother  country  and  the  poor 
Greenlanders  gain,  if  the  appointed  tariff,  both 
for  the  Greenland  and  Danish  g*oods,  were  fol- 
lowed, and  the  whole  quantity  of  blubber 
obtained  from  the  colonies  turned  to  the 
advantage  of  the  legal  trade  ? 

The  merchants  were  very  mysterious,  even 
respecting  the  goods  which  they  sent  home  to 
the  company ;  but  I  know,  however,  that 
from  the  two  places  where  I  was  Minister, 
there  were  shipped,  for  its  account,  from  one 
hundred  and  thirty  to  two  hundred  barrels  of 
blubber2*;    nay,    one     year   certainly,    three 

(24)  The  blubber  sent  home  was  calculated  according  to 
casks,  each  containing  two  barrels;  the  quantity,  reckoning 
that  from  Jakobsbavn,  was,  perhaps,  three  hundred  barrels, 
and  above. 


166 
hundred  barrels,  besides  other  goods,  such  as 
whalebone,  skins,  &c. 

If  the  Minister,  as  the  representative  of  the 
Greenlanders,  particularly  of  those  who  were 
baptized,  spoke  or  wrote  to  the  merchant  on 
the  injustice  of  such  proceeding's,  the  peace 
between  them  was  broken,  and  many  unplea- 
sant consequences  ensued  :  if  he  sent  such  ac- 
counts home,  he  was  a  quarrelsome  man,  a 
man  who  meddled  in  things  which  did  not 
concern  him,  and — effected  nothing.  The 
directors  of  the  company  trusted  their  servants, 
and  the  missionary  college  was  so  convinced 
of  their  honesty,  that,  before  we  departed,  it 
enjoined  us,  among  other  duties,  to  live  upon 
good  terms  with  the  merchants.  The  favour, 
which  we  might  expect  at  our  return,  in  some 
measure,  depended  upon  it. 

My  merchant  and  I  always  observed  outside 
appearances,  and  God  knows  that  I  had  no 
desire  to  injure  him.  At  times,  indeed,  I  was 
obliged  to  write  to  him,  but  without  bitter- 
ness ;  and,  in  our  conversations,  all  such  things 
seemed  to  be  forgotten.  At  my  departure, 
he  wept,  and  wished  fervently  that  I  could  and 
would  remain ;  and,  after  my  return  to  my 
own  country,  the  missionary  college  gave  me 


167 
a  complaint,  made  by  him,  to  answer.  It 
stated,  that  I  had  carried  on  an  illicit  trade85 
with  the  Greenlanders.  I  was  convinced  that, 
as  an  honest  man,  I  ought  to  contribute  my 
part  to  set  bounds  to  irregularities,  by  which 
so  many  people  were  injured,  when  an  oppor- 
tunity presented  itself ;  and  I  obtained  it  in 
the  following  manner. 

I  gave  a  hint  of  some  of  the  things  which  I 
have  mentioned  above.  I  received  for  answer, 
"  Be  so  good  as  to  give  it  in  writing."  I 
wrote,  but  at  the  same  time  desired  not  to  be 
considered  as  an  informer.  I  wished  to  see 
nobody  called  to  account ;  I  only  wished  that 
it  might  be  made  impossible  for  those  con- 
cerned, to  act  towards  the  Greenlanders  as  they 
had  hitherto  done.  For  this  purpose,  I  pro- 
posed that  legal  tubs  or  barrels  should  be  sent 
to  Greenland,  which  should  have  a  bottom, 
but  hold  a  barrel  and  a  quarter,  because  the 
merchants,  without  this  excess,  would  be  suf- 
ferers ;  also  that  the  Greenlanders  should  be 
publicly  informed  that  they  should  not  suffer 
their  blubber  to  be  measured  with  any  barrels 

(25)  At  the  place  where  I  lived,  I  could  not  make  any 
legal  advantages,  and  I  never  allowed  myself  to  make  illegal 
ones. 


168 

beside  these,  &c.  I  have  reason  to  believe, 
that  my  proposal  was  partly  followed,  parti- 
cularly as  the  king  sent  to  Greenland,  in  the 
following-  year,  two  civil  officers,  called  In- 
spectors, whose  office  something  resembled 
that  of  the  bailiffs  here  in  Denmark.  It  was 
an  important  duty  for  them,  to  watch  over 
the  conduct  of  the  merchants,  and  to  take  care 
that  the  Greenlanders  were  not  cheated.  I 
hardly  need  to  observe,  that  I  have  spoken 
here  of  the  trade,  only  as  it  was  carried  on  in 
my  time,  and  particularly  in  Disco  Bay. 


Chap.  IX. 

The  Wedding, 


I  have  said  above  that  the  Minister  must 
interfere  in  marriage  concerns,  and  also  given 
the  reasons  for  it.  There  would  be,  therefore, 
nothing  more  to  say  on  the  subject,  had  not 
the  wedding,  of  which  I  am  going  to  give  an 
account,  been  very  remarkable,  and  very  near 
costing  me  dear. 

The  son  of  the  Catechist,  of  mixed  race,  a 


169 
handsome,  well  made,  and  active  Greenlander, 
had  fallen  in  love  with  the  handsomest  girl  in 
the  colony.     She  was  sensible,  modest,  and 
domestic  ;   so  that  his  father  had  no  objection 
to  his  attachment.     The  parents  who,  indeed, 
perceived  his  inclination  to  the  girl,  allowed 
him  to  frequent  their  house,  and  thus  gave  him 
an  opportunity  to  see  and  speak  to  his  mis- 
tress.    Some  years  passed  in  this  manner  ;  but 
the  constraint  to  which  they  were  subject  in 
these  visits,  was,  at  last,  importunate  to  the 
lovers,    as   their    passion    increased.      They 
sought  and  met  each  other  in  other  places, 
and  had  frequent   secret   interviews86.      The 
Greenlanders  began  to  speak  doubtfully  con- 
cerning them.     As  soon  as  I  perceived  this,  I 
told  his  father  what  I  had  heard,  and  proposed 
to  him  to  let  the  young  people  marry.  "  Very 
willingly,"  said  he ;    "I  desire  their  union, 
the  sooner  the  better."     I  sent  for  the  father 
of  the  girl,  and,  after  a  short  preface,  said, 
"  You  know  that  Peter  loves   your  daughter 
Louisa :    you  can  have  nothing  against  their 
marrying,  as  he  is  able  to  provide  for  a  wife, 

(26)  This  girl  did  not  scruple  to  acknowledge  her  attach- 
ment to  her  lover.  She  was  the  first,  and  the  only  one,  who 
did  so,  in  my  time. 

Z 


170 
and  is  a  worthy  young  man." — "  I  want 
her  services  myself,"  said  he.  "  She  cannot  al- 
ways serve  you,"  said  I ;  "  you  have  certainly 
heard  what  people  say ;  and,  as  her  father 
cannot  allow  her  reputation  to  be  hurt — " 
"  The  people  lie,"  said  he  ;  ff  she  shall  not 
have  him."  "  You  say  that,"  continued  I, 
"  merely  to  follow  the  old  custom.  In  our 
country,  parents  rejoice  to  see  their  daughters 
well  married  before  they  die,  but  it  is  your 
way  always  to  affect  opposition.  If  you  die, 
who  shall  take  care  of  your  daughter,  who 
may,  by  that  time,  have  become  an  old 
maid  ?"  "  It  is  all  the  same,"  said  he,  in  a 
tone  of  displeasure,  and  rose  to  go  away  ;  "  she 
shall  not  have  him." — "  She  shall  have  him," 
said  I ;  "I  dare  not  allow  young  people  to 
live  a  disorderly  life."  He  was  silent,  and 
withdrew.  The  Catechist,  who  was  so  well 
acquainted  with  the  way  of  thinking  of  the 
Greenlanders,  was  of  opinion  that  the  opposi- 
tion was  of  the  usual  kind,  and  was  of  no  con- 
sequence. I  appointed  the  day  for  the  wed- 
ding ;  fpr  the  Minister  always  fixes  the  day, 
and  acquaints  the  parties  concerned.  I  wished 
to  do  as  much  honour  to  the  festival  as  possi- 
ble, in  order  to  shew  the  father  of  the  bride- 


171 
groom  how  much  I  valued  him  as  a  teacher. 
I  therefore  invited  the  young  couple  and  their 
parents  to  dine  with  us  on  the  wedding-day, 
ordered  the  flag  to  be  hoisted,  &c. 

The  day  and  hour  came  ;  the  bridegroom 
appeared  with  his  train  •,  but  the  bride  did  not 
come.  I  sent  a  messenger  for  her ;  but  the 
messenger  came  back,  and  said  the  father  was 
angry,  and  would  not  let  the  girl  go.  I  was 
dressed  to  perform  the  ceremony  :  my  wife 
said,  therefore,  "  I  will  go  and  fetch  her 5" 
and  went  ;  but  she,  too,  came  back  without 
the  bride,  and  said  that  the  father  watched 
her  as  a  miser  did  his  treasure.  What  was 
now  to  be  done  ?  The  resistance  was  unusual ; 
for  the  parents  always  let  their  daughters  go, 
even  though  they  appear  to  be  displeased27. 
The  dignity  of  my  office  would  have  suffered 
by  yielding,  which,  in  this  case,  would  have 
been  weakness28 ;  I,  therefore,  put  on  my  pe- 

(27)  That  is,  those  parents  that  are  baptized :  among  the 
heathens  it  is  different,  as  has  been  remarked  before. 

(28)  I  must  here  observe,  that  some  Greenlanders  told  me 
the  young  people  had  began  too  familiar  an  intercourse ;  and, 
at  the  same  time,  begged  me  to  prevent,  in  time,  further 
offence  being  caused,  &c.  This  was  a  duty  the  more  incuni- 
bent  on  me,  as  teacher  of  religion  and  morals,  as  the  Green- 
landers  themselves,  even  the  heathens,  consider  temperance  in 


172 

lisse,  and  went  myself  to  fetch  the  girl.  "  Do 
not  go  there,  good  Priest !"  said  a  woman  to 
me  as  I  went  along  :  "  he  is  malicious." — 
"  You  know,"  said  I,  "  that  I  desire  only 
what  is  right,  and  he  must  obey  me." — "  We 
shall  see,"  said  she,  as  I  went  on.  When  I 
entered  the  house,  I  saw  him  sitting  on  the 
side  bench,  next  his  daughter  (she  sat,  un- 
dressed, on -the  right-hand  bench)  ;  and  be- 
sides them  some  women.  "  Why  do  you 
make  so  much  resistance  ?"  said  I.  "  You 
know  why  your  daughter  must  now  marry  : 
let  her  go." — "  You  may  take  her,"  answered 
he,  violently,  "  and  make  her  your  concu- 

youth  as  a  virtue,  and  blame  an  opposite  conduct  (see  Hans 
Egede's  Natural  History,  8.  79).  I  was  convinced  of  the  truth 
of  this  information,  and  therefore  endeavoured  to  persuade 
the  father  to  consent.  I  could  easily  guess  at  the  objection  he 
would  make,  for  that  was  usual ;  but  not  that  he  would  carry 
his  opposition  to  extremities;  nor  could  I  presume  that  the 
consequences  would  be  such  as  ensued.  In  my  own  country, 
my  way  of  proceeding  would  have  been  improper;  and,  if  it 
could  have  occurred  there,  would  have  justly  merited  censure ; 
but  my  situation  in  Greenland,  the  peculiar  relation  in  which 
I  stood  towards  my  baptized  Greenlanders,  who,  in  my  time, 
had  the  confidence  in  the  Minister,  and  the  Minister  alone, 
that  he  desires  only  what  is  right,  and,  therefore,  hold  them- 
selves bound  to  oblige  him  ;  nay,  even  the  way  of  thinking  of 
the  people,  or  their  opinion  of  immorality,  will  doubtless 
justify  it. 


173 

bine  ;  but  he  shall  not  have  her." — "  Now 
you  are  malicious,"  said  I :  "we  blame  your 
countrymen   who  have  concubines,  and  you 
offer   your  daughter   as   such  to   the   priest ! 
Put  on  your  pelisse,"  said  I  to  the  girl,  seri- 
ously, "  and   come  with  me  to  my  house." 
She  hastily  threw  on  her  pelisse,  and  passed  by 
her  father,  who  said  nothing,  and  let  her  go. 
I  did  not  observe  any  change  in  his  counte- 
nance ;   but  the  women   must  have  remarked 
it,  for   they   all  went  out,  as  I  supposed,  to 
accompany  the  bride.     When  we  were  alone, 
I  said  to  him,  "  You  see  that  your  opposition 
availed  nothing  :  I  have  invited  you  to  dinner 
to-day  ;    come    now     with    me ;     see     your 
daughter  married  ;  and  dine  with  me."     He 
made   no   answer.       "  Very    well,"   said  I ; 
turned  from  him,  and  went  to  the  door  of  the 
passage  oUt  of  the  house ;  but,  as  I  stooped,  in 
order  to  go  down  into  the  passage,  I  perceived 
that  he  was  behind  me.     I  immediately  stood 
upright  ;  and,  turning  round,  saw  him  with 
his  arm  lifted,  and  a  large  knife  in  his  hand, 
with  which  he  intended  to  stab  me  in  the  back, 
as  soon  as  I  had  got  with  half  my  body  into 
the  passage,  and,  therefore,  would  be  incapable 
of  making  any  resistance.     I  instantly  seized 


174 
him,  and  threw  him  on  the  ground ;  but  he 
seized  me  round  the  body,  and  held  me  so  fast, 
that  I  fell  on  the  ground  with  him.  In  a  rage, 
he  endeavoured  not  only  to  get  loose,  but  also 
to  give  me  the  meditated  blow  :  he  succeeded 
in  neither  ;  but,  as  he  was  naked,  and  I  could 
only  hold  him  fast  by  the  hair,  it  cost  me 
trouble  enough  to  manage  him.  "  Now  I 
could  beat  you,  use  you  ill,  and  you  deserve 
it ;  but  I  will  not :  I  must  defend  my  life,  of 
which  you  so  basely  attempted  to  deprive  me, 
but  not  revenge  myself ;  thus  the  great 
Teacher  commands." — "  That  is  the  same  to 
me,"  replied  he,  foaming  at  the  mouth.  While 
this  was  passing,  my  man  came  with  his  sledge 
near  the  house,  to  fetch  turf29.  "  Quick  !  go 
in !  Frederick  !  the  Priest !"  and  other  uncon- 
nected words,  exclaimed  the  Greenland  women. 
He  came  :  "  Good  God,  Sir  !  What  is  that  ? 
What  shall  I  do  ?"  cried  he,  almost  beside 
himself.  "  Try  to  get  the  knife  from  him," 
said  I ;  "  take  care  of  it,  and  of  all  the  others 
that  you  can  find  :  till  you  have  done  that,  I 
dare  not  let  him  go."  He  took  my  adversary 
by  the  right  arm ;  but,  in  disarming  him,  re- 

(29)  Not  having  room  in  ray  house,  I  kept  my  turf  in  the 
open  air. 


175 
ceived  a  severe  cut  in  the  finger.  At  this  time, 
a  young"  Greenlander  happened  to  return  from 
fishing.  The  women,  in  their  terror,  told  him 
what  had  happened  :  he  immediately  left  his 
boat,  and  came  in  to  us.  "  Priest,"  said  he, 
"  I  will  help  you.  Oh  !  the  villain  !"  This 
offer  was  the  more  laudable,  as  the  Green- 
landers  are,  in  general,  averse  to  hurting  each 
other.  "  I  thank  you  for  your  good  will," 
said  I  ;  M  but  now  he  cannot  do  much  more." 
These  words  gave  him  strength  to  make  some 
faint  attempts  to  get  loose  without  assistance. 
At  last  he  said,  "  Let  me  go,  Priest."  I  left 
him  under  the  guard  of  his  countrymen,  and 
went  away,  having  first  reproved  him  for  his 
base  and  unlawful  conduct.  When  I  got  into 
the  open  air,  I  heard  my  wife,  in  the  utmost 
consternation,  ask  the  Greenland  women  about 
me,  and  for  the  house  in  which  she  had  just 
been  herself  •,  for  one  of  them  had  called  out, 
"  Come,  good  lady ;  Frederick  has  doubtless 
stabbed  the  Priest !"  She  saw  me,  and  wept 
for  joy. 

While  all  this  was  passing,  the  young 
couple  and  the  attendants  had  been  waiting 
for  me.  I  came  now,  and,  as  soon  as  I  had  put 
my  dress  in  order  again,  let  the  ceremony 


176 
begin  with  a  psalm ;  but  when  I  was  going*  to 
advance,  in  order  to  speak,  the  Catechist  said 
to  me,  in  a  whisper,  "  You  must  not  stand  just 
before  the  window  :  he  knows  that  you  always 
stand  there  when  you  perform   the  marriage 
ceremony,  and  he  might  be  wicked  enough  to 
shoot   you   through    the    window."      I   was, 
therefore,   obliged  to  change  my  place,  and 
make  the  young  couple  change  theirs.     The 
ceremony  began  and  finished  ;  and  never  did 
a  Greenland  bride  give  me  such  a  willing  and 
plain  answer  as  this  one.     The  young  couple, 
the  Catechist,  and  his  wife,  dined  with  us  (the 
train,  as  usual  on  such  occasions,  I  had  enter- 
tained in  a  Greenland  house) ;  but,  though   I 
tried  to  encourage  them,  there  prevailed  in 
the  company  a  silence,  a  fearful  presentiment 
of  some  misfortune  impending  over  me,  which 
Providence  graciously  averted.    Notwithstand- 
ing  all   the    opposition   that   the   father  had 
made,  he  was  soon  reconciled  to  his  son-in-law ; 
the  marriage  was  happy.     I  took  my  usual 
walks  without  apprehension  ;    and  he  never 
afterwards  tried  to  injure  me. 


177 

Chap.  X. 

Sequel  to  the  preceding  Chapter. 

It  may  easily  be  supposed,  that  the  event 
related   in   the   preceding*  Chapter  was  soon 
generally  known.     Since  the  time  of  the  late 
Hans   Egede,  nobody  had  yet  ventured  to  lay 
hands  upon  the  Priest,  or  upon  any  European. 
It  was  spoken  of  at  visits,   and,  especially,  at 
the  fishing*  places,  where  so  many  persons   are 
sometimes    assembled.      The    most,  particu- 
larly  my  baptized    Greenlanders,   considered 
his   conduct   as  a  crime   towards  their  good 
Priest,  as  they  called  me  ;  others  smiled,  and 
said,  M  So,  then,  there  are,  at  last,  people  who 
dare  shew  the  Danes  that  they  are  not  masters 
here."     The  Danes  in  the  neighbouring  colo- 
nies heard  the  news  with   astonishment  j  and 
wrote  me  word,  that,  if  the  account  were  true, 
this  Greenlander  must  be  publicly  whipped  ; 
and  that,  if  I  desired  it,   their  people  should 
come  to  inflict  the  punishment.     I  thanked 
them ;  but,   at   the  same  time,  assured  them 
that  I  did  not  think  of  taking   any   revenge  ; 
that  what  had  passed  would  have  no  farther 

a  a 


178 
consequences,  &c.      However,   he  no  longer 
frequented  our  Christian  assemblies :  I  sent  to 
him,  but  he  made  an  excuse  ;  I  went  to  him, 
but  he  always  contrived  to  avoid  me. 

About  a  year  had  passed  in  this  manner, 
when  an  epidemic  distemper  attacked  the 
Greenlanders,  and  carried  many  off ;  so  many, 
indeed,  that,  at  last,  the  healthy  were  not 
sufficient  to  bury  the  dead :  they  then  crept 
with  their  corpses  to  me,  and  left  it  to  my  care 
to  do  the  rest.  From  morning  to  evening  I 
went  about  among  all  their  sick  ;  spoke  to 
them,  and  gave  them  the  medicine  which  I 
judged  proper  for  them.  Some  became  deaf; 
to  these  I  was  obliged  to  cry  every  thing 
aloud  :  others  became  delirious  ;  with  these  I 
was  forced  to  watch  for  lucid  intervals  :  all 
had  a  most  dreadfully  offensive  breath.  Five 
or  six  weeks  passed  before  the  disorder  sensibly 
diminished  :  it  was,  in  truth,  in  many  re- 
spects, a  hard  time  for  a  feeling  heart30. 

One  morning,  after  I  had  returned  home 
from  paying  my  first  visits  to  the  sick,  to  take 
a  little  breakfast,  my  Greenlander  suddenly 
entered  the  door,  and  stood  still.     I  asked  him 

(30)  At  this  time,  I  always  chewed  a  piece  of  Angelica  root, 
as  au  antidote. 


m 

to  sit  down :  he  did  so ;  but  was  still  silent, 
and  cast  his  eyes  on  the  ground.  At  last,  I 
broke  the  silence ;  and  inquired  his  business. 
"  I  wish  much  to  speak  to  you,  Priest,"  said 
he  ;  "  but  I  am  unworthy,  and  I  suppose  you 
will  not  help  me."— "'Certainly  I  will  help 
you,"  answered  I,  "  if  I  can:  have  yoti'an^ 
one  sick '?" — "  My  only  son,"  replied  he,  "  is 
very  ill."— "  I  spoke  to  him  but  yesterday," 
said  I,  "and,  when  I  asked  him  after  his 
health,  he  told  me  he  was  well  and  hearty."— 
"  Yesterday  evening,"  continued  he,  "  he  be- 
came ill,  very  ill."  This  youth,  seventeen  or 
eighteen  years  of  age,  was  well-informed  ; 
read  and  wrote  well ;  promised  to  become  an 
active  fisherman ;  and  was  his  father's  orily 
earthly  hope.  While  I  was  making  myself 
ready  to  accompany  him,  I  said  to  him,  "  But 
tell  me  now,  Was  it  Teally  your  intention  to 
kill  me,  or  did  you  merely  mean  to  frighten 
me  ?" — "  It  was  my  intention  to  kill  you," 
answered  he :  "  if  you  had  not  »o  suddenly 
turned  round,  and  thrown  me  on  the  ground, 
my  knife  would  certainly  have  put  an  end  to 
your  life.  I  was  malicious;  I  was  mad. 
Can  you  forgive  me  ?  Will  you  help  me  ?"-^ 
"  I  have  forgiven   you,"  I  answered :  "  our 


180 
great  Master  in  Heaven  forbids  us  to  revenge 
ourselves  on  those  who  injure  us  \  and  com- 
mands us  to  forgive  them,  as  he  forgave  his 
murderers.  Now  come !"  I  accompanied 
him  to  his  house  ;  I  fervently  prayed  to 
God  (why  should  I  conceal  it?)  that  the 
youth  might  live.  His  recovery,  thought  I, 
will  thoroughly  convince  the  father  of  my 
forgiveness  ;  and  religion  will  gain  by  it. 
I  afterwards  visited  him  every  day,  as  I  did 
my  other  patients  •,  but  he  died.  This  loss, 
this  great  affliction,  deeply  affected  the  father ; 
but,  at  the  same  time,  produced  a  change  in 
him  for  the  better.  A  few  days  after  the 
death  of  his  son,  he  came  to  me  again  :  "I 
am  greatly  afflicted,  Priest  !"  said  he  ;  "  have 
you  consolation  for  me  ?"  This  confidence, 
especially  from  him,  gave  me  infinite  plea- 
sure, and  I  made  use  of  it.  From  that  time, 
he  not  only  came  to  divine  service  on  the 
Sunday,  but  also  to  daily  prayers,  and  to  the 
teaching  of  the  catechism.  Every  week  he 
visited  me  once  or  twice  ;  and  almost  every 
time  one  of  his  questions  was,  "  Priest,  have 
you  forgiven  me  ?"  I  gained  him  entirely  ; 
and  he  also  gave  me  one  proof  more  of  the 
truth  which  I  so  willingly  cherish, — that,  by 


181 
reasonable  and  Christian  kindness,  we  can 
effect  much  more,  with  most  men,  than  by 
severity.  Should  I  have  gained  this  man  (I 
trust,  with  confidence,  that  I  gained  him  for 
heaven),  if,  by  the  help  of  others,  I  had  had 
him  bound  to  a  stake,  and  chastised  ? 


Chap.  XL 

The  Child  Saved. 


Among  the  heathens,  when  a  mother,  who 
has  a  child  at  the  breast,  dies,  and  there  is  no 
other  mother  near  who  can  suckle  it,  the  child 
is  generally  buried  alive  with  its  deceased 
mother.  Thus  I  once  learned,  that  the  hea- 
thens, half  a  mile  to  the  north  of  me,  had  laid 
a  child,  about  a  quarter  of  a  year  old,  with 
its  mother  in  the  grave,  but,  from  a  certain 
degree  of  feeling,  had  not  wholly  stifled  it  by 
the  stones  which  they  had  laid  upon  the  grave. 
They  heard  it  faintly  moan,  and  so  it  lived 
for  about  a  day.  This  account,  the  first  in  its 
kind  since  I  had  come  to  Greenland,  greatly 
affected  me.     Some  days  afterwards,  I  went 


182 

to  these  people,  to  reprove  them  for  the  wrong 
they  had  done.  They  did  not  deny  the  deed, 
but  would  not  have  it  looked  upon  as  crufelty. 
"What  shall  we  do,  Priest?"  said  they: 
"  you  know  that  we  love  our  children  ;  but  if 
the  mother  of  the  poor  little  things  die  while 
they  are  at  the  breast,  and  no  other  woman  is 
near,  who  can  take  care  of  them,  they  must 
either  die  of  hunger,  or  cry  themselves  to 
death  :  is  it,  then,  not  better  that  we,  out  of 
compassion,  give  them  a  quicker  death  ?"  In 
fact,  they  have  no  means  to  support  such 
innocent  little  creatures  but  the  breast ;  no 
milk,  no  light  food.  I  could  of  course  not 
approve  of  their  cruel  compassion,  but  told 
them,  that,  if  such  a  case  should  often  happen, 
they  should  inform  me  of  it ;  I  would  then 
fetch  the  orphan  child,  and  have  it  brought  up. 
About  a  year  after  this,  one  of  these  Green- 
landers  came  to  me  in  a  hurry.  "  Priest," 
said  he,  "  we  have  not  forgotten  your  words  ; 
M.  N.  's  wife  bore  a  boy  to-day,  and  died.  All 
the  others  are  absent,  as  you  know  ;  and  there 
is  no  one  to  suckle  him.  Will  you  take  him  ? 
if  not,  we  bury  him  with  his  mother."  I 
thanked  him  that  he  had  remembered  my 
words,  gave  him  a  little  present,   and  im- 


183 


mediately   sent    my  women's  boat  to  fetch 
the  boy,    whom  they  brought  me  well  and 
hungry.     My  wife  put  him  to  the  breast  •,  he 
satisfied  his  first  hunger,  and  fell  asleep.  Mean- 
while,  I  persuaded   a  Greenland  woman,  for 
payment,  to  give  him  the  necessary  attention, 
for  our  own  son  was  not  yet  a  quarter  of  a  year 
old  ;   but  he  received  from  my  wife  his  daily 
nourishment.     He  grew  and  throve  by  it,  and 
began  to  take  notice.     His  smiles  were  her 
reward.     I  baptized  him  the  following  Sun- 
day, and  called  him  after  a   brother  of  my 
wife's,  to  make  him  dearer  to  her.     The  day 
before,  the  father  came  to  me,  and  asked  me 
whether  1  would  baptize  his  child.     On  my 
answering   in  the  affirmative,  he  asked  per- 
mission to  be  present.     He  obtained  it,  under 
the  condition  that  he  would  be  quiet.     He 
came.     Every  thing  which  he  saw  and  heard 
during  divine  service,  was  new  and  surprising 
to  him  ;  but  he  was  all  ear.     During  the  bap- 
tismal ceremony,  a  tear  started  into  his  eyes ; 
— why  ?  he  did  not  know  himself.  When  divine 
service  was  over,  I  said  to  him,   "  Now,  your 
son  is  my  son ;  nay,  more  than  mine  :   he  now 
belongs  to  the  great   Lord  in  heaven,  who 
will  make  him  unspeakably  happy." — "  Yes," 


184 

answered  he  $  "  you  have  behaved  to  him  like 
a  father,  and  your  wife  is  like  a  real  mother  ; 
but  now  I  will  live  with  you,  and  be  obedi- 
ent, and  become  a  believer ;  I  may  then 
see  him  sometimes  ?" — "  Yes,"  answered  I, 
"  daily,  if  you  like."  He,  in  fact,  came  soon 
afterwards,  with  his  whole  family,  often  saw 
his  son,  and  was  baptized  the  following"  year. 

After  the  custom  of  the  country,  the  boy 
was  now  our  son,  and,  as  such,  he  became  daily 
dearer  to  us.  I  often  fancied  him  as  the  well 
educated  youth,  as  the  enlightened,  upright 
man,  as  a  useful  teacher  among  his  country- 
men; but  a  prevailing  and  mortal  epidemic 
tore  him  from  us  at  the  age  of  a  year  and  a 
quarter.  We  lost  him ;  but  he  attained  a  bet- 
ter life. 


Chap.  XII. 

Witchcraft. 


One  Sunday  afternoon,  I  visited  a  sick 
woman,  whose  indisposition,  which  was  only 
a  cold,  was  soon  removed  by  a  perspiring 
draught :  but  while  she  was  in  her  perspira- 
tion, her  brother,  who  was  a  conjurer,  unhap- 
pily came  to  visit  her.  He  saw  her  perspire, 
and  asked,  "  How  ?  what  is  that  ?"  She  said 
she  was  sick,  but  that  the  Priest  had  given  her 
something"  to  make  her  perspire,  after  which 
she  would  be  well.  "  No,"  said  he,  myste- 
riously, M  that  is  not  the  case  -,  you  are  still 
sick  :  a  wicked  witch  has  brought  it  on  you." 
The  persons  present  were  attentive,  and  looked 
at  each  other  embarrassed.  "  I  will  soon  disco- 
ver her,"  said  he;  and  what  was  unusual  among 
the  baptiied  Greenlanders,  the  husband  allow- 
ed him  to  shew  his  art.  He  did  it  with  the 
usual  formalities,  and  the  result  was,  that  an 
elderly  woman  in  the  place,  against  whom  he, 
perhaps,  had  a  spite,  was,  as  he  pretended, 
the  person  who  had  bewitched  her.     "  Under 

b  b 


186 
the  bench,"  cried  he,  "I  see  her  spirit,  which 
tries  to  seize  you." — "Fire!  fire!"  cried  he 
to  the  husband  and  the  others  :  "  drive  her 
away  !  kill  her."  Immediately  they  seized 
their  guns,  and  fired  several  times  at  the  wick- 
ed spirit.  At  the  same  time,  they  howled  and 
cried  aloud. 

I  wondered,  indeed,  at  hearing  musket  shot 
at  this  time,  but  could  form  no  conjecture  of 
the  cause.  A  Greenlander  now  put  his  head 
into  the  door  of  the  room,  and  cried,  "  Priest ! 
Priest !  come  up  to  the  houses  !  they  are 
mad."  I  hastened  after  him  to  learn  something 
more  before  I  got  there  ;  and  he  told  me  what 
I  have  just  related,  and  also  that  the  woman 
who  was  accused  of  being  a  witch,  was  al- 
most dead  with  terror.  My  way  led  me  past 
her  door  ;  I  went  in,  and  found  her  in  a  state 
like  that  of  a  person  who,  trembling,  awaits  her 
death.  "  Be  of  good  cheer,"  said  I ;  "  they 
shall  do  you  no  harm.  God  in  heaven  protects 
the  innocent."  I  spoke  these  words  with 
confidence,  though  1  did  not  know  how  the 
people  would  receive  me  in  their  present  tem- 
per, and  what  effect  my  address  to  them  might 
produce.  I  entered  the  house,  which  was  full 
of  the  smoke  of  gunpowder;    and  the    guns 


187 
which  had  been  discharged,  still  lay  there. 
All  were  much  confused  when  they  saw  me, 
particularly  the  master  of  the  house.  I  was 
serious,  but  not  angry.  "  Sit  down,  Priest," 
said  he,  at  last,  and  laid  the  bear  skin  in  order. 
I  sat  down,  and  shoved  aside  the  fire-arms  that 
lay  near  me.  "  What  do  they  here  ?"  said  I. 
"  Whence  this  smell  ?  What  is  the  cause  of  so 
many  shot  ?"  many  questions  at  once,  in- 
deed, but  all  leading  to  the  same  point.  The 
man  was  silent.  "  Are  you  still  sick  ?"  said  I 
to  the  wife :  she,  too,  was  silent.  "  You  are  no 
longer  sick,"  said  I,  firmly  :  "  you  only  pre- 
tend to  be  so.  I  know  all  that  has  passed  here. 
You,"  said  I  to  the  husband,  "  have  had  con- 
juring tricks  performed  over  your  wife:  the 
conjurer  has  accused  Paul's  wife  of  being  a 
witch  ;  you  have  fired  at  her  spirit,  and  de- 
signed to  kill  her :  you  are  wicked  men." — 
"  How  do  you  know  that  ?"  said  he,  abruptly. 
"  I  know  it,"  I  replied  ;  "  and  now  I  tell 
you,  if  ever  you  suffer  any  conjuring  in 
your  house  again,  you  cannot  be  a  be- 
liever, and  not  live  among  them.  Another 
time  I  will  convince  you  that  you  have  acted 
wrong,  for  now  you  are  not  in  a  condition 
to  regard  my  words  5  but,  if  you  kill  Paul's 


188 
-wife,  or  suffer  her  to  be  killed,  you  shall 
be  severely  punished  :  she  is  innocent  $  I  take 
her  under  my  protection.' ' — -"  I  will  not  kill 
her,"  said  he,  with  a  suppressed  voice,  but 
was  in  violent  agitation.  "  Where  is  the  con- 
jurer," asked  I,  "  who  dare  to  perform  his 
tricks  here,  and  to  corrupt  my  believers  ?" 
I  looked  around,  and  perceived  him  lying  un- 
der a  large  skin.  I  arose,  threw  the  skin  off 
him,  and  seized  him  firmly  by  one  shoulder. 
He  sat  down.  "  You  are  an  impostor,"  said 
I,  "  and  can  do  only  evil  ;  you  do  not  cure 
your  sister  ;  I  have  cured  her  :  to-morrow  you 
shall  come  tome."  He  did  not  answer.  At 
last  I  went  away  ;  and,  on  my  return,  called 
on  the  poor  woman,  who  was  still  suspended 
between  fear  and  hope.  "  No  one  shall  lay 
hand  On  you,"  said  I  :  "  trust  in  God,  and  be 
comforted  !"-— "  Thank  you,  Priest !"  answer- 
ed she  •,  "  my  soul  now  begins  to  live  again." 
The  conjurer  came  to  me  the  next  day,  as  I 
had  desired  ;  but,  out  of  fear>  he  had  prevailed 
on  his  baptized  brother,  who  had  not  been 
present  at  the  cbnjuration,  the  preceding  even- 
ing, to  come  along1  with  him.  The  brother 
came  in  first,  and  said^  "My  brother  is  with* 
out  j  but  he  is  afraid."—"  He  is  afraid,"  said 


189 

I,  a  because  he  has  done  evil  :  he  who  does 
good  is  not  afraid.' '  I  called  him  in  ;  and  he 
came  very  humbly.  "  I  should  have  good 
reason  to  punish  you,"  said  I  ;  "  but,  as  you 
do  not  know  yourself  what  evil  you  might  do 
among  my  believers  by  your  conjurations,  I 
will  spare  you;  but  on  condition  that  you 
never  come  here  again."—**  I  will  never  come 
again,"  answered  he  ;  and,  as  long  as  I  was  in 
the  country,  he  kept  his  word.  i{  One  thing 
more,"  added  1 :  "  should  any  one  venture  to 
kill  Paul's  wife,  you  shall  be  considered  as  the 
perpetrator  ;  and  I  shall  find  you,  wherever 
you  may  be." — "  She  shall  not  die,"  he  re- 
plied. "  Well,  then,  return  home ;  and  do 
not  forget  what  you  have  promised  me." 


190 

Chap.  XIII. 

The  Whale  found. 


The  Greenlanders  are  extremely  rejoiced 
when  they  have  taken  a  whale,  and  they  have 
reason  to  be  so,  as  it  affords  them  great  ad- 
vantages. The  men  put  on  their  water-proof 
coats,  and  the  women  adorn  themselves :  the 
latter  tow  the  animal  to  the  shore,  singing" ; 
while  the  former,  like  ravens,  sit  upon  it,  and 
rip  off  the  skin. 

They  always  sent  a  Kajak  to  inform  me  of 
such  a  prize  ;  and,  at  the  same  time,  invited 
me  and  my  wife  to  see  it.  When  we  arrived, 
they  received  us  with  songs.  "  There  comes 
our  good  Priest,"  said  they,  "  and  his  good 
wife  :  they  will  see  our  whale,  and  rejoice  with 
us.  Come  and  see !"  When  we  returned 
home,  they  sang  again  :  sometimes  we  accom- 
panied them  on  shore,  at  least  as  near  to  the 
land  as  the  animal  could  swim.  The  women 
rowed  home,  with  joyful  songs ;  and  the  men 
proceeded  seriously  to  their  profitable  work. 

They  had  once   pierced  a  whale,  pursued 


191 
him,  and  cut  him  in  some  places,  yet  he 
escaped  ;  though  they  had  so  wounded  him 
that  he  afterwards  died.  He  was  found,  in 
the  winter,  about  a  mile  from  the  colony.  I 
was,  as  usual,  invited  to  see  this  prize  •,  and, 
as  I  had  just  to  make  a  journey  to  the  south, 
on  business,  I  accepted  this  invitation,  and 
stayed  with  them  several  hours.  Though  the 
frost  was  very  severe,  and  the  ice  thick,  there 
was  yet  open  water  round  the  dead  animal, 
and  the  Greenlanders  were  hard  at  work.  Some 
cut  off  whalebone,  under  the  water;  others 
blubber.  The  dogfish  regaled  themselves,  and 
bit  out  large  pieces  of  fat  with  their  sharp 
teeth  ;  only,  when  they  came  too  near  the 
Greenlanders,  the  latter  pushed  them  away. 
They  helped  me  to  draw  one  of  them  upon 
the  ice,  and  cut  him  open :  the  stomach  was  full 
of  pieces  of  whale  fat ;  and  the  flesh  moved 
long  after  it  was  dead.  The  Greenlanders 
value  this  animal  but  little,  as  its  flesh  is  not 
to  their  taste,  and  has  no  blubber  ;  only  the 
liver  contains  the  very  finest  train  oil :  they 
throw  it  into  a  cask,  and  it  dissolves  entirely 
into  oil  ;  but  the  Greenlanders  do  not  think 
it  worth  their  while  to  catch  it  for  this  reason. 
I  jumped  upon  the  dead  whale,   and  walked 


192 
some  steps  up  and  down  on  a  piece  of  spungy 
flesh  :  they  told  me  that  it  was  the  tongue.  I 
examined  it  more  closely,  and  thought  how 
suitable  it  was  to  the  great  jaws  and  the  im- 
mense body.  It  is  generally  known  that  the 
swallow  of  this  animal  is  no  larger  than  a  great 
tea  cup,  that  it  has  no  teeth31,  and  that  it  lives 
and  fattens  on  small  insects  that  are  found  in 
these  waters.  I  took  leave  of  my  Greenland- 
ers,  and  continued  my  journey. 

On  these  occasions,  their  joy  makes  the 
Greenlanders  very  careless.  With  long  knives, 
like  sword  blades,  they  dive  under  the  water 
to  cut  off  the  whalebone :  often  one  stands 
on  the  shoulder  of  the  other  to  keep  him 
under  the  water,  as  his  water-proof  cloak  would 
otherwise  cause  him  to  rise.  When  he  who  is 
under  the  water  can  no  longer  hold  his  breath, 
he  makes  a  motion  with  his  body,  and  the  man 
who  stands  upon  his  shoulders  leaps  off.  He 
now  thrusts  his  knife  upwards,  and  rises  with 
a  loud  roar,  which  is  caused  by  the  air  be- 
ing so  long  compressed.  It  was  upon  such 
an  occasion  that  a  misfortune  happened,  which 
was  great  enough  in  itself,  but  which  might 

(31)  There  i»  a  smaller  kind  of  whale  with  teeth. 


193 
have  had  still  more  melancholy  consequences. 
A  Greenlander,  who  had  been  under  the  water, 
thrust  his  knife  upwards,  perhaps  with  more 
carelessness  than  usual,  and  run  it  into  the 
body  of  another,  who  was  rather  higher,  cut- 
ting" off  the  kin.  The  deceased  was  the  most 
respectable  of  my  baptized  Greenlanders,  and 
his  death  would  certainly  have  been  revenged, 
if  the  circumstance  had  happened  among  the 
heathens.  To  testify  his  regret,  the  perpetra- 
tor took  him  on  his  lap,  as  they  rowed  home, 
and  the  next  day  gave  to  the  foster-son 
of  the  deceased  a  new  rifle  gun,  by  way  of 
atonement  for  the  grief  which  he  had  caused 
him  by  his  unhappy  imprudence.  Among 
others,  there  came  some  heathen  friends,  to 
condole  with  the  widow.  These  dropt  some 
hints  that  the  murder  ought  to  be  revenged ; 
but  the  widow  answered,  "  That  will  not 
bring  my  husband  back  again  :  the  murder 
was  not  done  on  purpose,  and  I  am  a  be- 
liever." 

The  moment  I  was  informed  of  this  unhap- 
py event,  I  hastened  home,  in  order  to  prevent 
any  farther  misfortune,  if  there  should  be  rea- 
son to  fear  it.  I  went  immediately  to  the  af- 
flicted widow,  who  related  to  me,  with  tears, 

c  c 


194 
the  virtues  of  her  husband,  and  his  affection 
for  her32.  She  promised  me  that  she,  being  a 
Christian,  would  never  allow  any  harm  to  be 
done  to  the  perpetrator.  He  lived,  however, 
in  constant  fear  of  death,  became  inactive, 
and  was  nowhere  at  ease  •,  nay,  he  even  beg- 
ged me  to  send  him  to  our  country,  where 
alone  he  would  be  in  safety.  I  was  often 
obliged  to  assure  him  that  he  should  not  be 
afraid  for  his  life,  as  the  act  was  involuntary, 
and  the  widow  had  pardoned  him  ;  but,  as  he 
was  the  same  man,  who  had  allowed  his  hea- 
then brother-in-law  to  perform  a  conjuration 
over  his  sick  wife,  as  I  have  mentioned  above, 
I  represented  to  him,  at  the  same  time,  that 
this  uneasiness  and  anxiety,  perhaps,  came 
upon  him  as  an  atonement  for  the  distress 
which  he  had  caused  the  innocent  woman,  who 
was  accused  as  a  witch.  "  Now,"  I  said,  "  he 
might  feel  himself  what  it  was  to  fear  every 
moment  a  violent  death." — "  I  did  wrong," 
said  he ;  "  and  now  I  am  afraid." — "  Yes," 
said  I  ;  "  she  too  was  afraid,  but  you  did  not 
regard  it.    God  preserved  her,  as  she  was  in- 

(32)  As  a  husband,  the  deceased  was  the  more  worthy  of 
praise,  because  he  continued  to  love  his  wife,  though  she  was 
barren. 


195 
nocent ;  he  will  also  preserve  you,  as  your 
action  was  not  voluntary,  and  you,  besides, 
so  sincerely  repent  it."  In  this  manner,  I, 
by  degrees,  made  him  easy  j  but  a  certain 
melancholy  hung"  upon  him  ever  after.  His 
former  activity  returned,  but  he  was  more  fre- 
quent and  more  serious  in  his  attendance  on 
divine  service.  In  short,  this  misfortune  made 
a  better  man  of  him  ;  for  though  not  vicious, 
he  was  before  the  most  indifferent  among  my 
baptized  Greenlanders. 


Chap.  XIV. 

Some  cliaracteristic  Features. 


Liberty  and  equality  are  the  property  of 
the  Greenlanders.  No  one  assumes  any  kind 
of  authority  over  others.  Every  one  is  inde- 
pendent, and  can  do  what  he  thinks  fit.  Re- 
spect is,  however,  shewn  to  the  meritorious, 
that  is,  to  the  active  and  successful  fisherman. 
His  word  has  always  a  certain  weight  in  their 
conferences,  and  they  frequently  pay  him  a 
kind  of  voluntary  obedience,  though  without 


19G 
any  farther  consequences  either  to  him  or 
themselves.  Their  good  disposition,  and  their 
natural  modesty,  prevent  this  liberty  from 
exceeding  the  bounds  of  propriety.  With- 
out magistrates,  without  laws,  they  live  in 
peace  and  harmony  :  you  never  hear  a  dispute 
about  property,  never  a  reproach  made  to 
him  who  has  unawares  done  another  an  in- 
jury :  the  first  accuses  himself;  the  latter 
makes  him  easy,  and  says,  "  it  is  of  no  con- 
sequence." 

The  women  attend  to  the  household  con- 
cerns, do  their  needlework,  and  chat  famili- 
arly together  during  the  day,  when  the  men 
are  from  home  fishing ;  and  when  the  latter 
come  home,  they  relate  to  each  other,  as 
good  friends,  their  success  and  accidents  in 
their  fishery.  They  eat  what  the  fortune  of 
the  day  has  procured,  or  what  the  house  af- 
fords ;  and  are  satisfied,  even  if  their  hunger  is 
hardly  allayed. 

The  inhabitants  of  one  place  live  in  mutual 
friendship,  and  share  their  goods  with  each 
other.  If,  for  example,  a  white  fish33  is  taken, 
they  prepare  an  entertainment.  It  is  speedily  cut 

(33)  The  flesh  of  the  white  fish  looks  like  beef ;  it  yields-  a 
barrel  of  blubber,  or  more,  according  to  its  size. 


197 
up,  and  put  in  the  kettles.  They  invite  their 
neighbours  to  dinner,  and  the  house  is  im- 
mediately full  of  guests :  they  eat,  converse, 
and  are  merry.  If  two,  three,  or  more,  of 
these  animals  are  caught  on  the  same  day, 
company  must  be  invited  to  all,  and  they 
must  be  all  eaten  up.  I  was  present  one  even- 
ing at  the  fourth  entertainment,  and  won- 
dered at  the  appetite  with  which  they  de- 
voured this  repast.  "  But,"  said  I,  "  how 
can  you  eat  so  much  at  once  ?  and  you  eat  as 
if  you  were  still  hungry  !" — "  We  can  eat  a 
great  deal,  and  we  can  fast,  as  it  happens," 
was  the  answer.  "  Feel,  Priest,"  said  a  man, 
pointing  to  his  belly,  "  it  is  now  like  a  stretch- 
ed drum3*-,  but  soon,  perhaps,  it  may  be  as 
lank  as  an  empty  bladder."  He  meant  that 
in  a  short  time  he  might  be  unfortunate  in  the 
chase.  At  such  entertainments,  and  whenever 
they  are  very  successful  in  fishing,  they  never 
neglect  to  send   their  portion  to  the  widows 

(34)  The  only  national  musical  instrument  of  the  Green* 
landers  is  the  drum,  which  consists  of  a  wooden  hoop  a  finger 
broad,  and  has  a  thin  skin  drawn  over  only  one  side  of  it.  It 
is  about  an  ell  in  diameter,  and  has  a  handle.  The  Green- 
lander  strikes  it  with  a  stick,  on  the  lower  edge.  It  formerly 
played  a  conspicuous  part  in  the  mummeries  of  the  Angekoks. 
Fries. 


198 
and  orphans,  even  before  they  themselves  eat. 
"  The  poor,"  say  they,  "have  no  husband,  no 
father,  no  one  to  rejoice  them  with  their  suc- 
cess in  fishing." 

They  are  hospitable  to  strangers,  according 
to  the  manner  of  the  country.  The  visitor 
remains  on  the  outside  till  he  is  invited  to 
enter.  When  he  enters,  the  master  of  the 
house  shews  him  a  seat,  and  understands, 
on  this  occasion,  how  to  treat  him  with  due 
respect.  The  wife  asks  for  his  clothes,  to 
dry  them,  and  then  gives  him  refreshment ; 
but  he  does  not  eat  immediately  at  the  first 
invitation,  that  he  may  not  appear  hungry. 
During  and  after  the  repast,  they  chat  till  it 
is  time  to  go  to  sleep.  The  inhabitants  of 
the  house  lay  themselves  down,  one  after 
the  other ;  and  the  stranger  (so  decorum  re- 
quires) last.  The  Europeans,  however,  do  not 
observe  this  rule  of  politeness,  and  the  natives 
excuse  them  from  it. 

When  on  my  journies  to  the  south,  I  was 
obliged  to  take  up  my  night's  lodging  among 
the  heathens  :  I  saw  them  all  assembled  on  the 
beach  at  my  arrival.  Every  master  of  a  fa- 
mily invited  me ;  and  he,  whose  invitation  was 
accepted,  considered  it  as  an  honour.    Soon  he 


199 
shewed  me  a  seat,  which  was  covered  with  a 
piece  of  clean  bear's  skin ;  and  the  wife  took 
my  pelisse.  In  a  short  time,  I  was  visited  by 
almost  all  the  men  of  the  place,  whom  I  en- 
tertained with  accounts  of  my  country,  of  na- 
vigation, of  agriculture,  of  the  growth  and 
preparation  of  corn,  &c.  When  I  took  out  my 
little  box  with  provisions,  the  host  or  hostess 
used  to  say,  "  It  is  a  pity,  Priest,  that  you 
do  not  eat  our  food  ;  you  are  in  other  respects 
like  one  of  us.'*  After  a  time,  I  dismissed  my 
visitors,  by  saying  I  was  sleepy.  The  host 
then  gave  me  his  own  sleeping  place,  next  to 
his  wife35,  who  took  all  possible  care  of  me, 
and,  repeatedly,  asked  if  I  was  comfortable. 
I,  indeed,  answered  in  the  affirmative ;  but, 
without  being  insensible  to  the  honour  shewn 
me,  I  found  the  bed  hard,  my  sleep  short,  and 
my  ribs  sore,  though  I  used  them  all  alike. 
My  provision-box  was  the  pillow,  my  short 
pelisse  the  quilt  •,  the  boards  of  the  bench,  co- 
vered with  seals'  skins,  the  bed :  but  I  accus- 
tomed myself  to  this  ;  as  one  gets  accustomed 
to  every  thing,  and,  at  last,  slept  very  well 
on  such  a  bed.   The  reader  must  not,  however, 

(35)  Ad  honour,  which,  in  my  time,  was  not  shewn  to  any 
servant  of  the  company. 


200 
think  that  the  man  so  entirely  trusts  his  wife 
to  others  :  no,  he  merely  resigned  to  me  his 
place  as  husband,  as  the  most  honourable,  and 
laid  himself  down  on  the  other  side  of  her, 
where  the  children  usually  sleep.  When  I 
took  leave,  I  always  gave  them  a  little  present 
of  bread  and  tobacco  ;  and  they  were  so  well 
satisfied  with  it,  that  they  invited  me  to  visit 
them  on  my  return. 

They  abhor  theft,  particularly  among"  each 
other  ;  they,  therefore,  do  not  shut  up  their 
things,  but  put  them  carelessly  and  openly, 
not  only  every  where  about  the  house,  but  even 
on  the  flat  roof  of  the  house  ;  and  no  stranger 
ventures  to  touch  them,  or  take  any  part 
away.  Formerly,  they  were  not  so  scrupu- 
lous, when  they  could  find  an  opportunity  to 
pilfer  any  thing  from  a  Dane  ;  but  this  is  no 
longer  the  case,  unless  it  be  done  by  a  heathen 
from  some  distant  part,  and  even  that  is  now 
rare. 

As  they  are  well  made,  fleshy,  and  full  of 
blood,  the  sexual  passion  developes  itself  early ; 
and  the  young  men,  therefore,  look  out  for 
a  wife  as  soon  as  they  are  able  to  maintain  one, 
but  not  before.  Youthful  excesses  are,  how- 
ever, disapproved  among  them,  and  are  very 


201 
seldom  heard  of.  In  the  whole  time  of  my 
residence  in  the  country,  only  one  girl  had 
become  pregnant  by  her  lover  before  mar- 
riage ;  but  she  had  to  pay  dear  enough  for  her 
imprudence.  But,  properly,  this  temperance 
is  found  only  between  the  natives  of  both 
sexes :  towards  the  Danes,  on  the  contrary, 
the  girls  are  even  forward  :  they  love  to  dress 
and  shew  themselves  ;  and  even  interpret  a 
smile  to  their  advantage.  That  they  do  not 
understand  each  other's  language,  is  no  great 
obstacle  to  them  ;  for,  if  a  Dane  has  learnt 
the  words  (which  are,  generally,  the  first  that 
he  learns  after  his  arrival)  "  I  love  you  ;"  and 
if  he,  at  the  same  time,  lays  his  hand  on  his 
heart,  the  girl  feels  herself  flattered,  and  happy 
in  his  love36.  Vanity,  by  which  so  many  have 
fallen,  has,  doubtless,  more  share  than  inclina- 
tion in  this  preference  given  to  the  Danes  ;  for 
a  girl  who  marries  a  sailor  can  lead  a  more 
easy  life,  live  better,  dress  better,  be  more  re- 
spected, keep  maid  servants,  and  eat  at  plea- 
sure, sometimes  Danish,  sometimes  Greenland 
food.     How  seducing  is  all  this,  even  when  no 

(36)  At  first,  most  of  the  sailors  do  not  find  the  girls  of 
the  country  to  their  taste;  but  the  daily  sight,  want  of  Danish 
girls,  and  leisure,  soon  make  them  appear  tolerable. 

D    d 


202 
personal  preference  is  given  !  Neither  the 
heathens  nor  the  Christians  marry  their  rela- 
tions ;  not  even  in  a  remote  degree  :  they  con- 
sider it  as  improper,  and  carefully  avoid  it  ; 
nay,  they  think  with  so  much  delicacy  on  this 
subject,  that,  when  a  man  educates  a  charge 
child  among  his  own,  it  is  considered  as  their 
brother  or  sister  ;  and  I  am  not  acquainted 
with  a  single  instance,  of  children  thus  brought 
up  together  having  married  each  other. 

On  some  occasions,  the  Greenlanders  shew 
a  want  of  courage,  nay,  even  cowardice.  If 
they  are  sensibly  offended  or  ill  treated,  or 
when  they  want  to  kill  a  witch,  they  set  little 
value  upon  their  lives  ;  otherwise,  an  active 
Dane  can  make  many  of  them  run  away. 
Sometimes  they  make  up  for  this  cowardice 
by  cunning,  and  secretly  take  away  the  life 
of  their  enemy,  whom  they  are  afraid  to  attack 
openly.  If  the  murder  afterwards  becomes 
known,  it  is  looked  upon  by  every  body  with 
indifference  •,  only  the  nearest  relations  of  the 
deceased  revenge  it  in  time,  if  an  opportunity 
offers.  They  are  capable  of  bearing  fatigue 
and  inconvenience  without  regarding  them  ; 
and  they  shew  courage  and  presence  of  mind 
in  danger.      Without  desponding,  they   en- 


203 
deavour  to  preserve  their  lives  as  long  as  pos- 
sible ;  but  are,  at  the  same  time,  indifferent  to 
death,  when  it  cannot  be  avoided. 

The  merchant  at  Christianshaab  had  once 
taken  a  journey,  for  some  miles,  in  the  com- 
pany of  a  Greenlander.  While  they  were 
stopping-  at  the  place  they  had  gone  to,  a 
storm  arose  from  the  south-east37.  They, 
therefore,  hastily  set  out  to  return  home  ;  but, 
when  they  had  got  about  half  way,  the  ice  had 
broke,  and  drove,  in  large  flakes,  from  the 
coast  to  which  they  were  going.  They  drove 
backwards  and  forwards,  but  did  not  advance 
much.  The  flakes  of  ice  broke  more  and 
more  to  pieces ;  and  there  was  every  appear- 
ance that  they  would  be  obliged  to  abandon 
their  sledges,  and  try  to  save  their  lives,  as 
long  as  possible,  by  jumping  from  one  piece 

(37)  This  wind  brings  such  a  degree  of  warmth  with  it, 
that  the  snow  melts  in  the  middle  of  winter :  the  lower  rocks 
appear  black,  and  the -va Hies  green;  but  it  is  so  violent  and 
tempestuous,  that  people  who  are  in  the  open  air  must  throw 
themselves  upon  the  ground,  that  they  may  not  be  carried 
away,  or  thrown  down,  when  the  gusts  come.  The  thick 
strand  ice  breaks  into  larger  and  smaller  pieces ;  and  soon  the 
open  sea  appears,  where,  a  short  time  before,  there  was  firm 
footing  on  the  ice  for  many  miles.  All  this  is  the  work  of  a 
day ;  nay,  sometimes  of  only  a  few  hours. 


204 

to  another.       "  Merchant,' *   said  the  Green- 
lander,  quite  composed,  "  you  cannot  jump 
as  I  can  ;  and  it  does  not  appear  that  I  can 
help  you :  perhaps  I  may  save  my  life  ;  you 
hardly  will.     Hear!   you  have  a  pencil  and 
paper  in  your  book  ;  tear  a  piece  out  -,  and 
write  here,  upon  my  back   (he   stooped  down 
as  he    said   this),    that    you    were   drowned ; 
otherwise  your  people  might  believe,  when   I 
come  on  shore,  that  I  have  killed  you."     The 
merchant,  it  may  be  supposed,  had  no  mind  to 
do    this  ;    but  begged  the   Greenlander,   for 
God's  sake,  not  to  forsake  him.     "  I  will  not 
forsake  you,"  answered  the  Greenlander  ;  "  but 
you  may  be  drowned  in  taking  a  leap,  when 
I  can  be  saved  by  it.     However,   if  you  die, 
I  can    die  also  ;  and   then  nobody  can   find 
fault."      This  conversation   lasted  but  for  a 
few  minutes.     At  last,  after  much  labour  and 
danger,  both  saved  their  lives,   and  were  re- 
joiced ;  but  the   Merchant  could    not   forget 
the  coolness  with   which  the  Greenlander  had 
persuaded  him  to  write  that  he  was  drowned  ; 
and    the    other    joked    with    him    about  it: 
"  That  was  droll,"  said  he  ;    "  the  Merchant 
would    not    write !    You  were  afraid,  Mer- 
chant!" 


205 
The  Greenlanders  are  much  too  careless 
about  the  future ;  and,  therefore,  do  not  pro- 
perly prepare  for  the  possible  case,  that  their 
fishery  may  be  unsuccessful.  In  summer,  they, 
indeed,  provide  themselves  with  some  bags  of 
dried  herrings,  and  dried  seal's  flesh ;  but,  if 
their  fishery  is  unsuccessful  for  some  time,  and 
they  are  obliged  daily  to  take  from  this  little 
store,  it  is  soon  consumed,  and  they  are  threat- 
ened with  want.  In  severe  winters,  they  are 
frequently  obliged  to  suffer  hunger,  in  a  greater 
or  less  degree ;  but  still  they  do  not,  upon  the 
whole,  become  more  prudent.  They  always 
hope  for  future  success  ;  and,  in  the  literal 
sense  of  the  expression,  let  every  day  bear  its 
own  burthen. 


206 


Chap.  XV. 

The  severe  Winter. 


Every  winter,  in  Greenland,  is  severe ;  but 
they  are  not  all  equally  so .  The  Danes  have  ob- 
served, that,  if  the  winter  in  Denmark  has  been 
severe,  that  in  Greenland  was,  in  its  kind, 
more  mild,  and  vice  versd.  During  my  stay 
there,  one  winter  was  distinguished  by  its  se- 
verity. The  ice  lay,  for  many  months,  fast 
in  the  gulph,  for  ten  miles,  and  to  the  island 
Disco,  which  was  seldom  the  case.  The  seals 
retired  so  far,  that  the  Greenlanders,  with  all 
their  rowing",  and  with  the  greatest  activity, 
could  not  procure  the  necessary  food  for  them- 
selves and  families.  Their  winter  provisions 
were  soon  consumed  *,  want,  and,  soon  after, 
real  famine,  was  at  hand.  The  heathens,  half  a 
mile  to  the  north  of  my  place  of  abode,  were, 
like  the  other  Greenlanders,  obliged  to  slaugh- 
ter their  dogs,  though  they  are  as  indispen- 


207 
sable  to  them  as  horses  to  us ;  not  to  say  that 
they  never  eat  dog's  flesh.     When  these  were 
gone,  they  tore  the  old  hard  skins  from  the 
walls,  put  them  in  soak,  and  attempted  to  eat 
them.     This  they  could,  indeed,  do,  because 
the    Greenlanders  have    excellent  teeth  ;   but 
this  food  was  indigestible,    and   only   made 
them  weak.     Many  died  for  want.     I  could 
not  and  durst  not  see  this  want,  among  my 
baptized  Greenlanders  and  Catechumens,  with- 
out helping  them,  as  far  as  possible.     I  first 
distributed   my  stock    of    meat   and   bacon, 
which  I  bought  every  autumn  for  widows  who 
had  little  children  ;  and,  when  this  was  gone, 
I  had,  two  days  in  the  week,  some  groats  and 
peas  boiled  in  my  brewing  copper,  and   dis- 
tributed.     My  wife  filled   the  dishes  of  the 
hungry  ;  and,  at  the  same  time,  divided  some 
stockfish.      They  received  these  gifts  thank- 
fully, and  with  joy.     "  You    bad38  Danes," 
said  they  once,  u  have  provisions  so  far  from 
your  own  home,  and  even  for  us,  who  suffer 
want  in  our  own  country."     This  distribution 
continued  long,  and,  at  last,  brought  me  into 

(38)  Here,  a  well  meant  expression. 


208 
debt39 ;  but  I  had  also  the  pleasure,  that  my 
Greenlanders  had  strength  to  work  when  the 
fishery  began  ;  while,  on  the  contrary,  the 
heathens  were  so  weakened  or  sick,  that  they 
could  not,  for  a  long  time,  make  use  of  the 
fishery.  With  what  pleasure  would  I  have 
relieved  their  wants  also !  Several  received 
help,  for  a  moment ;  but  it  was  impossible 
to  relieve  them  all. 

(39)  In  the  beginning,  the  Ministers  were  obliged  to  distri- 
bute, in  such  cases,  every  thing  necessary,  for  the  account  of 
the  Missionary  College ;  but  this  liberality  had  long  ceased. 
To  receive  provisions  twice  a-week  is,  certainly,  not  enough 
for  support ;  but  we  here  see,  that  not  only  life,  but  also  a 
certain  degree  of  strength  to  work,  was  preserved.  Perhaps 
the  Danish  provisions  are  more  nourishing  for  these  people 
than  their  own. 


209 

Chap.  XVI. 

The  Mode  of  Instruction. 


The  opinion,  that  nations  who  live  in  a 
high  northern  latitude  are  more  indolent,  and 
more  dull  of  conception,  seems,  to  me,  not 
applicable  to  the  Greenlanders.  That  they 
are  ignorant  in  things  of  which  they  have 
never  heard,  cannot  be  brought  as  a  proof 
against  them,  if  it  can  be  shewn  that  they  are 
not  only  ingenious,  and  inventive  in  things 
which  relate  to  their  daily  life,  and  employ- 
ment, but  also  that  they  soon  understand  in- 
struction which  is  given  them.  They  have  a 
quick  comprehension,  a  retentive  memory,  and 
readily  imbibe  those  religious  truths  which 
may  be  understood,  if  they  are  clearly  ex- 
plained to  them.  In  proportion  as  they  im- 
prove, their  desire  of  learning  increases ;  and 
they  frequently  make  sacrifices  to  receive  in- 
struction for  a  whole  day.  Their  religion 
does  not  hinder  them  from  embracing  Christ- 
ianity.    They   pay    adoration   to   no   being, 

e  e 


210 
and  have  no  god  to  exchange ;  for  they  do 
not  much  regard  their  Torngarsuk,  and  do  not 
think  much  good  of  him.  It  cannot,  therefore, 
be  wondered  at,  that  they  like  to  hear  of 
an  almighty,  wise,  and  beneficent  Being,  who 
does  so  much  good  to  mankind  ;  that  they 
wish  to  learn  more  about  him,  and  promise  to 
obey  him.  It  is  very  seldom  that  one  who 
has  begun  to  take  instruction  goes  back  ;  but 
they  often  make  visible  improvement.  The 
children,  in  particular,  shew  the  greatest  in- 
clination to  go  to  school,  and  love  of  learning 
and  diligence  when  they  are  there.  They  are 
unacquainted  with  constraint,  as  we  shall  see 
in  the  sequel.  This  by  the  way  on  their  dis- 
position to  religious  instructions. 

The  heathens  like  to  hear  of  the  Supreme 
Being,  who  is  called  God ;  but  it  must  seem 
to  be  by  chance.  If  we  satisfy  their  curiosity, 
by  relating  to  them  something  concerning  our 
country,  we  may  generally  direct  their  thoughts 
upwards  ;  for  example,  by  saying  to  them, 
"  All  this  we  owe  to  a  mighty  and  good 
Being,  who  has  created  and  supports  every 
thing,"  &c.  Most  of  them  are  not  wholly 
ignorant ;  but,  to  make  them  desire  more  par- 
ticular  instruction,   they  generally,  but  not 


211 
always,  have  need  of  some  impulse  from  with- 
out.    Some  accept  invitations  from  their  bap- 
tired  relations ;  some  come  because  they  are 
embarrassed  to  find  a  lodging- ;  others,  again, 
out  of  grief  on  the  death  or  murder  of  a  friend  ; 
and  others,  in  fine,  because  they  are  accused  of 
witchcraft,  and  pursued  for  that  reason.     For 
such  reasons  many  came  to  me  to  be  instructed  ; 
and  they  related,  frankly,  the  motives  of  their 
desire.     Temporal  advantages,  most  certainly, 
do  not  entice  them  to  us.     When  baptized, 
they  enjoy  no  advantages  above  the  heathens  on 
that  account,  but  are  even  sometimes  slighted, 
under  the  pretence  that  they  are  dishonest  in 
their  payments,  and  not  to  be  trusted.     The 
true  reason  of  this  is,  because  they  are  thought 
to  be  rather  more  prudent,  and  not  so  willing 
to  fill  the  bottomless  blubber  tubs.     But  this 
by  the  bye.     I  will  here  give  a  short  account 
of  the  nature  and  manner  of  the  instruction, 
as  well  in  respect  to  the  grown-up  heathens  or 
Catechumens,  whom  their  age  and  their  occu- 
pations did  not  allow  to  learn  to  read,  as  to 
the  baptized  and  their  children. 

As  soon  as  we  had,  in  some  measure,  given 
the  former  an  idea  of  God,  of  his  properties, 
and  his  relation  to  the  world,  we  proceeded  to 


212 
instruct  them  out  of  the  books :  these  were,  in 
my  time,  Luther's  Catechism,  the  first  printed 
book  in  Greenland,  by  H.  Egede,  and  Pon- 
toppidan's  Explanation  :  every  sentence   was 
read  and  explained  to  them40.    Now  the  teach- 
er read  to  them  ;  the  Catechumens  listened  at- 
tentively,  and   repeated,    softly,    what    they 
heard  (because,  as  has  been  already  said,  they 
could  not  read   themselves)  ;  and,  after  some 
repetitions,  he  asked  sometimes  one,  sometimes 
another,  if  they  had  understood  him  ;  whether 
they  had  retained  any  thing-,  &c.  &c.     These 
readings  were  continued  every  day  ;  and  some 
progress  was  daily  made.     Every  thing  which 
had  been  learned  was  gone  through  again,  every 
week.     In  this  manner,  those  who  were  docile 
and  diligent  were  able,   between  Michaelmas 
and  Whitsuntide,  to  learn  by  heart,  and  un- 
derstand, the  abovementioned  books,  with  the 
exception  of  some  chapters,  which  were  ex- 
plained to  them  afterwards.     But  it  was  not 
the    understanding    only  that    gained  ;    the 
heart,  too,  was  (God  be  thanked  !)  often  moved. 
Of  this  we  were  particularly  convinced  on  the 

(40)  I  left  this  business,  in  the  first  years,  to  my  old  Cate- 
chist,  who  was  not  alone  a  well-informed  man,  but  also  spoke 
the  language  like  a  native. 


213 
day  when  the  Catechumens  were  baptized. 
With  proper  seriousness,  they  gave  an  account 
of  their  knowledge  in  Christianity  ;  with  pro- 
found feeling  and  holy  purposes,  most  of  them 
pronounced  their  vows,  and  received  baptism, 
kneeling.  The  baptism  of  the  Catechumens  is 
a  true  festival. 

But   those,  who  have  not  learned  to  read, 
must  soon  forget    the    instruction   they  have 
received,  if  it  is  not  continued.     For  this  rea- 
son,  as  long  as  the  winter  lasted,  there  were 
daily  prayers  in  one  of  the  largest  Greenland 
houses,  every  morning  and  evening.     Except 
on  Sunday,   when  divine  service  was  perform- 
ed,   they  were  called  every  morning  to  pray- 
ers, before  the  men  went  to  their  fishing.     As 
soon    as   they  were  assembled,    a  hymn   was 
sung,  and  the  Catechism  gone  through  ;    then 
a  morning  prayer  was  read,  and,  at  the  conclu- 
sion, some  verses.     The   whole  lasted  about 
an  hour.      The  old   people  were  questioned 
from  the  Catechism   as  well   as  the  young ; 
and  like  them  appeared  again  in  the  evening, 
at  the  catechization  and  prayers.    In  this  man- 
ner, they  not  only  did  not  forget  what  they  had 
learned,   but  made  great  improvement.     On 
Saturdays  and  Sundays,  instead  of  the  catechiza- 


214 
tion,  in  the  evening*,  one  or  two  chapters  of  the 
New  Testament  were  read.  Thus,  they  had  an 
opportunity  of  hearing1  the  sacred  books  them- 
selves, and  they  recollected  the  passages  which 
proved  the  truths  which  they  had  learned. 

When  they  had  learned  the  whole  explana- 
tion by  heart,  and  expressed  a  wish  to  par- 
take of  the  Lord's  Supper,  they  were  especial- 
ly instructed  in  the  intention  of  Jesus  in  found- 
ing the  Sacrament ;  and  then,  if  their  conduct 
was  good,  admitted  with  their  old  countrymen 
to  the  Lord's  table,  by  which  they  felt  them- 
selves still  more  bound  to  act  with  integrity. 
It  is  surprising  that  these  people,  who  have 
grown  up  as  heathens,  are  able,  when  baptized, 
to  lay  aside  almost  all  their  ancient  superstiti- 
ous opinions  ;  and  yet  this  is  really  the  case. 
But  if  any  should  be  deficient,  the  warn- 
ing of  the  Minister,  in  private,  is  generally 
sufficient  to  bring  them  back.  They  promise 
amendment,  and  it  is  seldom,  extremely  sel- 
dom, that  they  break  their  word. 

The  Greenland  children  are  desirous  of 
learning,  and  the  parents  encourage  them  in 
it ;  they  were  seen  to  carry  the  little  chil- 
dren to  school,  through  the  deep  snow,  and 
fetch  them  away.     From  nine  o'clock  in  the 


215 
morning",  till  two  in  the  afternoon,  I  was  em- 
ployed in  giving  instruction  every  day  except 
Saturday.     The  little  ones  soon  learnt  their 
letters,  and  endeavoured  to  advance  farther  ; 
the  bigger  ones  were  divided  into  classes,  ac- 
cording to  their  abilities  and  knowledge,  and 
all  learnt  by  heart,  after  they  got  home,  the 
lesson  which  had  been  explained  to  them.   By 
way  of  change,  the  latter  wrote  some  hours 
every  day,  and,  as  the  room  was  so  confined,  I 
was  forced  to  let  some  read  while  others  wrote, 
and  the  first  again  write  while  the  latter  read. 
At  the  ag"e  of  eleven,  at  the  most  of  twelve, 
and,  sometimes,  of  ten,  they  could  read  any 
printed  Greenland  book  readily  and  fluently, 
and  could  say  by  heart  the  Catechism,  a  part 
of  Pontoppidan's   Explanation,   &c.     As  the 
latter  was  not  printed,  I  wrote  a  copy  as  legi- 
bly as  I  could,  and  divided  it  into  slips,  which 
I  laid  before  the  children  to  copy,  when  they 
could  write  a  little,   and  read  writing  with 
ease.     Thus,  several  could  copy  the  book  at 
the  same  time,  and  which  I  afterwards  gave 
them,  stitched  together.     They  looked  upon  it 
with  delight,  as  a  testimony  of  their  improve- 
ment, and  preserved  it  as  a  sacred  treasure. 
As  they  often  wrote  letters  to  each  other,  nay 


216 

even  to  me,  they  acquired  more  facility  in 
writing" ;  and,  at  the  same  time,  were  accus- 
tomed to  think,  and  to  express  their  thoughts. 
Thus  all  of  them,  girls  as  well  as  boys,  learnt 
to  write,  while,  at  the  same  time,  besides 
reading  the  books  of  instruction,  they  made 
themselves  better  acquainted  with  the  New 
Testament,  particularly  the  Evangelists,  than 
they  were  in  their  younger  years,  when  they 
read  them  merely  to  learn  to  read.  In  their 
thirteenth  year,  or  when  they  were  thirteen 
years  old,  they  were  discharged  from  the 
school,  till  they  were  afterwards  to  be  in- 
structed for  the  purpose  of  being  confirmed. 
In  doing  this,  there  was  nothing  to  fear ; 
the  daily  examination  at  the  hour  of  prayer 
was  our  security,  that  they  would  never  forget 
what  they  had  learned. 

All  this  was  done  without  the  least  con- 
straint ;  but,  as  far  as  the  children  were  con- 
cerned, not  without  encouragement.  In  my 
school  journal,  I  noted  the  extremely  rare 
cases  of  neglect,  the  greater  or  less  degree  of 
diligence  and  good  behaviour,  and  divided 
among  them,  once  a  fortnight,  a  lispound 
(twenty  pounds)  of  hard  bread,  as  a  re- 
ward and  encouragement.     The  diligent  re- 


217 
ceived  a  loaf;  those  who  had  distinguished 
themselves  by  their  improvement  and  good  con- 
duct, two  loaves  ;  the  less  diligent  half  a  loaf; 
the  careless  and  idle  nothing  at  all.  If  the  re- 
ward was  encouraging  for  the  former,  the 
gentle  punishment  was  deeply  felt  by  the  lat- 
ter ;  and  it  was  seldom  that  I  had  occasion  to 
express  my  dissatisfaction  a  second  time. 

Among  these  children  of  nature,  old  as  well 
as  young,  I  first  learned  that  Man  is  more 
certainly  led  to  what  is  good  by  mildness 
than  by  severity  -,  that  rigour,  harshness,  and 
authoritative  language,  may  produce  obedi- 
ence ;  but  that  love  gains  the  heart  more  rea- 
dily to  yield  it.  In  the  long  period  in  which  I 
have  since  been  in  office  in  my  own  country, 
and  in  the  various  congregations  that  have  been 
intrusted  to  me,  I  have  experienced  the  same, 
though  (I  confess)  with  more  frequent  excepti- 
ons ;  but  may  not  these  more  frequent  excepti- 
ons be,  perhaps,  imputed  to  ourselves,  and  to 
our  mode  of  proceeding  ?  I,  for  my  part,  am 
fully  convinced,  that,  in  general,  Man,  when 
well  treated,  wishes  to  follow  the  good  road. 


F    f 


218 

Chap.  XVII. 

Some  Cures. 


The  baptized  Greenlanders  apply  to  the 
Minister  as  well  for  internal  as  external  dis- 
eases, and  we  are  the  more  bound  to  assist 
them,  as  we  forbid  them  to  apply  to  the  sor- 
cerers. But,  in  my  time,  most  of  us  came 
to  Greenland  very  ignorant  of  every  thing- 
relative  to  this  subject.  We  found  there  only 
a  few  books,  such  as  Richter's  Knowledge  of 
Man,  a  book  on  midwifery,  and  one  or  two 
books  of  prescriptions.  This  was  all.  But 
that  we  might  not  kill  the  poor  people  in- 
stead of  helping  them,  we  were  obliged  dili- 
gently to  study  Richter,  and  to  pay  strict 
attention  to  the  symptoms  of  their  disorders, 
and  the  remedies  prescribed  for  them.  God 
knows  that  this  part  of  my  office  cost  me 
much  trouble  and  frequent  uneasiness,  which 
was  increased  at  the  beginning  by  the  circum- 
stance that  I  did  not  understand  the  Greenland- 
ers, and  they  did  not  describe  their  sickness  in 
such  a  manner  that  I  could  with  confidence  pre- 


219 

scribe  for  them.  In  such  an  embarrassment, 
and  when  my  interpreter,  my  old  Catechist, 
was  not  present,  I  more  than  once  gave  them 
100  drops,  and  more,  of  strong-  tea  (nothing  but 
drops  would  do),  thinking  that,  if  they  did  not 
do  any  good,  they  would  at  least  not  kill  the 
patient.  I  cannot  help  smiling,  even  now, 
when  I  recollect,  that  a  Greenlander  one  day 
came  to  me  for  some  physic  for  his  sick  wife. 
He  made  all  manner  of  signs,  and  poinded  to 
his  belly.  I  concluded  that  he  wanted  it  for 
himself,  counted,  with  a  grave  air41,  100  drops 
of  tea,  mixed  them  with  water,  and  was  going 
to  give  him  the  dose  :  "  No,"  said  he,  "  it  is 
my  wife  ;"  and  went  away  with  his  drops. 
The  next  day  he  came  to  me,  and  said, 
"  Thank  you,  Priest !  it  did  good  :  sodfc&ll&r; 
she  had  drunk  it  she  was  better,  and  now^^ie  is 
quite  well,"  Thanks  to  their  good  constitu- 
tions, and  their  confidence  in  the  Minister  !  I 
could  mention  several  important  cures  that 
were  effected  at  a  later  period,  with  insignifi- 
cant, perhaps  in  some  degree  wrong,  remedies ; 
but  I  will  mention  only  two,  which  were  cer- 
tainly the  most  remarkable. 

(41)  Not  like  a  quack,  to  give  myself  importance,  but  not 
to  excite  suspicion  by  smiling  while  I  counted  the  drops. 


220 
One  of  the  sons  of  the  Catechist,  went  one 
day  with  a  companion  to  shoot  birds  on  the 
sea  shore.  He  sat  in  a  stooping"  position  while 
his  companion,  who  was  standing*  a  little  be- 
hind him,  was  g"oing-  to  fire  over  him,  but,  in- 
stead of  that,  lodg-ed  the  whole  contents  of  the 
gun  in  the  young-  man's  left  side.  He  fell, 
and  was  conveyed,  as  it  appeared,  dying-,  to 
his  father's  tent.  I  was  ill,  and  my  wife  was, 
therefore,  obliged  to  apply  the  first  dressing*. 
The  next  day,  I  crawled  to  him,  and  found 
him  in  a  lamentable  situation.  I  took  off  the 
bandage,  and  examined  the  wound.  There 
were  as  many  holes  as  there  had  been  shot 
in  the  gun.  I  tried  first  to  get  out  the  car- 
tridge paper,  as  gently  as  possible,  indeed, 
but  it  could  not  be  done  without  giving-  the 
patient  great  pain.  I  extracted  only  a  few 
shot  in  this  first  operation,  washed  the  wound 
with  wine  vinegar,  laid  lint,  and  then  a  plais- 
ter  for  gun-shot  wounds  upon  it.  He  could 
not  retain  his  water,  and  this  was  as  black  as 
gunpowder,  which  shewed  that  the  bladder 
was  injured.  I  gave  him  Essentia  dulcis  se- 
veral times  in  a  day,  by  the  use  of  which  the 
bladder  was  cured,  and  the  urine  recovered  its 
natural  colour.     I  cleaned  the  wound  every 


221 
day,  took  out  always  more  shot,  and  proceed- 
ed with  the  same   mode  of  treatment.     But 
now,  all  the  holes  ran  together  into  one,  which 
was  about  as  large  as  a  crown  piece.   One  day, 
when   I  took  off  the  bandage,   I  saw  in  the 
wound  some  berries,  which  he  had  eaten  ;  nay, 
afterwards,  even  the  excrements  came  through 
it :    the  entrails,   therefore,  had  also  suffered 
injury.       I  again  gave  him   Essentia   dulcis, 
and  all  returned  to  its  natural  order.     I  leave 
it  to  the  gentlemen  of  the  faculty  to  decide 
whether  this  remedy,  or  merely  kind  nature, 
had  healed  the  bladder  and  entrails.     I  was 
not  in  a  hurry  with  the  healing  of  the  wound, 
but  continued  as  I  had  begun.    At  last,  I  saw 
new  flesh,    the  wound    became   smaller    and 
smaller,  and,  in  eight  weeks,  the  cure  was  so 
far  effected,  that  the  patient  could  walk  upon 
crutches.     In  four  weeks  more,  he  could  walk 
with  the  help  of  a  stick  ;  and,  in  half  a  year, 
he  was  as   active  as  if  he  had  never  received 
any  injury,  rowed  his  Kajak,  hunted  the  seal, 
and  was  married  a  few  years  after. 

A  young  woman  lost  her  child,  which  was 
but  a  few  weeks  old ;  she  had  an  ulcer  in  one 
breast,  which  grew  hard,  swelled,  and  gave 
her  much   pain.     She   came  to  me :    I    ap- 


222 

plied  yellow  salve  of  marshmallow,  by  which 
she  was  cured  in  a  few  days.  I  begged  her  not  to 
expose  herself  to  the  severe  cold,  which  might 
bring  on  a  relapse :  but  as  soon  as  she  was 
cured,  she  forgot  the  pain,  and  my  warning, 
and  went  out  without  a  cloak.  The  conse- 
quence was,  that  the  breast  became  harder  and 
more  painful  than  before.  As  she  had  not 
followed  my  advice,  she  was  now  afraid  or  un- 
willing to  apply  to  me  again.  Relief  was 
necessary  :  she  and  her  husband  consulted  to- 
gether, and  thought,  if  there  were  a  hole  in 
the  breast,  the  milk  might  be  easily  pressed 
out,  plaister  might  be  procured,  and  the  wound 
might  be  healed.  They  proceeded  according- 
ly. The  knives  of  the  Greenlanders  are  al- 
ways sharp,  but  the  man  whetted  his,  and  cut 
a  hole  in  the  breast  as  long  and  broad  as  the 
palm  of  the  hand,  from  above  down  to  the  nip- 
ple. This  operation,  indeed,  gave  the  wife 
pain,  but  she  bore  it  patiently,  in  the  hope 
that  she  should  now  be  able  to  press  out  the 
milk.  But  they  were  both  soon  convinced  of 
the  impossibility  of  effecting  it.  The  milk 
was  all  changed  into  corrupt  matter,  and  the 
woman  could  not  bear  the  breast  to  be  touched* 
"  Let  us  go  to  the  Priest,"  said  her  husband. 


223 
"  But  I  am  ashamed  to  go  to  him,"  replied 
the  wife,   and  remained  for  that  day   in  the 
same  state.     The  next  dav,  when  school  was 
over,  I  went  out  into  the  open  space  before  my 
house,  to  take  the  fresh  air42.     As  I  went  out, 
I  saw  both  the  man  and  his  wife  in  the  kitchen  ; 
but  as  it  was  not  unusual  to  see  Greenlanders 
there,   I  did  not  regard  it,   nodded  to  them, 
and  went  on.     But  as  they  still  stood  there 
when  I  returned,  I  said,  "  Your  breast,  I  sup- 
pose, is  now  quite  well." — She  was  silent,  but 
the  husband  answered,  "  No  !  it  is  much  worse 
than  before." — "  Come  in,"  said  I,  "  that  I 
may  look  at  it."     They  went  in.     She  held 
one  hand  under  her  cloak,   to  keep  it  from 
touching  the  sore  breast ;    her  husband  helped 
her  to  take  off  the  cloak.     I  was  accustomed 
to  see  bad  wounds,  large  and  offensive  sores,  to 
lay  plaisters   on  the  former,  and  to  press  the 
matter  out  of  the  latter ;  but  the  appearance  of 
this  breast  was   new  to  me,   and  I  doubted 
whether  I  could  afford  any  assistance.     The 
milk  veins  were  cut  through,   and  full  of  a 

(42)  I  might  well  stand  in  need  of  fresh  air,  after  having 
given  lessons  for  five  hours,  in  a  small  room,  just  high  enough 
to  allow  of  mv  standing  upright  under  the  beams,  and  crowd- 
ed  with  forty  or  fifty  children,  in  greasy  cloaks. 


224 
tough  green  and  yellow  pus.  The  flesh,  and 
the  edges  of  the  wound,  were  blackish.  What 
should  I  do  ?  I  desired  my  wife  to  warm  some 
spirit  of  camphor,  with  which  I  washed  the 
wound,  and  continued  to  do  so  till  all  the  cor- 
rupt milk  was  removed,  nor  did  I  forget  to 
wash  the  black  edges  of  the  wound.  For  a 
long  time,  the  woman  sat  insensible  ;  but,  at 
last,  the  flesh  assumed  a  fresher  redder  colour, 
and  she  felt  pain.  Though  she  groaned  with 
pain,  I  continued  to  wash  the  wound  for  some 
time,  till  I  thought  it  was  quite  clean  :  I  then 
laid  lint  upon  it ;  and,  after  that,  a  plaister, 
as  far  as  I  remember,  salve  of  melilot  (Tri- 
folium  Melilotus),  and  visited  her  every  day 
to  look  at  her  breast.  Contrary  to  expecta- 
tion, the  wound  soon  began  to  be  covered 
with  a  new  skin,  and  in  a  month  it  was 
healed ;  but  the  woman  never  afterwards  had 
any  milk  in  her  breasts.  A  year  after  this, 
she  bore  a  son,  whom  my  wife  suckled,  be- 
cause the  mother  herself  could  not,  and  there 
was  no  other  woman  in  the  neighbourhood 
who  had  a  child  at  the  breast.  The  care  which 
my  wife  bestowed  on  this  child,  was,  in  some 
measure,  a  reward  for  his  father's  attachment 
to  me,  for  he  was  the  same  young-  man,  who, 


225 
as  I  have  related  before,  came  when    I  was 
struggling  with  the  Greenlander  who  had  at- 
tempted to  stab  me,   and  had  the  courage  to 
ask  whether  he  should  help  me. 

After  my  return  from  Greenland,  I  related 
these  cures  to  my  friend,  the  late  Counsellor  of 
State,  Guldbrand  :  he  smiled,  and,  in  respect 
to  the  remedies  applied,  called  them  miracu- 
lous cures. 


Chap.  XVIII. 

The  Avenger  of  his  Father,  or  the  Triumph  of 
Religion. 


The  murder  of  a  father  must  be  revenged, 
however  long  a  period  may  elapse  before  ven- 
geance can  be  exercised.  A  son,  about  thir- 
teen or  fourteen  years  of  age,  was  present  when 
his  father  was  murdered,  which  happened  about 
twenty  years  before  my  arrival  in  Greenland. 
He  grew  up  to  manhood,  was  a  very  active 
fisherman,  married,  and  was  respected  by  his 
countrymen ;  but  he  was  yet  too  weak  to  take 

G  S 


226 

revenge  on  the  murderer  of  his  father.  The 
latter  was  surrounded  by  a  numerous  family ; 
had  three  wives ;  and  was,  in  many  respects, 
so  superior  to  his  countrymen,  that  the  Danes 
called  him  King. 

However,  to  obtain  his  end,  the  injured  son, 
some  years  after  my  arrival,  removed,  with  his 
family,  far  to  the   south,  where  most  of  his 
relations  lived ;  because  he  hoped   to  prevail 
upon  them  to  accompany  him  back,  and,  by 
their  means,  to  become  formidable  to  his  ad- 
versary, and,  with  their  assistance,  to  execute 
his  design.     He  came  to  them  ;  expressed  his 
grief ;    painted  the  murder  of  his  father,  of 
which  he  had  been  a  witness,  and  the  dreadful 
circumstances  which  attended  it,  in  the  most 
lively   colours  ;    and   persuaded  them   to  ac- 
company him  to   the  north.     But  they  were 
obliged  to  provide  themselves  with  the  neces- 
sary provisions,  which,  as  well  as  the  variable 
weather  in  the  autumn,  delayed  their  voyage. 
When  he,  at  last,  landed  among  us,   with   his 
relations,  among  whom  there  were  some  ac- 
tive young  men,  our  Greenlanders  had  long 
taken  up  their  winter  abodes,  and  there  was  no 
room  vacant.      I  do  not   remember  whether 
bis  own  house  was  so  decayed  that  it  could  not 


227 
be  repaired  in  a  short  time,  or  whether  others 
had  taken  possession  of  it.  I  had  never  seen 
him  before,  for  his  home  was  on  the  other  side 
of  the  Isefjord  ;  however,  he  came  to  me,  and 
requested  me  to  let  him  have  a  small  house, 
which  belonged  to  me,  a  quarter  of  a  mile 
to  the  north  of  my  baptized  Greenlanders. 
Though  I,  as  well  as  the  whole  neighbour- 
hood, had  heard  of  the  cause  of  his  journey  to 
the  south,  and  now  saw  his  numerous  train,  I 
granted  his  request,  without  saying"  any  thing 
to  him  upon  the  subject.  In  a  few  days  the 
house  was  in  an  habitable  condition,  and  large 
enough  for  them  all.  He  soon  after  came,  and 
thanked  me  for  my  kindness. 

He  came  often,  and  once  excused  himself  by 
saying,  "  You  are  so  amiable,  that  I  cannot 
keep  away  from  you."  In  some  of  our  con* 
versations,  I  profited  by  his  inclination  to  me ; 
but  without  alluding  to  what  he  had  upon  his 
heart.  Two  or  three  weeks  had  hardly  elapsed, 
when,  upon  one  of  his  visits,  he  said  that  he 
should  like  to  learn  something  about  the  great 
Lord  of  Heaven,  who,  as  I  told  him,  had 
created  all  things.  "  Some  of  my  relations 
also,"  said  he,  "  wish  to  learn."  I  had  no 
hesitation  in  granting  his  wish  5  and,  therefore, 


228 

went  the  following  day  to  his  dwelling1,  where 
I  learned  that,  for  the  present,  ten  or  twelve 
persons  wished  to  take  instruction.  The  others 
said  they  would  wait  till  they  heard  whether 
it  was  not  too  difficult  to  learn.  I  had  in  the 
colony  a  young-  man  of  mixed  race,  who  had 
considerable  information,  and  wrote  well.  I 
engaged  him  as  national  catechist ;  paid  him 
the  first  year  myself;  and  introduced  him 
into  this  family  as  their  teacher.  "  He  shall 
instruct  you  every  day,"  said  I ;  "  and  I  will 
come  to  you  myself  as  often  as  I  can,  to  assure 
myself  of  your  progress  and  your  attention." — 
"  We  will  be  attentive,"  answered  they; 
"  but  you  must  come  often,  and  we  will  come 
to  you."  I  visited  them  every  week,  and  had 
reason  to  be  pleased  with  their  attention  and 
progress.  The  timidity  of  the  Catechist  vanish- 
ed by  degrees.  He  asked  my  advice  in  every 
difficulty,  and  gave  me  a  faithful  account  of 
their  domestic  economy,  &c.  Once,  when  the 
hour  of  instruction  was  concluded,  I  asked  two 
old  people  whether  they  had  also  a  mind  to 
learn.  The  woman  answered,  "  He  may, 
but  I  am  blind  and  incapable." — "For  that 
very  reason  you  can  learn  better  than  I,"  said 
the  man :  "  you  may  be  all  ear,  but  I  am 


229 
disturbed  by  the  many  people  who  come  in 
and  out."  However,  these  two  old  people, 
and,  at  last,  the  whole  family,  came  to  be 
instructed.  Kunnuk  (this  is  the  name  of  the 
Greenlander  of  whom  we  chiefly  mean  to 
speak)  distinguished  himself  by  his  continual 
application,  and  extraordinary  improvement. 
He  often  neglected  his  fishery  to  hear  the  in- 
structions ;  but  it  was  also  his  firm  resolution 
to  be  baptized. 

Spring  approached,  and  the  month  of  May 
was  come  ;  when  the  following  conversation 
took  place  between  my  Greenlander  and  me. 

He.  Will  you  baptize  me  ?  You  know  that 
I  am  obedient.  I  know  God  ;  and  my  wife, 
as  well  as  I,  wishes  to  become  a  believer. 

/.  Yes,  you  know  God  ;  you  know  that  he 
is  good,  that  he  loves  you,  and  desires  to  make 
you  happy  ;  but  he  desires,  also,  that  you  shall 
obey  him. 

He.  I  love  him  ;  I  will  obey  him. 

/.  If  you  want  to  obey  him,  you  must  kill 
nobody.  You  know  that  you  have  often 
heard  his  commandment;  "  Thou  shalt  do  no 
murder." 

He  seems  confounded,  and  is  silent. 


230 

J.  Hear  me,  good  Kunnuk  !  I  know  that 
you  have  come  here  with  your  relations  to  take 
revenge  on  the  murderer  of  your  father  •,  but 
you  must  not  take  revenge  on  him,  if  you  want 
to  become  a  believer. 

He  (moved).  But  he  murdered  my  father  ! 
I  saw  it,  and  could  not  help  him ;  I  must  now 
punish  him  for  his  crime. 

J.  You  grieve  me. 

He.  By  what  ? 

I.  That  you  will  murder. 

He.  Only  him  who  deserves  to  die. 

I.  But  the  great  Lord  of  Heaven  says,  Thou 
shalt  not. 

He.  I  will  not, — only  him. 

J.  But  you  must  not  kill  even  him.  Have 
you  forgotten  how  often  you  have  heard,  this 
winter,  his  command — Do  not  revenge  thyself? 

He.  Shall,  then,  the  wicked  murder  with 
impunity  ? 

I.  No,  that  he  shall  not ;  God  will  punish 
him. 

He.  When? 

J.  Perhaps  in  this  world  ;  but  certainly  at 
the  day  of  judgment,  when  he  will  reward 
every  one  according  to  his  deeds. 


231 

He.  That  is  such  a  long"  delay ;  my  coun- 
trymen and  relations  will  blame  me,  if  I  do  not 
avenge  my  father. 

I.  If  you  did  not  know  the  will  of  God,  I 
must  let  you  do  what  your  heart  suggested  : 
I  must  say  nothing  to  your  returning  evil  for 
evil  ;  but  now  I  must  not  be  silent. 

He.  That  is  difficult !  What  shall  I  do 
then  ? 

/.  You  shall  not  kill  him  ;  you  shall  even 
pardon  him. 

He.  Pardon  him  !  Your  doctrine  is  very 
difficult. 

I.  It  is  not  our  doctrine ;  it  is  Christ's  doc- 
trine. 

He  sighs,  and  is  silent. 

/.  Perhaps,  too,  your  father  was  not  inno- 
cent ;  perhaps  he  had  also  killed  somebody, 
and  deserved  to  die. 

He.  That  I  do  not  know  ;  but  then  this 
man  also  deserves  to  die. 

1.  Yes,  kill  him ;  but  continue  to  be  an 
unbeliever ;  but  expect  that,  some  day,  one  of 
his  children  will  kill  you  or  your  family. 

He.  Priest,  you  are  no  longer  amiable! 
you  speak  hard  words ! 

/.  Kunnuk,  I  love  you  -,  and  therefore  wish 


232 
that  you  may  not  sin  against  God,  who  has 
had  you  instructed  in  his  will,   and  who  will 
do  justice  even  to  your  adversary. 

He.  Stop,  then ;  I  must  talk  about  it  with 
my  relations. 

He  went ;  came  home  sorrowfully  ;   spoke 
little  ;  and  ate  nothing  during  the  whole  day. 
They   observed   his  unusual  ill  temper,   and 
asked  him  the  cause,  which  he,  at  last,  told 
them.     I  pass  over  the  answer  of  his  relations, 
and  their  consultation,   on    this    subject,  for 
many  days  together.     The  following  evening 
I  went  to  them,  and  found  them  all  at  home. 
Without  entering  into   any  thing  relative   to 
the  conversation  we  had  had,  I  chose  pieces  for 
the  catechization,  and  from  the  Bible,  as  well 
as  hymns,  which  disposed  the  heart  to   mild 
feelings,  and  invited  it  to  placability.  "  Thank 
you,  Priest  I"  said  Kunnuk,    as  I    departed  : 
"  it  was  good  that  you  came."     Some  days 
after,  he  again  came  to  me  :  his  manner,  his 
countenance,  every  thing   indicated  a  violent 
struggle,  as  well  with  his  heart,  as  with  his 
friends.     I  first  addressed  him,  saying,  "  You 
are  not  in  spirits  ;  tell  me,  what  have  you  on 
your  heart  ?" — "  I  will,  and  I   will  not  ;  I 
hear,  and  I  do  not  hear,"   answered  he :  "I 


233 
never  felt  so  before." — "What  will  you?" 
said  I  ;  "  and  what  will  you  not  ?" — "  I  will 
forgive  him,"  answered  he  ;  "  and  I  will  not 
forgive  him  :  I  have  no  ears,  when  they  want 
that  I  shall  revenge  myself ;  and  yet  I  have 
ears." — "  When  you  will  not  forgive  him," 
said  I ;  "  when  you  listen  with  approbation 
to  those  who  dissuade  you  from  it ;  then  your 
unconverted  heart  speaks,  which  demands  re- 
venge ;  but  when  you  will  forgive,  when  you 
will  not  hear  your  advisers,  then  the  better 
part  in  you  speaks ;  then  God  speaks  to  your 
heart.     What  will  you  now  do  ?" 

"  I  was  so  moved,"  answered  he,  "  when 
you  spoke  yesterday  evening ;  then  my  heart 
wished  to  obey." — "  See,"  said  I ;  "  ought 
you  not  to  feel  that  it  is  the  voice  of  your 
heavenly  Father  which  spoke  to  your  heart  ?" 
I  now  repeated  to  him  the  latter  part  of  the 
life  of  Jesus ;  his  forgiveness,  his  prayer  for 
his  murderers.  "  That  was  laudable,"  said 
he ;  and  a  tear  sparkled  in  his  eye  :  "  but  he 
was  better  than  we  are." — "  Yes,"  answered 
I,  "  infinitely  better  ;  but  he  will  have  us  re- 
semble him  in  this ;  and,  if  we  have  only  a 
g-ood  will,  God  will  give  us  strength  ;  and  we 
shall  be  satisfied  with  ourselves.    But  now  you 

iih 


234 
shall  hear,  that  a  man  like  you  and  me  could 
pray  for  those  who  sought  to  kill  him,  because 
he  declared  to  them  the  will  of  God,  and 
desired  them  to  believe  in  Jesus."  I  read  to 
him  the  death  of  Stephen,  Acts,  chap.  vii. 
He  dried  his  eyes,  and  said,  "  The  wicked 
men  !  He  is  happy  -,  he  certainly  is  with  God 
in  heaven." — "  Yes,"  continued  1,  "  that  he 
is;  and  you  and  every  body,  who  acts  as  he 
did,  shall  also  come  there." — "  Good  Priest!" 
interrupted  he ;  "  my  heart  is  so  moved.  I 
will — but,  give  me  still  a  little  time :  when  I 
have  brought  the  other  heart  to  silence,  and 
am  quite  changed,  I  will  come  again." — 
"  Go,"  said  I,  "  and  pray  to  the  good  God, 
that  he  may  strengthen  you  in  your  resolution  ; 
I  also  will  pray  for  you."  He  went,  and  my 
hope  was  almost  certainty. 

At  last,  he  came  with  a  joyful  counten- 
ance, like  him  who  carries  peace  in  his  heart. 
"  Now  I  am  happy,"  said  he  j  "I  hate  no 
more-,  I  have  forgiven." — "Do  you,  really,  feel 
yourself  happy  by  it  ?"  said  I. — "  Yes,"  an- 
swered he,  "  my  heart  is  so  easy." — "  You 
rejoice  me  sincerely,"  continued  I ;  "but  may 
I  depend  upon  you  ?  Your  heart  will  again 
excite  you  to  revenge,  and  your  friends  will 


235 
tempt  you." — "I  do  not  know  whether  this 
will  happen,"  was  his  answer  ;  "  but  I  have 
conquered,  and  you  may  trust  me." — "  It 
would  be  melancholy,"  said  I,  "if,  after  you 
had  become  a  believer,  you  should  commit  this 
murder." — "  You  are  so  suspicious,  Priest!" 
he  interrupted. — "  You  would  now  commit  a 
greater  sin,"  continued  I,  "  than  if  you  had 
never  known  God,  and  never  vowed  obedience 
to  him." — M  I  was  rejoiced,"  interrupted  he, 
"  but  your  words  afflict  me." — "  I  will  not 
afflict  you,"  said  I ;  "  I  only  want  to  try  you, 
whether  you  are  able  to  keep  what  you  pro- 
mise. Do  not  trust  your  heart  too  much  !" — 
"  My  wicked  heart  shall  be  silent,"  an- 
swered he.  I  now  asked  him,  what  had 
wrought  this  change  in  him  ;  * '  The  energetic 
words,"  answered  he,  "  which  Jesus  has  taught 
me,  and  whom  I  will  follow.  I  never  thought 
that  I  could  be  disposed,  as  1  now  am.  Did  you 
not  perceive  how  moved  I  was,  as  you  read  to 
me  about  him  on  the  cross  ;  how  he  prayed  for 
his  murderers,  Father,  forgive  them,  they 
know  not  what  they  do  ?  Then  I  vowed  in 
my  heart,  I,  unworthy  as  I  am,  that  I  would 
forgive,  and  now  I  have  forgiven.  Now,  I 
hope  you  will  consider  me  and  my  wife,  who 


236 
has  never  hated,  and  who,  like  me,  longs 
to  become  a  Christian,  worthy  of  baptism  ?" 
— "  Yes,  good  Kunnuk !"  answered  I,  "  I 
will  baptize  you  and  your  wife,  in  God's 
name ;  but  thank  God,  that  he  gave  you  an 
opportunity  of  knowing  him,  and  his  will,  and 
forget  not  that  you  are  bound  in  baptism  to 
believe  in  him,  to  love  him,  and  to  obey  his 
commandments;  consequently,  to  leave  off 
wickedness,  and  continually  to  become  bet- 
ter."— "  I  know  it,  Priest !"  said  he  ;  "  God 
sees  my  heart,  and  he  will  give  me  strength 
to  remain  faithful  to  him."  He  left  me,  full 
of  joy  and  of  gratitude  to  God.  I  deferred 
the  reception  of  him,  and  the  others,  into 
our  Christian  community,  for  a  fortnight  ;  I 
thought  it  necessary  to  defer  it,  particularly  on 
his  account. 

The  day  arrived,  the  whole  of  the  divine 
service  had  reference  to  the  baptismal  act. 
He  gave  an  account  of  his  belief  in  Christian- 
ity, with  openness  and  truth  ;  he  answered, 
with  feeling,  the  questions  from  the  Altar-book, 
and  silent  tears  bedewed  his  cheeks,  when  he 
knelt  down  to  receive  baptism,  in  which,  by 
desire,  the  name  of  Niels  was  given  him.  The 
divine  service  ended,  as   usual,  with  a  hymn 


237 
and  prayers.  He  now  came,  gave  me  his 
hand,  and  said,  "  Thank  you,  good  Priest !  I 
am  happy."  Upon  this,  he  turned  to  the 
congregation,  of  whom  some  kissed  him  (this 
was  unusual).  "  Receive  me  now  as  a  be- 
liever !  We  will  love  each  other."  All  an- 
swered this  address  with  "  Yes ;"  and  now  they 
went  home  together,  united  as  persons  having 
one  Lord,  one  faith,  and  one  baptism.  I 
thanked  God,  with  heartfelt  joy,  for  the  tri- 
umph of  truth  over  this  heart,  and  so  many 
others. 

After  some  days,  he  sent  his  enemy   the 
following  message  :  "  I  am  now  become  a  be- 
liever, and  you  have  nothing  more  to  fear." 
Upon  repeated  invitations,   the  former  came 
one  day  with  a  few  attendants.     He  was  re- 
ceived in  the  most  friendly  manner,   treated 
with  the  greatest  kindness,  and  returned  home 
in  peace.     Only,  when  he  received  him,  my 
Greenlander  said,   "  I  have  forgotten  it."    He 
was    invited   to    return   the  visit ;  went,  con- 
trary to  the   advice  of  his  friends,  without  at- 
tendants, and  was  received  as  a  friend.     They 
ate  and  spent  the  time  in  conversation,  till  they 
parted  in  the  evening  on  the  best  terms ;  but 
when  Niels  was  not  far  from  the  shore,  he  per- 


238 

ceived  water  in  his  Kajak.  He  hastened  to- 
wards land,  got  out,  and  found  that  a  hole  was 
cut  in  his  Kajak.  He  soon  stopped  it  up,  pro- 
ceeded, and  arrived  safe  home.  Some  time 
after,  he  told  me  this,  with  a  smile,  say- 
ing, "  He  is  still  afraid,  and  has,  without 
doubt,  had  this  done  for  that  reason ;  but  I 
will  not  harm  him."  He  remained  constant- 
ly faithful  to  his  vow.  I  even  received  a 
message  from  him,  about  ten  years  after  my 
departure,  saying,  that  he  was  faithful  to  God, 
and  his  vow. 


Chap.   XIX. 

The  Heathens  kill  Witches, 


Perhaps  there  may  be  in  Greenland,  as 
among  us,  wicked  witches,  or  persons  who,  by 
unmeaning  mummeries,  would  injure  others  if 
they  could.  Some  affirm  it.  I  do  not  know 
it ;  but  this  I  know,  that  innocent  persons,  on 
the  accusation  of  the  Angekoks,  are  not  seldom 
suspected  and  treated  as  witches.  These  An- 
gekoks are  generally  the  very  refuse  of  the 


239 
people,  either  unskilful  in  the  chase,  or  lazy. 
Yet,  as  reputed  wise  men,  who  are  connected 
with  Torgarsuk,  they  possess  the  confidence  of 
their  countrymen,  and  often  make  use  of  it  to 
ruin  their  innocent  fellow-countrymen.  On 
occasion  of  sicknesses,  or  death,  or  of  ill  success 
in  hunting-,  those,  who  have  met  with  the 
misfortune,  ask  them,  who  may  be  the  cause 
of  it,  or  who  has  brought  this  evil  upon  them. 
Woe  then  to  the  old  widow  without  a  pro- 
tector, or  to  the  old  man  without  grown-up 
sons,  against  whom  they  have  a  secret  ill  will, 
or  whose  property  tempts  them.  They  are  ca- 
pable of  long-  concealing-  their  hatred,  even  un- 
der the  appearance  of  friendship  ;  but  they  ex- 
ecute their  vengeance  in  a  cruel  manner,  when 
the  measure  of  sin,  according-  to  their  ideas,  is 
full.  They  generally  proceed  in  the  following 
manner  :  The  person  accused  and  condemned 
is  called  out  of  his  house,  or  his  tent,  with  a 
voice  with  announces  to  him  that  he  is  to 
die.  He  turns  pale,  but  g-oes  out  notwith- 
standing, and  his  furious  accusers  now  ask 
him  the  following-  questions :  Are  not  you  an 
Illiseetsok  ?  Did  you  not  kill  such  a  one  by 
your  words  or  your  malice  ?  If  the  person  con- 
demned even  answers.  No !  his  death  is  still  in- 


240 
evitable ;  but  in  his  mortal  anguish,  he  some- 
times answers,  Yes :  hereupon,  they  stab  him 
with  their  knives,  cut  him  to  pieces,  and  every 
one  eats  a  piece  of  his  heart,  that  his  ghost  may 
not  return,  and  frighten  them. 

In  this  manner,  the  heathens,  who  lived  a 
little  farther  to  the  north,  examined  and  killed 
an  old  man,  who  had  been  with  me  only  a  few 
hours  before.  He  was  then  cheerful,  talkative, 
and  desirous  to  know  what  we  were  going  to 
do  the  following  day  (Christmas-day),  as  he 
had  heard  something  from  the  baptized  Green- 
landers  that  he  did  not  understand,  and  had 
seen  that  they  were  dressed  in  their  best  clothes. 
"  You  will  not  understand  me  either,"  said 
I,  "  as  you  are  not  acquainted  with  the  great 
Lord  of  heaven  and  earth  ;  but  we  rejoice  to- 
morrow, because  he  let  his  Son  come  upon  the 
earth,  and  teach  us  how  we  shall  exert  our- 
selves to  become  good  and  happy." — "  That 
is  wonderful,"  said  he  ;  "  but  give  me  some- 
thing which  I  can  shew  to  the  others  when  I 
return  home,  and  I  will  tell  them  what  I  have 
seen  and  heard."  I  gave  him  some  bread  and 
tobacco  ;  and  he  left  me  without  the  small- 
est presentiment  of  what  awaited  him.  But 
hardly  an  hour  had  elapsed  after  his  return, 


241 
when  he  was  called  out,  and  murdered  in  the 
manner  above  described*3. 

The  following"  morning",  just  as  I  was 
going  to  begin  divine  service  for  the  Green- 
landers,  I  was  informed  that  a  Greenlander 
from  the  north  desired  to  speak  to  me.  My 
congregation  was  already  assembled  ;  I,  there- 
fore, desired  him  to  wait  till  divine  service  was 
over.  "  No,  Priest,"  said  he,  "  I  must  speak 
to  you  immediately."  When  he  came  in,  he 
continued,  "  My  father's  brother,  who  was 
yesterday  with  you,  was  murdered  a  short  time 
after  he  returned  home.  I  could  not  protect 
him  ;  but  I  cannot  continue  to  live  among 
these  people.  If  you  will  receive  us  (we  are 
eight,  mostly  children),  we  will  remove  hither, 
and  live  among  the  believers,  who  do  not  kill 
innocent  persons."  I  promised  to  fulfil  his 
desire,  but  it  was  necessary  to  examine  first  if 
there  were  room  for  them  ;  and  for  this  he  had 
to  wait.  "  I  will  readily  wait,"  said  he,  "  if 
we  may  but  come."  Some  families,  who  had 
more  or  less  room  to  spare,  were  willing"  to 

(43)  A  son,  as  we  have  said  above,  owes  vengeance  to  bis 
murdered  father.  This  is  a  private  or  family  matter ;  but  the 
murder  of  witches  or  sorcerers  is  an  act  of  justice,  due  to  the 
public  good. 

1  1 


242 

receive  them.  I  sent  him  word  of  it.  The 
next  morning-,  we  had  them  all  with  us,  and, 
the  following  year,  they  were  all  instructed 
and  baptized.  Soon  after,  I  went  to  the  north, 
and,  though  the  heathens  do  not  like  to  hear 
reproofs,  I  called  them  severely  to  account  for 
their  conduct.  "  You  kill  wicked  people  in 
your  country,  I  suppose  ?"  said  one.  "  Yes !" 
answered  I,  "  but  we  first  convince  ourselves 
that  they  are  wicked.  The  great  governor  in 
our  country  even  gives  to  a  certain  man  the 
commission  to  defend  them,  that  no  innocent 
person  may  die ;  but  you  behave  like  furious 
madmen." — "  You  kill  the  wicked,  so  do  we. 
But  that  those  whom  we  kill  are  wicked,  we 
understand  better  than  you,  Priest  I"  This  was 
all  the  answer  they  returned  to  my  reproof. 


243 


Chap.  XX. 

Religion  and  Superstition  of  the  Greenlanders* 


The  Greenlanders  believe  in  a  Superior  Being", 
and  the  immortality  of  the  soul.  This  Being, 
whom  they  call  Torngarsuk,  is,  according  to 
their  description,  rather  evil  than  good.  He 
cannot  be  eternal,  as  he  is  said  to  have  a  great 
grandmother,  a  terrible  woman,  who  rules  over 
the  sea-animals,  often  summons  them  to  her, 
and  thus  deprives  the  inhabitants  of  their  sup- 
port. Neither  is  he  considered  as  the  creator 
of  the  world,  for  the  world,  they  think,  arose 
of  itself,  and  the  first  Greenlanders  grew  out  of 
the  ground.  Some  make  Torngarsuk  a  spirit ; 
other  say  he  is  like  a  beast ;  others,  that  he  re- 
sembles a  man.  Some  affirm  that  he  is  im- 
mortal ;  others,  that  a  certain  noise  can  kill 
him.     His  abode  is  very  deep  in  the  earth, 

(44)  This  chapter,  like  the  others,  is  taken  from  ray  notes 
on  Greenland.  Hans  Egede,  my  mother's  father,  has  said 
almost  the  same.  This  agreement  must  be  a  security  for  the 
truth  of  the  statements  it  contains. 


244 
where  living  is  agreeable,  and  provisions  abun- 
dant. So  different  are  their  ideas  of  this  being" : 
but  they  neither  love  nor  fear  him ;  nor  do 
they  adore  him43.  When  they  are  in  health, 
their  fishery  successful,  and  they  have  nothing 
to  trouble  them  in  other  respects,  Torngarsuk 
is  quite  indifferent  to  them.  Only  when  they 
are  ill  or  unhappy,  or  the  sea-animals  leave 
the  coast,  they  have  recourse,  not  to  Torn- 
garsuk, but  to  their  Angekok,  who  is  in  con- 
nection with  him.  The  Angekok  then  asks 
his  advice,  and  brings  the  answer. 

They  believe  in  the  immortality  of  the 
soul,  and  that  its  state,  after  death,  is  better 
than  the  present,  and  happier  for  them  all  ; 
for,  according  to  their  ideas,  they  will  be  all 
happy  then,  without  distinction.  They,  in- 
deed, believe  that  there  are  two  places  of 
abode  after  death,  one  in  heaven,  the  other 
under  the  earth,  but  both  happy  :  they,  how- 
ever, consider  the  subterranean  abode  as  the 
happiest,  where  only  those  come  who  have 
suffered  much  distress  in  this  world,  or  have 
done  great   services  to  their  fellow-creatures ; 


(45)  But  they  obey  him  when  they  receive  orders  from  him 
through  their  Angekoks. 


245 
the  souls  of  all  the  others  come  into  heaven. 
The  soul  is,  indeed,  of  the  nature  of  a  spirit ; 
but  it  has  something*  material  about  it ;  some- 
thing delicate  and  soft,  which  may  be  felt. 
It  may  become  sick  ;  and,  in  this  case,  the 
Angekok  can  take  away  the  sick  part,  and  put 
something"  healthy  in  its  room  :  it  may  be  lost, 
and  then  he  can  give  a  new  one.  The  northern 
lights  are  the  souls  of  the  deceased,  playing  at 
ball,  in  heaven46. 

The  Sun  and  Moon  were  Greenlanders,  and 
brother  and  sister.  The  sister,  the  sun,  was 
extremely  beautiful ;  and  her  brother,  who 
had  an  illicit  passion  for  her,  pursued  her  every 
where.  In  order  to  escape  from  him,  she  fled 
to  Heaven,  where  he  still  follows  her.  He  is, 
besides,  a  great  rogue  ;  and  women  cannot  be 
too  much  on  their  guard  against  him.     When 


(+6)  The  Greenland  way  of  playing  at  ball  is  a  serious  com- 
bat. Towards  the  spring,  the  inhabitants  of  two  large  districts 
form  two  bodies ;  each  tries  to  catch  the  great  ball,  which  is 
thrown  out,  and  to  hinder  the  adverse  party  from  obtaining 
it,  which  seldom  passes  without  wounds,  that  are  often  mortal : 
those  who  get  possession  of  the  ball  drive  off  in  their  sledges, 
at  full  speed.  If  they  secure  the  ball,  they  are  victors,  and 
have  a  right  to  insult  the  vanquished,  who  must  bear  all  their 
sarcasms  with  patience.  Formerly,  they  were  obliged  to  give 
Up  their  most  valuable  property. — Fries. 


246 
the  full  moon  shines  upon  the  water,  the  girls 
dare  not   drink  of  it,  for  fear  of  becoming 
pregnant47. 

Air,  earth,  water,  and  ^fire,  have  each  their 
spirits,  who  exercise  a  certain  sway,  each  in 
his  own  sphere.  Care  must  be  taken  not  to 
make  them  angry.  A  quarter  of  a  mile  to 
the  north  of  my  place  of  abode,  there  was  a 
dangerous  place  for  Kajak-rowers,  who  were 
sometimes  upset  by  an  invisible  being.  In 
these  cases,  fear  did  the  most  •,  and  violent 
gusts  of  wind,  from  the  east,  the  rest. 

Apparitions  and  ghosts  are  believed  in  here, 
as  they  are  every  where.  For  this  reason,  they 
bind  the  legs  of  the  dead,  while  they  are  still 
pliable,  up  to  the  hams,  and  carry  them,  in 
winter,  out  of  a  window,  or,  in  summer,  out 
of  the  back  part  of  the  tent,  that  their  ghosts 
may  not  return.  For  the  same  reason  as  we 
have  before  related,  they  tear  out  and  devour 
the  hearts  of  those  whom  they  kill  as  sorcerers : 
the  fear  that  the  spirit  of  the  person  killed 
should  haunt  them,  is  the  true  cause  of  this 
cruelty.  Greenlanders  are  often  drowned  in 
the  chase  of  seals ;  and   then  their  spirits  ap- 

(47)  Water  is  the  beverage  of  the  Greenlanders :  they  lay 
themselves  down,  and  quench  their  thirst  where  they  find  it. 


247 
pear  after  death.     They  are  heard  to  come  on 
shore,  and  knock  the  ice  from  their  Kajaks  ; 
nay,  they  are  seen  to  carry  them  on  shore,  and 
lay  them  on  the  places  for  boats. 

The  rocks,  also,  have  their  spirits,  which 
are  very  dangerous,  as  they  even  come  down 
into  the  houses  by  night,  and  steal  provisions. 
If  it  is  true,  as  they  relate,  that  individual 
Greenlanders  now  and  then,  from  despair, 
leave  society  for  ever,  and  dwell  among  the 
rocks,  it  is  no  wonder  if  they  visit  the  houses, 
especially  in  winter  nights,  to  find  there  some- 
thing to  prolong  their  wretched  existence. 
Even  some  Greenlanders  do  not  look  on  these 
as  spirits,  but  as  unfortunate  persons,  who,  by 
being  insulated  from  mankind,  have  become 
savage  and  formidable. 

When  any  one  who  is  accused  of  sorcery 
dies  a  natural  death,  he  cannot  lie  quietly  in 
his  grave.  A  woman,  who  was  accused  of 
being  an  Illiseetsok,  was  buried  not  far  from 
my  house.  Some  stones  which  covered  the 
grave  slipped  off;  the  dogs  found  the  corpse, 
and  tore  off  one  leg.  "So  it  seems  she  was 
an  Illiseetsok,"  said  the  Greenlanders.  — 
"  Why  ?"  said  I.  "  Because  her  bones  cannot 
lie  in  peace,"  answered  they.     However,  I 


248  , 

caused  the  leg-  that  was  torn  off  to  be  put  in  its 
place  again,  and  the  grave  to  be  repaired. 
"  He  does  not  believe  it,"  said  they. 

I  have  never  heard,  nor  do  I  remember  to 
have  ever  read,  any  thing  that  could  lead  to 
the    conjecture   that  they   make  offerings  to 
Torngarsuk :    they   do    not   esteem   him     so 
much.     However,  I  was  informed  of  an  offer- 
ing, which  nobody  in  my  part  of  the  country 
neglected  to  make  upon   occasion.      On  the 
road  to  Erkame,  the  last  inhabited  spot  on  this 
side  of  the  Isefjord,  there  is  a  large  stone,  on 
which  every  one  who  goes  by  lays  his  offering, 
a  little  meat,  bacon,  skin,  berries,  &c.    I  often 
asked  to  whom  they  gave  these  things  :  no- 
body knew  this.     "  People/'  said  they,  "  al- 
ways used  to  do   so."     This  offering   must, 
originally,  have   had   a  meaning  :  perhaps  it 
was  to  conciliate  some  spirit   of  the  moun- 
tains, or  the  sea ;  perhaps  to  secure  the  way 
backward  and   forward,    and   not  to  be  led 
astray. 


24» 

Chap.  XXI. 

The  domestic  Life  of  the  Greenlander*. 


The  Greenlanders  every  year,  about  Whit- 
suntide, leave  their  then  very  unclean  and 
offensive  winter  habitations,  to  live  in  tents, 
and  soon  after  go  farther  to  the  south,  partly 
to  catch  a  larger  species  of  hollibut  and  her- 
ring's, partly  to  carry  on  barter  with  the  inha- 
bitants of  the  south  t  they  return  at  Michael- 
mas, to  repair  and  dwell  again  in  their  houses, 
which,  during-  their  absence,  have  been  pro- 
perly purified  by  the  air.  The  men  do  no- 
thing but  examine  the  wood-work,  procure 
what  is  wanting,  and  put  it  in  where  neces- 
sary. The  women,  on  the  other  hand,  must 
provide  whatever  else  is  required ;  as,  for  ex- 
ample, stones,  if  a  wall  built  the  year  before 
is  sunk,  and  earth,  to  fill  up  the  intervals  be- 
tween the  stones.  When  this  is  in  order,  they 
cover  the  walls  inside  with  white  skins,  pre- 
pared and  sewed  together  -,  lay  the  benches  ; 
put  in  the  windows,  which  consist  of  the  en- 
trails of  whitafish,  sewed  together ;  furnish  the 

K  k 


250 
house  with  lamps,  kettles,  chests,  tubs,  &c. 
In  this  manner,  the  house  looks,  at  the  begin- 
ning", very  neat ;  but  the  walls  become  dirty 
by  degrees,  and  the  floor  is  made  by  degrees 
so  slippery  by  the  seals'  blood  continually  spilt 
upon  it,  that  the  feet  stick  to  it ;  not  to  speak 
of  the  stench  and  the  carrion  flies  caused  by 
the  half-picked  bones,  and  the  like,  which  are 
thrown  and  remain  under  the  side  benches. 

Two,  three,  or  more  families  generally  live 
together  in  one  house.  Each  of  them  knows 
how  far  it?  portion  extends  ;  but  there  are  no 
partition  walls.  The  women  occupy  the  right 
bench,  and  the  men  the  side  benches :  some- 
times, however,  men  are  seen  on  the  side 
benches  ;  but  with  this  difference,  that  they 
set  their  feet  on  the  ground,  whereas  the  wo- 
men sit  entirely  upon  the  bench.  Here  they 
all  sit  almost  without  clothing,  the  women  in 
short  drawers,  about  a  quarter  of  an  ell  long ; 
the  men  in  breeches  that  are  rather  longer,  and 
in  the  usual  form.  The  bench  is  their  bed,  but 
the  married  people  have  their  sleeping-place 
under  it48.     When  the  boys  have  attained  the 

(48)  The  bench  is  not  much  more  than  half  an  ell  from 
the  ground ;  but,  in  building  the  house,  the  Greenlanden 
make  the  floor  under  the  bench  lower  than  the  other  part. 


r 

251 
age  of  twelve  or  thirteen,  they  may  no  longer 
lie  upon  the  bench  among-  the  women,  but 
have  a  place  to  sleep  on,  under  the  windows, 
where  they  always  remain  till  they  are  married. 
Notwithstanding  their  sleeping  so  mixed  to- 
gether, and  their  scanty  clothing,  no  illicit 
passion  is  entertained  in  their  houses.  The 
married  and  unmarried,  of  both  sexes,  have  a 
certain  reserve  towards  each  other,  and  a  re- 
pugnance to  every  thing  that  violates  decency. 
Every  individual  lives  according  to  his  own 
pleasure,  and  independent  ;  but  they  all  live 
in  friendship  and  harmony  with  each  other. 
In  the  morning,  the  men  go  out  to  the  chase  5 
in  summer  in  their  Kajak,  in  winter  in  the 
sledge.  Before  they  go  out,  they  drink  a 
draught  of  water,  fill  their  snuff-box,  and  put 
a  quid  of  tobacco  in  their  mouth.     Provided 

These  people  want,  besides,  but  little  room  ;  tbey  are  little, 
without  clothing,  and  require  no  bed,  at  the  most  a  seal's  skin 
under  them.  In  my  time,  it  was  generally  known  that  the 
married  people  slept  under  the  bench.  Both  the  Greenland- 
ers  and  the  sailors  who  had  Greenland  wives  spoke  of  it  in 
this  manner ;  and  I  myself  sometimes  observed  it,  on  my 
journies,  when  I  was  frequently  obliged  to  sleep  in  the  houses 
of  the  heathens.  The  husband,  without  speaking,  made  a 
sign  with  bis  eyes  to  his  wife,  and  retired  to  his  place ;  she 
took  no  notice,  but  remained  some  time  after  he  was  gone,  and 
then  followed  him. 


252 
with  this,  they  remain  out  the  whole  day  with* 
out  food,  often  in  the  severest  weather,  often 
in  danger  of  their  lives.  He  who  has  caught 
a  seal,  or  in  the  season  a  whiteflsh,  is  re- 
ceived with  joy  by  his  wife.  She  drag's  his 
prize  on  shore,  and  to  the  house,  in  which  many 
help  her,  begins  immediately  to  skin  it,  and 
cut  it  to  pieces,  and  puts  them,  without  wash- 
ing off  the  blood,  into  the  kettle,  which  already 
hangs  over  the  lamp.  The  man,  who,  mean- 
while, has  put  his  boat,  gun,  &c.  in  their  right 
places,  now  comes  in,  takes  off  his  cloak,  sits 
down,  and  waits  patiently  till  the  meat  is 
ready.  Meantime  he  relates  the  adventures 
of  the  day  on  the  chase.  If  there  are  any 
dried  herrings  in  the  house,  some  are  laid  be- 
fore him  on  the  ground,  till  the  dinner  is  ready, 
and  with  that,  and  a  draught  oi  water,  he  sa-r 
tisfies  the  first  calls  of  hunger.  On  the  other 
hand,  if  he  has  been  unfortunate  in  the  chase, 
and  there  are  no  dried  provisions  in  the  house, 
which  is  often  the  case  towards  the  end  of  the 
winter,  he  gets  nothing  at  all,  but  he  lays 
himself  quietly  down  to  sleep,  in  hope  of  bet- 
ter success  the  following  day. 

While  the  men  are  at  the  fishing  places,  and 
often  suffer  so  much  hardship,  the  women  are 


253 
rery  comfortable  in  their  warm  houses,  if  they 
have  any  thing  to  eat.     They  chat,  cut  out, 
and  sew.     They  steep  skins  in  the  urine-tub, 
and,  when  the  hair  is  loose,  they  scrape  it  off. 
I  could  scarcely  endure  the  stench  that  accom- 
panied this  work,  when  I  was  by  chance  pre* 
sent  5   they  themselves  do  not  mind  it.     By 
degrees,    when   they    are  thus  tanned,   they 
continue  their  preparation.     If  they  are  to  be 
white,  they  bleach  them  in  the  sun ;    if  they 
are  to  be  yellow  or  red,  they  dye  them.     The 
two  last  sorts  are  used  for  boots,  and  the  first 
for  cloaks.     Skins  which  are  to  keep  the  haif 
on,  to  be  used  for  winter  dresses,  do  not  re* 
quire  so  much  trouble.     The  women  scrape  off 
all  the  fat,  or  whatever  else  may  adhere  to  the 
fleshy  side:    after  this,  they  dry  them,   and 
lastly  make  them  pliable  by  rubbing,  before 
they   cut  them  out.     But   the  fat   which  is 
scraped  off  must  not  be  lost.     They  make  a 
cake  of  it,  which   looks  like  an  omelet,  and 
must  be  almost  putrid  before  it  is  eaten  ;  it 
must,   therefore,   taste   as  abominably   as   it 
smells. 

The  women  are  nothing  lets  than  cleanly  in 
their  domestic  employments.  The  meat  that 
is  to  be  eateu  is  cut  into  pieces  on  the  floor, 


254 
and,  without  cleaning  it  the  least  from  the 
blood  and  other  impurities,  put  into  the  ket- 
tle, which  they  wash  as  little  as  their  dishes 
before  they  use  it.  The  dogs,  sometimes,  lick 
the  kettles  and  dishes,  that  is  all.  I  have  seen 
a  mother  let  a  child  make  water  in  a  dish,  pour 
it  out,  and  then,  without  farther  ceremony, 
take  the  meat  out  of  the  kettle,  put  it  in  the 
dish,  and  present  it  to  the  guests,  who  eat  it 
with  a  good  appetite.  Haddocks,  and  other  fish, 
are  dressed  and  eaten  with  the  entrails.  On 
one  of  my  journeys,  I  had  had  no  warm  food 
for  several  days :  when  I  received  one  evening* 
two  small  haddocks,  I  asked  my  hostess  to 
boil  them  for  me  for  the  following  morning, 
which  she  very  readily  did  ;  but  as  she  set  them 
before  me  with  the  entrails  in,  I  lost  all  inclina- 
tion to  touch  them,  and  excused  myself  as 
well  as  I  could. 

They  boil  meat  and  fish  an  equal  time,  so  that 
when  the  former  is  hardly  more  than  half  done, 
the  latter  fall  to  pieces.  They  do  not  know 
how  to  roast  any  thing.  It  is  not  true  that 
they  drink  train  oil.  Only  in  case  they  have 
swallowed  down  a  water-beetle  with  the  water, 
and  cannot  get  soon  enough  to  the  Priest  for 
relief,  they  take  some  train  oil,  as  an  eme- 


255 
tic,  which  produces  the  effect  desired,  and  rids 
them  of  the  beetle.  This  is  proof  sufficient 
that  they  do  not  generally  drink  it.  But  they 
steep  angelica  stalks  in  train  oil.  A  woman 
chews  blubber,  spits  it  out,  and  continues  till 
there  is  enough.  In  this  the  angelica  stalks 
are  steeped  for  some  time,  then  taken  out,  and 
eaten  with  great  appetite,  by  way  of  desert. 
I  must  here  observe  that  this,  like  all  the  oil 
which  the  Greenlanders  use  in  their  lamps,  is 
unboiled,  white,  and  partly  clear.  It  smells 
pretty  much  like  raw  pork,  and  has  nothing  of 
the  disgusting  smell  of  boiled  train  oil,  which 
they  cannot  bear  even  in  their  lamps. 

The  mothers  lick  their  children  instead  of 
washing  them,  and,  when  they  comb  their 
heads,  eat  without  hesitation  what  they  catch. 
"  They  bite,"  say  they ;  "  they  must  be  bit- 
ten in  return."  It  is  also  usual  for  them 
to  revenge  themselves  in  the  following  manner 
on  their  tormentors :  Grown-up  persons  wrap 
the  beard  of  a  quill  round  a  thin  stick,  and, 
while  they  are  conversing  with  others,  pass  it 
down  their  back  in  quest  of  prey,  pull  it  up 
now  and  then,  as  fishermen  do  their  lines,  and 
eat  on  the  spot  what  they  have  taken.  1  have 
often  been  obliged  to  witness  this,  even  in  my 


256 
own  house.  But,  to  the  honour  of  our  baptized 
Greenlanders,  be  it  spoken,  with  many  other 
bad  habits,  they  lay  aside  this  also  ;  at  least, 
they  take  great  care  not  to  do  any  thing  in  our 
presence  which  might  offend  us. 

When  the  girls  are  fourteen  years  old,  and 
above,  they  begin  to  set  a  value  on  themselves. 
From  time  to  time,  they  wash  their  hair,  and 
the  Whole  body,  in  urine.  Thus  they  indeed 
become  clean  j  but,  as  their  cloaks  are  washed 
in  the  same,  they  smell  to  us  very  disagreea- 
bly j  though  to  the  Greenlanders  this  smell  is 
pleasant.  Young"  married  women,  who  are 
rich  in  their  way,  and  bear  children,  particu- 
larly boys,  also  wash  themselves,  chiefly  when 
they  pay  visits,  or  travel.  Elderly  women,  on 
the  contrary,  are  not  so  particular,  and  be- 
come gradually  more  and  more  indifferent  to 
dress.  A  widow  must  express  her  affliction, 
not  only  by  her  bowed  head  and  unornament- 
ed  hair,  but  also  by  the  neglect  of  hef  person 
and  dress.  If,  after  some  time  has  elapsed,  she 
begins  to  look  more  clean  and  neat,  this  is  a 
proof  that  she  is  not  indisposed  to  marry  again. 
But  she  cannot  entertain  any  hopes  of  it,  unless 
she  be  young",  well  behaved,  and  has  borne 
children  of  both  sexes,  or,  at  least,  sons. 


257 
An  elderly  widow  in  the  colony,  who  was  nei- 
ther well  behaved,  nor  a  mother,  fell  in  love 
with  a  young"  fellow,  who  was  the  best  looking 
Greenlander  in  the  place.  She  spoke  to  him  in 
a  friendly  manner,  without  his  regarding  it.  As 
he  did  not  understand  her,  she  so  far  disre- 
garded the  reserve  usual  in  her  sex  in  Green- 
land, especially  to  their  own  countrymen,  that 
she  courted  him.  Of  course,  he  gave  her  a  po- 
sitive refusal ;  but  still  she  did  not  give  up  her 
hopes.  She  came  very  modestly  to  me,  and 
told  me  in  confidence  that  Joergen  was  a  bad 
man,  who  was  good  for  nothing.  "  I  do  not 
believe  that,"  answered  I.  "  How  so  ?" — "  I 
am  ashamed  to  say  it,"  continued  she,  "  he 
wants  to  have  me." — "  And  you  !"  asked  I. — 
"  I  am  afraid  of  him,"  replied  she. — "  And 
for  what  reason  ?" — She  answered,  in  a  very 
low  voice,  "  A  few  days  ago  he  attempted  to 
seduce  me." — "  You  !"  said  I :  "  that  is  hard  to 
believe.  However,  I  will  send  and  speak  to 
him." 

I  sent  for  him.  He  was  one  of  the  young 
men  of  the  colony  whom  I  the  most  valued  ;  of 
a  good  understanding,  well  behaved,  and  ac- 
tive. He  came,  and  I  said,  "  What  is  this  I 
hear  of  you,  Joergen  ?    You  want  to  seduce 

l1 


258 
Zippora."— «  I !"  replied  he.  "  No,  Priest,  do 
not   believe  her.     She  is  wicked,  and  would 
seduce   me  ;  but    I  cannot  bear  her.     What 
shall  I  do  ?" — "  You  must  go  away  on  a  jour- 
ney for  a  time,' '  replied  I ;  "  perhaps  she  will  for- 
get you.    I  will  also  speak  to  her." — Yes,"  said 
he,  K  I  will  take  a  journey.     What  an  impu- 
dent woman  !"     He  accordingly   went  away 
for  some  weeks,  in  which  time  his  absence,  and, 
above  all,  the  ridicule  of  the  other  women,  cured 
her.     From  that  time  she  became  again,  what 
she  could  not  be  in  the  days  of  courtship, — the 
afflicted  widow,  who   entirely  neglected  her 
dress. 

The  Greenland  women  conceal  their  preg- 
nancy as  long  as  possible,  and  their  delivery  is 
generally  easy  :  yet  difficulties  sometimes  oc- 
cur which  require  the  presence  of  the  Minister. 
Their  midwives  understand  about  as  much  as 
our  village  midwives  did,  before  they  were 
regularly  instructed.  If  the  delivery  was  pro- 
tracted longer  than  usual,  the  husband  hurried 
to  me,  saying,  "  Priest !  come  with  me  1  My 
wife  should  be  delivered  ;  but  there  is  no  way." 
I  went  with  him,  made  the  midwife  give  me 
the  necessary  information,  and  gave  the  patient 
every  half  hour  Essentia  dulcis>  which  some- 


259 
times  promoted  the  delivery  :  in  extreme  dis- 
tress, I  gave  thirty  drops  of  oil  of  juniper  in 
water,  upon  which  strong  and  continued  pains 
succeeded,  and  then  the  delivery,  without  any 
bad  consequences  for  the  mother  or  child.  In 
this  country,  I  dare  not  apply  this  remedy,  in 
such  cases ;  but  happily  it  is  not  wanted.  In 
the  severest  pains,  no  loud  complaints  are  heard  j 
only  now, and  then  a  sigh  :  but  every  sigh  goes 
to  the  man's  heart.  In  silence,  and  with  his 
head  bowed  down,  he  sits,  and  accuses  himself 
as  the  author  of  his  wife's  sufferings. 


Chap.  XXII. 

The  Education  of  the  Cheenlanders. 


As  children,  especially  sons,  are  their  great- 
est treasure,  they  treat  them  with  much  care. 
In  their  earliest  infancy  they  are  naked,  and 
carried  upon  their  mother's  back  in  a  large 
cloak,  which  they  call  Amaut.  When  they 
take  notice,  she  caresses  them,  and  accustoms 
their  arms  to  the  motion  which  the  Green- 


260 
lander  makes  when  he  rows  his  Kajak.  As 
they  have  no  milk  food,  the  children  are  suck- 
led long- ;  three  or  four  years  perhaps  -,  but 
they  sometimes  bite  their  mother's  breast  se- 
verely :  she,  indeed,  expresses  some  pain,  and 
pinches  the  child  in  the  lip,  saying-,  "  You  lit- 
tle rogue  !".  but  caresses  it  at  the  same  time. 
This  pinching*  with  the  nails,  once  caused  a 
child  to  have  a  cancer  in  the  lip.  In  vain,  I 
attempted  to  check  it.  The  cancer  increased, 
and  ate  away  all  the  flesh  from  the  face.  The 
child  was,  at  length,  unable  to  swallow  down 
the  milk,  and  died  of  hung-er. 

When  the  boys  are  a  little  grown  up,  the 
father  gives  them  a  whip,  makes  them  a  little 
sledg-e,  and  trains  young-  dogs  to  draw  it. 
Thus  they  learn  by  times  to  drive,  and  properly 
to  manag-e  the  whip,  a  manoeuvre  which  an 
European  seldom  learns  perfectly.  In  a  few 
years,  the  father  begins,  at  his  leisure  hours,  to 
make  a  Kajak,  and  an  oar  ;  and  if  the  prepa- 
rations are  all  made,  and  the  age  of  the  boy 
allows  it,  the  father  takes  him  along-  with  him 
in  fine  weather,  keeps  him  at  his  side,  teaches 
him  to  row,  and,  after  he  has  had  some 
practice  in  this,  to  throw  the  dart.  When  he  is 
in  some  measure  able  to  row  the  broad  Kajak, 


261 
the  father  makes  it  narrower,  and  thus  more 
liable  to  upset,  but  at  the  same  time  lighter,  and 
more  manageable.  He  is  now  practised  to  keep 
himself  in  equilibrium  with  his  oar  ;  for  the 
oar  alone,  and  the  right  use  of  it,  preserves  the 
life  of  the  Kajak  rower  :  if  the  oar  is  broken  or 
lost,  he  generally  perishes.  The  father  some- 
times purposely  lets  him  upset  in  this  lighter 
Kajak,  to  make  him  bold,  and  to  teach  him 
to  employ  the  oar,  which  is  the  means  of  his 
safety.  Thus  the  son  learns,  at  his  father's  side, 
to  follow  his  profession,  and  in  time  to  gain 
subsistence  for  himself  and  his  family.  In  the 
evening,  on  their  return  home,  the  father  praises 
his  son  ;  the  latter  hears  the  account,  pleased 
indeed,  but  ashamed  ;  seldom  speaks  of  his 
deeds  without  being  called  upon,  and  rather 
modestly  undervalues  them.  The  mother, 
however,  smiles  with  pleasure  on  her  son. 

As  they  never  punish  their  children,  and 
very  seldom  even  reprove  them,  the  conse- 
quence is,  that  they  grow  up  in  the  habit  of 
doing  what  they  please,  and  sometimes  refuse 
to  obey  their  parents,  who,  however,  are  not 
angry  with  them  on  that  account.  Such  an 
education  does  not  seem  to  promise  much  good. 
We  have  therefore  the  more  reason  to  be  sur- 


262 
prised   at  the  different  behaviour  which  they 
shew    to  their   parents   when   they  grow  up. 
Then  they  respect,  and  love,  and  obey  them  ; 
procure  them   subsistence  when  they  are  old, 
and  are  happy  to  contribute   to  their  welfare. 
An  aged  father  never  suffers  want,  as  long"  as 
his  son  has  any  thing  ;  and  when  the  son  mar- 
ries, his  mother,  according  to  the  prevailing 
custom,  superintends  the  household  concerns, 
as  long  as  she  can,  and  will,  and  the  son's  wife 
obeys  and  serves  her.     This  change  of  beha- 
viour is  not  a  consequence  of  religion,  for  the 
heathens   shew  the  same.      If  they  are  asked 
how  these  capricious  children  become  so  good, 
they    generally    answer,    "  The  people  (the 
inhabitants    of  the  country)  are    always  so." 
Who  is  not  reminded  by  this  of  the  words  of 
St.  Paul  ?    Romans  ii,  v.  14  and  15. 

Of  the  education  of  the  girls,  there  is  not 
much  to  be  said.  They  are  accustomed  to 
little  domestic  employments,  according  to  their 
age  ;  but  their  life,  when  young,  is  more 
uniform,  conformable  to  their  destination  ; 
they  seem  to  feel  their  dependence,  and  wil- 
lingly to  submit  to  it.  At  a  certain  age,  how- 
ever, as  has  been  observed,  they  begin  to  va- 
lue themselves,  to  wash  and  adorn  their  hair 


263 
and  whole  body.  They  are  not  indifferent  to 
the  other  sex,  but  never  licentious ;  unless  it 
may  be  if  a  Dane  pays  his  court  to  them, 
and  promises  them  marriage.  Notwithstanding 
the  difference  in  their  countenances,  and  their 
whole  person,  there  is  a  mildness  in  their  manner 
which  soon  pleases  the  sailors  in  particular  : 
if  they  can  once  accustom  themselves  to  the 
smell,  the  rest  follows  of  course.  I  knew  a 
servant  of  the  Company,  who  was  in  every 
respect  a  man  of  good  family  and  education  ; 
and  who,  after  he  had  been  some  years  in 
Greenland,  felt  an  attachment  to  his  servant 
maid,  who  however  was  not  one  of  the  beau- 
ties of  the  country.  He  liked  the  girl,  but 
not  the  smell.  But,  as  she  came  to  him  every 
day,  he  at  last  yielded  to  his  passion.  He 
found  a  remedy  for  the  odour  which  was  so 
disagreeable  to  him,  and  made  use  of  it.  He 
sprinkled  her  with  scented  water,  first  occasi- 
onally as  she  passed  him,  then  more  publicly, 
which  produced  the  effect  desired.  He  then  asked 
her  hand,  and,  as  may  be  supposed,  did  not  meet 
with  a  refusal.  Their  marriage  was  tolerably 
happy,  and  they  had  many  children ;  but  the 
wife  always  smelt  afterwards  of  lavender  water. 


264 

Chap.  XXIII. 

Miscellaneous  Information. 


■+++*+++* 


L 

Under  my  windows  towards  the  south, 
I  made  a  little  garden,  and  had  it  surrounded 
with  a  palisade.  The  ground  was  rocky,  and 
the  earth  not  deep  enough  for  the  spade,  nor 
rich  enough  for  vegetation.  In  the  neighbour- 
hood I  found  good  earth,  and,  with  the  help  of 
my  wife,  brought  in  a  basket  to  our  garden 
so  much  as  we  thought  sufficient.  We  let  it 
lie  till  the  next  year,  when  I  dug  it  up  and 
sowed  it.  It  was  not  till  July  that  the  ground 
was  so  far  thawed,  that  it  could  be  dug  up  : 
on  the  7th,  we  sowed  it49  ;  on  the  15th,  the 
plants  began  to  shoot  up  in  most  of  the  beds. 
So  far  to  the  north,  and  so  near  the  Iseljord, 
a  garden  was  an  uncommon  sight ;  but  the 
uncommonly  rapid  growth  which  daily  pro- 
mised to  crown  our  hopes,  was  also  a  singular 

(49)  But  not  every  year  so  late.  Another  year  I  could  sow 
on  the  30th  of  June ;  one  year,  even  the  7th :  but  then  the 
plant  did  not  come  up  before  the  26th. 


265 
but  very  agreeable  sight  to  us.  Cabbage  grew 
extremely  well.  After  that  time,  we  had  al- 
ways a  sufficient  stock  for  the  winter  ;  but  it 
was  necessary  to  sow  it  very  thin,  and  to  pull 
up  the  plants  which  stood  too  thick  ;  as  the 
short  summer  did  not  admit  of  transplanting 
them.  Turnips  grew  as  large  as  a  moderate 
tea-cup,  lost  their  bitter  taste,  and  became 
agreeably  sweet  :  these,  too,  always  throve 
well.  Carrots  in  general  grew  not  thicker 
than  a  tobacco-pipe,  but  preserved  their 
usual  taste.  We  had  plenty  of  chervil  and 
cresses :  parsley,  celery,  and  beans,  would  not 
grow.  I  sowed  peas  ;  they  shot  up  vigo- 
rously, and  sometimes  blossomed  ;  but  they 
did  not  produce  any  thing.  I  planted  pota- 
toes, but  they  grew  no  bigger  than  a  pea.  A 
little  barley  shot  up  quick,  but  the  early  frost 
destroyed  it.  Every  autumn  I  gave  my  gar- 
den a  layer  of  heath  ashes,  which  was  very 
serviceable  to  it.  In  this  manner  we  had,  in 
some  years,  both  advantage  and  pleasure  of  our 
little  plantation;  but  the  overflowing  of  the 
stream,  as  I  have  related  in  a  former  chapter, 
destroyed  the  garden,  and  carried  off  all  the 
soil.  However,  we  did  not  lose  our  courage 
on  this  account,  but  began  our  work  anew, 

m  m 


266 
and  accomplished  it  with  greater  trouble  than 
the  first  time  towards  the  end  of  summer,  so  that 
we  were  able  to  sow  the  garden  the  following 
year.  But  that  was  the  only  year  that  we  en- 
joyed the  fruits  of  it.  We  left  Greenland,  and 
almost  a  year  elapsed  before  my  successor 
arrived.  How  he  found  the  garden,  which  had 
been  so  long  without  an  owner,  and  what  be- 
came of  it  afterwards,  is  unknown  tome. 

II. 

Both  land  and  sea  are  covered,  during  the 
greatest  part  of  the  summer,  with  a  disagree- 
able fog,  and  in  winter,  before  the  ice  is  hard, 
with  frozen  vapours ;  but  notwithstanding  this, 
the  climate  is  healthy,  and  but  few  diseases  are 
known  there.  The  Greenlanders,  indeed,  some- 
times suffer  by  hemorrhage,  which  is  painful, 
but  not  so  contagious,  nor  so  fatal,  as  among 
us.  They  have,  sometimes,  spitting  of  blood. 
The  latter  shortens  the  life ;  with  the  first  they 
may  suffer  many  years  :  during  my  time,  one 
died  of  diabetes.  Their  external  diseases  are 
particularly  swellings,  which  are  dispersed  by 
plaister  of  melilot  •,  very  bad  boils,  which,  if 
they  are  not  sufficiently  pressed  out,  and  care- 
fully healed,  spread  from  one  place  to  another ; 


267 
and  weak  eyes,  particularly  in  old  age.  How- 
ever, they  do  not  grow  old  even  when  they  die 
on  the  sick  bed,  and  many  are  drowned.  A  man 
of  fifty  years  of  age  generally  looks  as  infirm 
as  if  he  were  near  seventy.  As  the  women  of- 
ten grow  older,  and  at  the  same  age  enjoy  bet- 
ter health,  if  they  do  not  entirely  neglect 
themselves,  it  is  probable  that  the  many  hard- 
ships which  the  men  endure  almost  daily  in 
their  fishery,  are  the  principal  cause  of  their 
early  old  age  and  death.  Contagious  diseases, 
however,  carry  many  away,  grown-up  persons 
as  well  as  children.  In  a  foregoing  chapter, 
I  have  related  the  symptoms  of  them  j  but  I 
know  not  by  what  name  to  call  them. 

If  I  except  the  scurvy,  the  Europeans  are  sub- 
ject to  no  other  diseases  which  can  be  ascribed 
to  the  country  or  the  air ;  and  the  remedies 
against  it  are,  constant  exercise  and  cochlearia. 
As  the  Greenlanders  make  no  use  of  this  plant, 
and  are  not  tormented  by  this  disease,  one  might 
be  tempted  to  think,  that  kind  Providence  had 
caused  it  to  grow  for  the  Europeans,  who  are 
greatly  in  need  of  it.  The  scurvy  is  a  singu- 
lar disorder.  It  can  be  a  long  time  in  the  body 
without  occasioning  any  inconvenience,  except 
a  kind  of  lethargy  ;  but  if  the  patient  does  not 


268 
Use  cochlearia,  and  take  daily  exercise,  especi- 
ally in  the   beginning,   he  may   fall  into  a 
slumber   under   it,    and   never   more   awake. 
Sometimes  it  causes  a  not  unpleasant  irrita- 
tion, an  excitement,  if  I  may  call  it  so,  in  the 
very  marrow  of  the  bones,  and  then  it  is  high 
time  to  apply  the  remedies,  if  the  use  of  them 
has  been  neglected.    The  gums  swell,  and  de- 
tach themselves  from  the  teeth,  which  become 
loose,  if  they  do  not  fall  out.  When  the  scurvy 
at  length  breaks   out  in  brown  and  yellow 
spots  on  the  legs  and  thighs,  and  makes  them 
as  hard  as  a  board,  the  patient   is  generally 
saved  ;  but  he  must  be  extremely  careful  to 
use  the  cochlearia,  and  take  exercise  when  he  has 
it  in  his  power.     I  was  not  much  subject  to  this 
disorder  •,  but,  as  my  daily  occupation  allowed 
me  only  one  or  two  hours  to  walk  about  on 
Saturdays,  and  as  I  generally  suffered  in  the 
winter  from  another  disorder,  which  hindered  me 
from  taking  much  exercise ;  I  was,  sometimes, 
attacked  by  the  scurvy,   and   can,   therefore, 
describe  it  from  experience.    One  fine  day,  we 
resolved  to  pay  a  visit  to  the  Provost  Sverdrup, 
and,  accompanied  by  a  Greenland  boy,  went 
over  the  isefjord,  between  the  icebergs.  While 
we  were  on  the  way,  an  iceberg,  about  half  a 


269 
mile  from  us,  fell,  and,  in  a  few  minutes,  the 
solid  ice  under  us  broke.  "  To  land  !  to 
land!"  cried  the  boy,  and  ran:  the  Clergy- 
man ran  with  him :  of  course,  1  would  not  re- 
main behind.  But  as  I  was  hastening-  to  get 
over  a  broad  cleft,  which  the  falling  of  the 
iceberg  had  caused,  the  scurvy  held  me  fixed 
to  the  ice,  so  that  I  could  not  stir  from  the 
spot :  I  was,  therefore,  obliged  to  submit  to 
my  fate,  and  await  the  event.  After  an  in- 
terval of  ten  or  twelve  minutes,  I  was  again 
able  to  walk  slowly  ;  reached  the  land,  at  last, 
over  clefts  and  pieces  of  ice  ;  and  gave  my 
companions  a  gentle,  but  well  merited  re- 
proof. 

III. 

My  salary  was  150  dollars  Danish  cur- 
rency per  annum  ;  and  the  allowance  of  pro- 
visions for  myself  and  my  wife,  was,  per  week, 
ten  pounds  and  a  half  of  bread,  three  pounds 
of  butter,  two  pounds  of  bacon,  two  pounds 
of  stockfish,  one  eighth  of  a  bushel  of  peeled 
barley,  and  the  same  quantity  of  pease.  Be- 
sides, fifty  dollars  per  annum  were  allowed  me 
for  coffee,  sugar,  brandy,  wine,  and  groceries 
in  general.   It  may  be  easily  imagined,  that,  in 


2/0 

a  country  where  money  is  unknown,  and  the 
daily  necessaries  of  life  must  be  procured  by 
barter,  it  was  necessary  to  be  very  economical ; 
but  it  was  often  impossible.  I  will  say  no- 
thing1 of  the  assistance  which  the  Greenlanders 
now  and  then  required  ;  but  the  hospitality 
introduced  among  the  Europeans,  consumed  a 
great  deal.  In  winter,  the  servants  of  the 
Company  have  no  employment.  They,  there- 
fore, continually  drive  from  one  place  to  an- 
other to  pay  visits,  and  at  every  place,  if  it  is 
possible,  are  joined  by  new  companions,  and, 
at  last,  make  a  caravan  ;  the  true  object  of 
whose  journeys  is,  in  fact,  to  kill  time,  to  en- 
joy good  cheer  in  the  houses  of  others,  and  to 
give  them  good  cheer  in  return,  but  which  has 
otherwise  great  advantages.  In  the  colonies 
where  there  is  a  clergyman,  a  merchant  and 
an  assistant,  each  take  part  in  giving  the  enter- 
tainment, which  was  thus  no  great  burden  to 
any  of  them.  I,  on  the  other  hand,  was  alone 
at  Claushavn,  bore  alone  the  cost  of  the  enter- 
tainment, but  also  had  alone  the  honour  of 
shewing  my  hospitality.  Hence,  and  from 
our  limited  income,  arose  the  long  fasts,  which 
I  have  mentioned  before,  and  which  others,  it 
is  true,  also  felt,  but  not  in  the  same  degree 
as  we. 


271 
We  were,  however,  never  in  Want  of  the 
first  necessaries  of  life  ;  for  if  the  portions  al- 
lowed were  not  sufficient,  as  was  often  the 
case50,  we  could  obtain  the  rest  upon  account. 
But  these  portions  were  often  very  moderate, 
sometimes  not  to  be  eaten.  Among  many 
causes,  a  principal  one  is,  that  the  provision 
must  be  one  year  in  the  country  before  we 
dared  to  touch  it.  This  precaution  protected 
us  against  want,  in  the  event  of  a  ship's 
being  lost ;  but  the  consequence  of  it  was,  old 
and  often  bad  provisions.  One  year,  in  parti- 
cular, the  bread  (or  biscuit  called  skonrogiie) 
was  so  full  of  spiders  and  cobwebs,  that  we 
were  obliged  always  to  have  a  whisk  by  us 
when  we  were  eating.  The  butter  was  fre- 
quently not  fit  to  eat  :  in  our  country,  it  would 
have  been  regarded  as  common  grease.  The 
bacon  and  the  meat  were  often  rusty  and 
yellow ;  only  hunger  and  custom  could 
make  them  go  down.  Happily,  we  took  the 
two  last  articles  seldom,  because  they  promote 
scurvy  ;  and  though  the  butter  was  often  very 
indifferent,  yet,  at  other  times,  it  was  better, 
and  we  were  contented.  In  winter,  we  had 
no  want  of  fresh  provisions.     I  could,  in  some 

(50)  Some  part  was  obliged  to  serve,  instead  of  money,  to 
purchase  fish,  game,  &c. 


272 
measure,  reckon  upon  a  hare  every  week  :    we 
had  snow-fowl    (ryper)    in   abundance,    and 
haddock  almost  every  day.     In   summer,  on 
the  other  hand,  we  were  forced   to  be  content 
with  young-  sea  mews,   if  we  wished  to  taste 
fresh  meat ;  but  then,  besides  haddock,  we  had 
trout,  and  salmon  trout  -,   the  former  from  the 
fresh  water  lakes,  the  latter  from  the  mouths  of 
the  streams  and  rivers.    One  summer,  we  went 
ourselves  to  a  place,  some  miles  from  the  co- 
lony, to  catch  salmon  trout,   and  staid  there 
ten  or  twelve  days.     The  winter  before,  my 
wife   had   made  two  fishing-nets :    I   and    a 
Greenlander  spread  the  nets,  and  attended  to 
the  fishery,  while  my  wife  and  two  maids  were 
employed  in  salting-  and  smoking.     Some  of 
the   fish    were  indeed   small,  but  we  caught 
them  of  the  weight  of  eight,  nine,   and  even 
of  ten  pounds,  and  in  such  numbers,  that  we 
had  enough  for  our  friends  in  the  neighbour- 
hood, who  could  not  take  part  in  the  fishery 
themselves,  and  had  even  some  to  spare  for  our 
friends  in  our  own  country. 

IV. 

The  arrival  of  the  vessels  from  our  native 
country  gave  us  much  pleasure  :  we  then 
received  news  from  our  relations  and  friends, 


273 
the  newspapers  for  a  whole  year,  books,  &c; 
our  wants  were  supplied,  and  our  fasting-  sea- 
son ceased.  This  joy  was,  however,  often 
lessened  and  embittered  by  brandy  and  drunk- 
enness. The  sailors  having"  been  long  deprived 
of  that  liquor,  were,  therefore,  not  able  to 
bear  so  much,  and  drank  more.  Nay,  I  even 
saw  now  and  then  a  Greenlander  drunk  on 
these  days,  and,  to  be  thoroughly  intoxicated 
once  or  twice,  is  sufficient  to  destroy  the  health 
of  a  Greenlander  for  ever.  Disorders  some- 
times ensue.  Thus,  two  drunken  sailors  would 
once  have  certainly  killed  one  of  the  sons  of 
the  Catechist,  had  not  the  courage  of  my  wife 
saved  him  in  time.  Being  in  the  kitchen,  she 
heard  a  noise  in  the  room  of  the  man-servant, 
and  asked  a  Greenlander  who  was  present, 
what  it  meant :  he  said,  they  were  angry  with 
the  young  man,  and  were,  certainly,  going-  to 
kill  him.  Without  informing"  the  assistant, 
from  Christianshaab,  and  me  (which  would 
have  caused  a  delay,  though  we  were  near), 
she  said  to  the  Greenlander,  "  Help  me  to 
force  open  the  door  !"  He  did  so  ;  she  rushed 
in,  pushed  the  drunken  men  aside,  raised  the 
young"  man,  who  was  almost  strangled,  and 
untied  his  neckcloth,  by  which  he  was  enabled 

n  n 


274 
to  breathe  freely,  and  was  saved.  Now,  but 
not  before,  she  perceived  she  was  wounded  in 
the  arm,  and  bleeding*  (a  third  drunken  man 
had  endeavoured  to  hold  the  door  fast  inside, 
and  prevent  her  entering-)  :  she  then  bound  a 
handkerchief  round  her  arm,  and  came  after- 
wards to  us,  but  did  not  mention  what  had 
happened.  It  was  not  till  some  days  after, 
when  the  worst  of  these  sailors  had  been  guilty 
of  insubordination,  and  was  condemned  to  be 
sent  home,  that  she  related  the  circumstance. 
Such,  and  similar  events,  naturally  lessened  our 
joy ;  but  we  did  not  see  the  departure  of  the 
ships  with  indifference.  We  remained  solita- 
ry and  forsaken.  A  whole  year  lay  between 
us  and  our  country  ;  we  looked  forward  to  the 
yet  hidden  events  of  a  whole  year.  But  these 
involuntary  feelings  were  but  the  feelings  of  a 
moment.  What  every  year  made  a  more  last- 
ing" impression,  was  the  departure  of  the  Sun, 
about  the  26th  of  November. 

A  few  days  before,  I  ascended  the  rocks  at 
noon,  to  behold  the  Sun  once  more ;  and 
when,  on  the  26th,  he  just  shewed  his  faint 
but  mild  light,  before  he  vanished  for  a  long 
period,  I  sorrowfully  bade  him  farewel. 
The  days  immediately  succeeding  were  still 


275 
tolerable ;  but,  in  December,  it  was  twilight 
even  at  noon.  At  that  hour,  I  could  scarcely 
read  a  book,  when  standing*  at  the  window. 
Of  course,  the  candles  were  always  kept  burn- 
ing. The  rivulet  roared,  the  stormy  sea 
beat  against  the  rocks,  on  which  my  dwelling 
stood,  and  frequently  dashed  its  spray  against 
the  windows :  the  dogs  howled51.  I  was  often 
indisposed.  In  short,  every  thing  combined 
to  make  these  weeks  unpleasant :  but  I  found 
that  employment  is  a  sure  remedy  against 
ennui,  and,  weak  as  I  was,  I  had,  both  morn- 
ing and  evening,  employment  enough.  When 
I  travelled  at  Christmas  to  Christianshaab, 
we  were  assisted  by  the  light  of  the  Moon,  if 
the  sky  was  clear,  and  by  the  cheerful  nothern 
lights,  which  often  seemed  to  float  close  by  us. 
The  reader  may  conclude  from  this,  with  what 
heartfelt  joy  we  saw  the  Sun  return.  On  the 
12th  of  January,  if  the  weather  was  fine, 
we  could  see  its  light  on  the  high  rocks,  and, 
on  the  1 3th  or  1 4th,  I  saw  himself,  glorious, 

(51)  The  Greenland  dogs  do  not  bark  loud,  but  only  growl 
sometimes ;  but  tbey  howl  every  day  at  certain  hours.  They 
then  assemble  in  troops,  and  turn  their  snouts  up  in  the  air. 
At  first,  this  howling  is  abominable  and  deafening;  but,  after- 
wards, one  gets  used  to  it,  and  even  finds  it  amusing.  It  lasts 
about  a  quarter  of  an  hour;  after  which  the  Company  breaks  up. 


276 
and  as  if  new  created,  but  only  for  a  few 
moments.  We  now  felt  as  if  we  had  conquered 
all  the  troubles  of  the  year,  as  if  we  had  re- 
covered health  and  life.  Our  thoughts  seemed 
more  clear  ;  hope  looked  forward  to  spring", 
slimmer,  and  ships — all  happy  prospects :  we 
even  seemed  to  breathe  more  freely.  Here 
(in  Denmark)  we  value  too  little  the  daily 
presence  of  the  Sun,  because  we  are  never 
deprived  of  it.  When  we  complain  of  the 
short  days  in  December,  let  us  think  on  the 
dark  days  in  Greenland,  and  thank  God  for 
the  December  light. 

According  to  the  ordinance  of  the  Creator,  an 
indemnity  was  due  to  us  for  the  long  absence  of 
the  Sun,  and  we  obtained  it.  After  the  24th  of 
May,  he  did  not  again  set  at  night,  rose  till  the 
summer  solstice,  higher  and  higher,  and  then 
declined  a  little  every  night ;  and,  about  the 
20th  of  July,  dipped  again,  at  night,  under  the 
horizon.  This  dipping  was,  at  first,  imper- 
ceptible ;  only  the  night  frosts  put  us  in  mind 
of  it.  It  would  scarcely  be  believed,  that 
water  which  was  boiled  on  the  24th  of  July 
(which  was  a  very  warm  day),  at  five  o'clock 
in  the  afternoon,  could  be  covered  with  a 
crust  of  ice  at  eleven  o'clock  the  same  evening; 


277 
and  yet  this  was  the  case.     I  saw  both  the 
boiling-  of  the  water,    and   the  ice  upon  it. 
The   Greenlanders  and  the  Europeans   gene- 
rally travel  by   night,   while  the  Sun  is  up ; 
for   then  the  sky   is  clear,   the  air  generally 
calm,   the  coolness  agreeable.     The  days,  on 
the  contrary,  are  foggy,   the  heat  violent,  and 
the  blood-thirsty  gnats  a  real  torment.     To- 
wards the  solstice,    it   seems  to  me  that  the 
Sun,   both  in  its  height  in  the  sky,  and   its 
warmth,  is  much  the  same  as  in  this  country 
at  noon  in  December.     It  was  a  fine  sight  to 
behold  him  proceed  from  the  west  to  the  north, 
thence  to  the  east,   and  again  reascend  from 
the  east  in  majesty  and  splendour.     The  daily 
change  of  heat  and  cold,  or  at  least  coolness, 
after  sunset  in  summer,  deserved  more  atten- 
tion, in  respect  to  clothing,  than  we  thought  fit 
to  pay  to  it.     However,  few  seemed  to  suffer 
by  their  indifference. 

V. 

A  violent  storm  from  the  south-east  occa- 
sioned a  Greenlander  to  come  to  me.  "It  is 
terrible  weather,"  said  he.  "  Yes,"  answered 
I,   u  it  is  good  that  all  the  Kajaks  are  come 


278 
home."— "  This  night,"  continued  he,  "I 
dreamt  that  the  air  and  sea  became  so  stormy  ; 
it  was  a  strange  dream." — "  How  so  ?"  asked 
I. — "  It  appeared  to  me,"  answered  he,  "  to 
blow  violently  from  the  south-east;  the  sea 
was  greatly  agitated ;  the  heavens  moved  ;  and 
the  earth  quaked.  Upon  this,  the  heavens 
opened,  and  I  saw  our  Redeemer.  He  was 
extremely  glorious  to  behold  :  his  eyes  resem- 
bled the  Sun,  but  I  did  not  see  any  body. 
When  he  appeared  in  the  air,  I  heard  a  loud 
noise  ;  the  earth  was  broken  into  pieces,  and 
sunk  into  the  abyss.  Upon  this,  it  appear- 
ed to  me  as  if  every  body  was  brought  before 
him.  The  multitude  was  very  great :  and  I 
heard  him  say  to  the  believers,  Fear  not ;  I  am 
come  to  redeem  you  !  I  now  awoke,  full  of 
astonishment  and  terror  at  what  I  had  seen 
and  heard,  awaked  the  others  in  the  house, 
and  related  to  them  my  dream.  Now,  as 
there  is  such  a  terrible  storm  to-day,  they  are 
all  much  afraid,  particularly  my  wife.  Tell 
me,  Do  you  think  that  the  world  shall  now  be 
at  an  end  ?" — He  waited  for  my  answer,  in 
order,  as  he  said,  to  be  able  to  satisfy  his  fa- 
mily, by  my  words,  and  received  it. 


279 


VI. 

I  was  for   a  fortnight  constituted  Bishop, 
of  which  the  following"  was  the  occasion.     A 
young  Clergyman,  who  supported  himself  and 
his   family   by   giving  private   lessons,    in   a 
town  in  Fiihnen,   met  with  Hans  Egede's  ac- 
count of  Greenland.     He  had  scarcely  read 
it  when  Egede's  spirit,  as  it  were,  animated 
him  ;   he  wished  also  to  serve  in  Greenland, 
and  follow  Egede's   steps.     With  this  inten- 
tion,  he  wrote  to  the  younger  P.  Egede,  to 
be  employed  in  the  Mission  ;   but  received  for 
answer,  that  there  was  no   room  for  a  Semi- 
narist,  and  that  it  would  be  difficult  for  him, 
as  a  married  man,   to  live   at  Copenhagen, 
while  he  was  preparing  himself,  as  far  as  pos- 
sible, for  the  office  of  a  Missionary.     Dissatis- 
fied with  this  answer,  he  travelled  to  the  capi- 
tal, and  presented  himself  to  the  Missionary 
College,   which  he  entirely  gained  in  his  fa- 
vour.    He  said,  that  it  was  the  same  to  him 
whether  he  went  to  Greenland  as  a  Clergyman 
or  a  Catechist,  if  he  only  went  there,  and  could 
be  of  service.    He  was  sent  to  me,  for  the  pur- 
pose of  becoming  a  Catechist  at  Christianshaab, 
because  they  thought  that  I  should  do  justice  to 


280 

his  merit ;  and  recommended  him  to  my  care 
and  direction,  adding-  that,  from  a  particular 
and  remarkable  impulse,  he  had  desired  to  be 
employed  in  the  Greenland  Mission ;  and  that 
it  would  depend  upon  my  testimony  the  fol- 
lowing year,  whether  the  College  would  pro- 
pose him  to  his  Majesty  as  a  Missionary.  As 
he  was  wholly  unacquainted  with  the  lan- 
guage, a  year  would,  certainly,  not  be  suffi- 
cient for  him  to  learn  something  himself,  and, 
at  the  same  time,  give  proofs  of  his  ability  to 
instruct  others :  however,  I  cannot  deny  him 
docility,  and  attention  to  my  advice.  After 
the  lapse  of  a  year,  I  gave  him  a  good  testi- 
mony j  the  College  expected  it  so.  I  wrote, 
indeed,  nothing  more  than  the  truth,  but  every 
thing-  that  I  could  write  with  truth  ;  and  the 
consequence  was,  that,  the  year  following-,  this 
College  gave  him  the  appointment  from  his 
Majesty  of  Missionary,  and  sent  me  the  order 
to  examine  and  ordain  him ;  to  place  him  as  a 
regular  teacher  at  the  colony  at  Christianshaab, 
in  order,  as  it  was  said,  to  give  me  some  relief 
in  my  many  official  journies  to  that  place, 
which  journies  were,  probably,  the  cause  of 
my  continued  indisposition.  However  kind 
this  appeared  to  be,  the  real  cause  was,  that  no 


281 
Missionary  place  was  vacant,  and  it  was  deter- 
mined that  the  man  should  be  employed,  and 
act  independently ;  for,  when  he  was  removed 
some  years  after,  to  Egedesminde,  I  was  obliged 
again  to  take  upon  me  the  colony  at  Christ- 
ianshaab.  I  had  lately  been  ill,  and,  there- 
fore, refused  to  take  upon  me  this  labour, 
which  now  no  longer  concerned  me  ;  but  they 
did  not  cease  to  persuade  me,  and  I  was  forced 
to  give  way. 

The  preparation,  as  well  as  the  act  itself, 
were  performed  entirely  according  to  the  Ri- 
tual, and  the  other  regulations.  The  inhabi- 
tants of  the  colony,  the  crews  of  the  ships, 
and  the  Greenlanders,  had  never  seen  the  con- 
secration of  a  Priest.  It  pleased  them  very 
much,  but  no  part  of  it  gave  them  such  extra- 
ordinary satisfaction  as  the  Latin  mass,  of 
which  they  did  not  understand  a  word.  I  had 
translated  those  prayers,  which,  in  this  case, 
seemed  to  be  the  best ;  but  both  my  colleague, 
whom  I  had  requested  to  be  present  at  the  or- 
dination, and  he  who  was  to  be  ordained, 
were  of  opinion  that  I  was  not  entitled  to  take 
this  liberty.  Some  days  after  the  ordination, 
I  gave  him  his  appointment,  introduced  him, 
as  Provost,  the  next  Sunday,  and  sunk  back 

o  o 


282 
to  what  I  really  was,  and  what  I  may  still  feel 
a  certain  satisfaction  in  remembering-  to  have 
been52.  After  a  residence  of  a  few  years,  our 
man  left  Greenland,  was  well  received,  obtain- 
ed, as  a  reward,  a  good  living  in  a  town  in 
Jutland,  became  Provost,  and  died. 

VII. 

The  Greenland  children  are  as  white  when 
they  are  born  as  ours ;  but  they  have  a  blue 
spot  in  the  skin,  upon  or  above  the  loins, 
about  three  quarters  of  an  inch  in  diameter. 
When  they  grow  up,  this  spot  extends  gradual- 
ly over  the  whole  body,  and  is,  perhaps,  the 
cause  of  the  rather  darker  colour  of  it.  I  had 
often  an  opportunity  of  seeing  these  spots,  as 
the  Greenland  women,  at  the  time  of  my 
arrival,  brought  their  new-born  children,  ac- 
cording to  the  custom,  naked,  to  be  christened. 

(52)  Soon  after  our  return  from  Greenland,  we  were  invited 
to  a  family  party,  in  which  there  was  one  of  my  early  friends. 
The  company  wished  to  know  something  about  Greenland, 
and  our  adventures  there  ;  and  we  related.  In  the  middle  of 
the  conversation,  my  friend  whispered  in  my  ear  (but  loud 
enough  to  be  heard),  with  much  self-complacency :  "  But,  did 
you  do  any  good  in  Greenland  Y'  I  cannot  describe  my  feel- 
ings  at  this  question,  only  I  remember  that  I  left  it  unan- 
swered. 


283 
Though  we  daily  saw  naked  children,  yet 
this  nakedness  was  very  disagreeable  to  me 
in  a  religious  ceremony.  My  wife,  therefore, 
made  a  decent  christening-dress,  which  was 
put  on  every  child  that  was  to  be  baptized. 
On  such  occasions,  when  she  spread  a  hand- 
somely embroidered  altar-cloth,  of  nankeen, 
over  the  table,  procured  and  made  by  herself, 
lighted53  the  candles  for  the  communion, 
and  daily  carried,  with  the  servant,  before 
and  after  school-time,  the  benches  in  and  out, 
or,  when  I  was  absent  or  ill,  dressed  the  wound- 
ed, and,  after  my  direction3*,  gave  them  me- 
dicine ;  or,  in  the  hardest  winters,  distributed 
bacon  and  meat  to  poor  widows  and  children  ; 
I  called  her,  with  a  certain  sacred  pleasure, 
The  Servant  of  the  Church.  The  good  Phebe 
(Romans,  chap,  xvi,  verse  1  and  2)  scarcely 
deserved  this  name  more  than  she. 

VIII. 

The  Green  Islands,  which  lie  about  eight 
miles  from  Claushavn,  and  which  I  often  visited 
on  my  journies  of  business  to  the  south,  have 

(53)  Namely,  of  a  Sunday. 

(54)  I  was  the  Doctor.     She  wa»,  with  all  her  good  will, 
only  my  assistant. 


284 
some  resemblance  with  Denmark.  The  rocks 
are  not  high,  but  green,  and  covered  with 
grass,  like  the  vallies.  The  eye  dwells  with 
pleasure  on  this  verdant  carpet.  The  shore  is 
covered  with  what  is  called  silver  sand,  of 
which  we  always  took  home  a  good  quantity. 
It  does  not  shine  as  our  silver  sand  does,  but 
it  contains  particles  of  iron ;  and  I  must  be 
much  mistaken  if  these  rocks  do  not  contain 
iron.  Perhaps  they  would  deserve  to  be  more 
accurately  examined,  especially  as  Norway 
does  not  belong  to  us  now. 

IX. 

The  island  of  Disco  has  coals,  the  veins  of 
which  are  said  to  extend  far  into  the  sea.  They 
are  not  of  the  usual  kind,  but  are  lighter, 
more  flaky  -,  and  do  not  give,  indeed,  such  a 
strong  heat  as  the  English,  but  burn  clear, 
and  have  not  the  disagreeable  smell  that 
coals  generally  have.  Shortly  after  my  return, 
it  is  said  to  have  been  proposed  to  examine 
and  open  these  mines,  and,  at  least,  to  procure 
from  them  sufficient  fuel  for  the  supply  of  the 
colonies ;  but  I  do  not  know  whether  the  pro- 
posal was  carried  into  execution,  or  whether  the 
produce  would  pay  for  the  expense. 


285 

X. 

Angelica  grows  on  Disco  island,  and  there 
only  in  the  whole  bay.  The  Greenlanders 
use,  particularly,  the  stalks,  and  put  them,  as  is 
mentioned  above,  in  fresh  blubber,  which  they 
chew  and  then  spit  over  it ;  and  we  use,  espe- 
cially when  we  visit  the  sick,  or  on  other  occa- 
sions, the  dried  roots  to  chew.  The  former 
relate  that  a  gTeat  enchanter,  in  ancient  times, 
came  in  his  Kajak,  and  towed  the  island  of 
Disco,  from  the  south  into  the  bay,  merely  for 
the  sake  of  this  plant,  of  which  the  people  in 
this  country  were  in  want.  They  even  shew 
a  hole  in  a  rock,  in  which  he  fastened  his 
tow-rope.  It  is  very  singular  that  the  Green- 
landers  call  this  plant,  as  the  Norwegians  do, 
Qvane  ;  perhaps  they  have  the  name  from  the 
ancient  Norwegians. 

XI. 

I  sometimes  botanized,  and  had  several  good 
and  well  preserved  specimens  of  the  plants  in 
the  neighbourhood  ;  but  as  I  was  not  versed  in 
the  science,  and  my  collection  was  not  com- 
plete, I  left  it  to  my  friend  and  neighbour, 
Provost  Sverdrup,  who  had  a  beautiful  Her- 


286 
barium  ;  and  he  found,  among  the  plants  which 
I  had  gathered,  several  varieties,  though  they 
had  grown  so  near  to  his  own.  My  old  friend 
Professor  Fabricius  has  communicated  much 
interesting  information  in  this  branch,  as  well 
as  in  many  others,  relative  to  the  Natural 
History  of  Greenland,  in  his  Fauna  Gronlan- 
dica,  which  is  known  and  esteemed  in  foreign 
countries. 

XII. 

His  Royal  Highness  the  Hereditary  Prince 
Frederic  had  graciously  given  orders,  that  the 
Captain  of  a  whale-ship  should  touch  at  the 
colony  of  Claushavn,  and  take  me  and  my 
family  with  him,  and  treat  us  in  such  a  man- 
ner, as  he  could  answer  for  at  his  return. 
But  the  Directors  had,  at  the  same  time, 
fixed  his  departure  from  Greenland,  which 
was  necessary,  on  account  of  the  plan  that 
they  had  then  in  view.  It  was,  that  the 
captain,  after  his  return  home,  should  be 
back  in  Greenland  before  the  beginning  of  the 
winter,  in  order  to  winter  there,  and  be  able 
to  go  out  so  much  the  sooner  in  the  spring,  on 
the  fishery.  Unluckily,  the  ice  lay  this  year 
long  in  the  gulph  ;  time  passed  away,  and  he 


287 
was  obliged  to  sail  home  without  being*  able  to 
reach  us.     I  had  been  very  weakly  the  preced- 
ing winter,  and  the  return  to  my  country,  for 
which  I   really  wished,  was  necessary  for   my 
health  ;  I   was  consequently  very  much   dis- 
couraged for  some  moments,  when  I  heard  that 
my  hopes  were  disappointed.     I  now,  for  the 
first  time,  saw  my  wife  very  sorrowful,  and  un- 
resolved, when  she  thought  on  the  future ;  but 
nothing  was   to  be  done  here,    but  to  resign 
ourselves  up  to  the  will  of  Providence.     In  the 
meantime,  to  keep  up  her  spirits,  I  said,  "We 
will   make  a  journey  to  Holsteinburg:  per- 
haps we  shall  meet  there  with  a  ship,  and  then 
we  can  go  home ;  if  not,  we  shall  revive  our 
spirits  among  our  friends,  and  collect  strength 
for  the  approach  of  winter.' *     I  made  my  re- 
solution known   to    Provost    Sverdrup,    who 
approved  it,  and  also  promised,  that  he  and  my 
catechist  would  take  care  of  my  mission  till  my 
successor  arrived.     He  also  promised,  that  he 
and  his  wife  would  accompany  us  some  miles 
on  our  intended  journey.     Those  of  my  Green- 
landers  who  were  still  in  the  place,  as  soon  as 
they  heard  of  my  resolution,  declared  that  they 
would  not  lose  me.     But  the  day  for  our  de- 
parture came :  I  still  remember  the  moment 


288 

when  I  got  into  the  boat,  after  having  taken  a 
most  cordial  leave  of  them.  They  all  stood 
there  with  tears  in  their  eyes,  as  if  forsaken  : 
even  my  old,  honest  assistant,  the  Catechist. 
I  looked  at  them,  not  without  some  self-re- 
proach, but  necessity  commanded.  1  prayed 
for  God's  blessing"  on  all  present  and  absent,  and 
ordered  the  boat  to  put  off  from  shore  ;  but  I 
did  not  feel  at  ease. 

We  arrived  at  Egedesminde:  my  worthy 
friend  could  not  accompany  us  any  farther  ; 
but  he  absolutely  would  not  permit  me,  as  it 
was  my  intention,  to  travel  without  any  com- 
panions55. His  care  procured  us  a  family,  who 
were  going  a  part  of  our  way  to  the  hollibut 
fishery  ;  and  the  company  of  this  family,  next 
to  God,  was  our  deliverance.  Our  last  fare- 
wel  was  affecting  and  cordial.  Both  of  us 
felt  that  we   should  miss  each  other56.     My 

(55)  He  had  already  ouce  travelled  this  way,  and  knew  bet- 
ter than  I,  what  might  happen  to  me. 

(56)  Provost  Jbrgen  Sverdrup,  a  man  of  an  enlightened 
mind,  possessed  much  solid  knowledge,  and  a  noble,  warm, 
and  faithful  heart.  He  was  in  Greenland  six  years  before  me, 
and  remained  there  some  years  after  me.  I  owe  very  much  to 
him,  and  his  disinterested  friendship.  T  learned,  particularly 
from  him,  and  by  attending  to  his  performance  of  his  func- 
tions, what  it  was  to  be  a  minister  in  Greenland,     In  Norway 


289 
women's  boat  was  indeed  heavily  laden  with 
our  most  necessary  things,  in  case  an  opportu- 
nity should  offer  to  return  home  ;  but  the  very 
mild  weather  gave  us  courage  to  pass  over 
a  creek  about  a  mile  broad,  without  keeping 
close  in  shore.  This  was  in  itself  no  great 
risk,  if  there  had  been  nothing  else  in  the  way  ; 
but  in  sailing  into  the  creek,  we  had  touched, 
though  very  gently,  upon  a  shoal.  The  col- 
lision made  a  hole  in  the  bottom  of  my  boat, 
it  let  in  water,  and  continually  became  hea- 
vier. The  others,  in  the  women's  boat,  which 
was  ahead  of  us,  called  out  to  us,  when  we 
were  in  the  middle  of  the  creek,  "  You  are 
sinking  !"  They  turned  round,  laid  their 
boat  alongside  of  us,  and  s\id,  "  Come  in, 
Priest,  with  your  wife  and  son,  or  else  you  will 
be  gone." — "  Shall  we  then  be  saved  ?"  asked 
I :  "  shall  all  these  people,  who  on  my  account 
are  in  the  same  danger,  perish  ?  I  will  not  pur- 
chase our  lives  so  dearly,  but  will  quickly 
throw  all  my  things  overboard,  and  thus  the 
boat   will  be  lightened." — "  No  !  no  !"  cried 

he  did  good,  and  spread  happiness,  as  he  had  done  in  Green- 
land. Summoned  home,  he  enjoys  now  the  blessed  reward  of 
fidelity. 

PP 


290 
they.  "  Come  !  we  can  take  so  much  into 
our  boat,  that  they  may  lade  out  the  water  : 
if  we  then  immediately  take  it  in  tow,  there 
will  be  no  danger  ;  because,  if  the  boat  at 
last  sinks  near  the  shore,  we  can  save  the  peo- 
ple." During  this  conversation,  a  part  of  my 
goods  were  already  taken  into  their  boat,  and 
we  immediately  got  into  it.  The  steersman 
unladed  the  water,  the  women  rowed,  the  others 
towed,  and  so  we  reached  the  land  within  a 
cable's  length,  when  my  boat  sunk.  The  peo- 
ple escaped  unhurt  ;  but  the  things  which  were 
still  in  the  boat  were  so  soaked  by  the  water, 
that  we  were  obliged  to  stop  a  whole  day  to 
dry  every  thing,  even  the  books,  upon  the 
rocks.  As  soon  as  this  was  done,  as  well  as 
circumstances  would  admit,  and  our  boat  re- 
paired, we  again  put  off  from  shore,  and  at 
last  arrived  at  Holsteinburg,  where  we  were 
received  with  sincere  joy  ;  and  during  the  space 
of  some  weeks,  we  enjoyed  here,  in  a  circle  of 
relations  and  friends,  many  pleasures  that  re- 
freshed us,  both  in  body  and  mind. 

A  small  fishing  vessel  had  been  in  the  har- 
bour, and  was  expected  to  return  before  its 
final  departure  :  it  came,  and  the  captain  was 


291 
willing"  to  take  us  with  him.  On  the  23d  of 
August,  we  took  the  tenderest  leave  of  our 
friends,  and  went  on  board.  The  wind  was 
favourable,  the  anchor  was  weighed,  we  were 
soon  in  the  open  sea.  For  the  most  part,  the 
wind  was  pretty  good,  but  sometimes  violent. 
If  I  except,  that  my  wife  was  the  whole  time 
sea  sick,  and  that  I  myself  one  day,  when  the 
sea  ran  high,  was  nearly  washed  overboard, 
by  venturing"  to  a  place  where  I  had  nothing 
to  do,  we  met  with  no  remarkable  accident 
before  we  reached  Hetland.  For  several  days 
we  had  not  seen  the  sun  at  noon,  and  therefore 
did  not  exactly  know  where  we  were.  The  cap- 
tain, the  pilot,  and  two  or  three  sailors  who 
had  passed  examination  as  pilots,  pricked  a 
chart,  and  it  appeared  afterwards  that  they 
were  tolerably  correct.  On  the  20th  of  Sep- 
tember, the  captain  said  to  me,  "  According 
to  our  reckoning,  we  must  see  Hetland  to-day.' ' 
Towards  noon,  we  in  fact  g"ot  sight  of  land  ; 
but,  in  the  fog",  it  looked  like  a  little  island  in 
the  clouds.  The  captain  maintained  that  it 
was  Hetland  ;  the  others  doubted  it,  and  took  it 
rather  to  be  the  Orkney  Islands.  The  majority 
of  voices  was  followed,  and  the  course  chang-ed 


292 
accordingly  ;  but  the  captain  at  the  same  time 
put  a  sailor  in  the  mast,  and  another  in  the 
forepart  of  the  ship,  to  be  on  the  look  out,  and 
to  give  notice.  At  four  o'clock  in  the  after- 
noon, while  the  captain  was  sitting-  in  the  cabin, 
with  his  chart  before  him,  the  two  sailors  cried 
out,  "  We  are  close  to  land  !"  The  captain 
was  on  the  deck  as  quick  as  lightning,  and  I 
followed  him  to  learn  our  situation.  Hetland 
lay  before  us  ;  but  it  was  on  the  east  side, 
which  is  a  perpendicular  wall  of  rock,  and  from 
this  we  were  scarcely  two  cables  length  distant, 
and  besides  surrounded  with  numerous  shoals. 
The  captain  immediately  gave  orders  to  tack, 
and  the  heavy  laden  ship  obeyed  the  helm  with 
astonishing  quickness.  We  tacked  between  the 
shoals,  and  came,  God  be  praised,  again  into 
the  open  sea.  Ten  minutes  later,  it  would  have 
been  impossible  to  save  us.  The  captain's 
reckoning  was  therefore  the  most  correct  ;  the 
opinion  of  the  majority  is  not  always  to  be 
depended  on.  On  the  following  morning, 
we  took  the  course  which  he  was  going  to  take 
the  day  before,  namely,  to  the  west  of  Het- 
land, and  came,  with  variable  winds,  through 
the  North  Sea  by   Skagen57,    cast  anchor  off 

(57)  A  little  town  on  the  north  point  of  Jutland. — Fries. 


293 
Gilleleie58,  and  on  the  following1  day  off  Horn- 
bek58,  where  we  let  ourselves  be  put  on  shore, 
as  the  wind  continued  unfavourable.  On  the 
evening  of  the  same  day  (the  3d  of  October)  we 
came  from  Elsinore  to  Copenhagen,  where  I 
was  received  by  most  of  my  superiors  with 
evident  coolness. 


(58)  Fishing  villages  on  the  north  coast  of  Zealand  ;  the  lat- 
ter about  a  mile  and  a  half  from  Elsinore. — Fries. 


The,   end. 


J.  CompN.n,  Printer,  Middle  Strtrt,  cloth  Fair,  London. 


PUBLICATIONS 

OF 

BOOSEY  AND  SONS, 

BROAD  STREET,   ROYAL    EXCHANGE,    LONDON. 

Blaine's  Veterinary  Art  (New  Edition) . 

THE  OUTLINES  of  the  VETERINARY  ART;  or,  the  Prii> 
ciples  of  Medicine,  as  applied  to  the  Structure,  Functions,  and 
(Economy  of  the  Horse,  and  to  a  more  scientific  and  successful 
Manner  of  treating  his  various  Diseases :  comprehending,  also,  a 
concise  View  of  those  of  Neat  Cattle  and  Sheep.  The  whole  illus- 
trated by  anatomical  and  other  Plates.  By  DELABERE  BLAINE. 
The  Second  Edition,  entirely  recomposed,  with  numerous  Alterations, 
important  Additions,  and  new  Plates.  In  one  thick  vol.  8vo,  price 
11.  Is.  boards. 

Blaine's  Canine  Pathology. 

CANINE  PATHOLOGY,  or  a  Full  Description  of  the  DIS- 
EASES of  DOGS ;  with  their  Causes,  Symptoms,  and  Mode  of 
Cure;  being  the  Whole  of  the  Author's  Curative  Practice,  during 
Twenty  Years'  extensive  Experience.  Interspersed  with  numerous 
Remarks  on  the  general  Treatment  of  these  Animals ;  and  preceded 
by  an  Introductory  Chapter  on  the  Moral  Qualities  of  the  Dog. 
By  DELABERE  BLAINE.  With  Wood  Cuts,8vo,  price  7s.  6d.  bds. 

Fortune  on  the  Funds  (Ninth  Edition) . 
An  EPITOME  of  the  STOCKS  and  PUBLIC  FUNDS ;  contain- 
ing every  necessary  Information  respecting  those  Securities,  and  the 
Mode  of  doing  Business  therein  :  with  »  copious  Equation  Table, 
exhibiting  the  Value  the  different  Stocks  and  Funds  bear  to  each 
other,  the  Value  of  Land,  and  the  several  Prices  at  which  the  same 
Interest  is  made  in  either.  Also  an  Appendix,  containing  the  Ame- 
rican and  French  Funds.  Carefully  revised  to  the  present  Time,  by 
a  MEMBER  of  the  STOCK  EXCHANGE,  price  2s.  6d. 

Fortune's  History  of  the  Bank. 
A    Concise    and    Authentic    HISTORY    of    the    BANK    of 
ENGLAND ;  with  their  Charter.     By  T.  FORTUNE.     Third  Edi- 
tion, with  considerable  Additions,  price  2s.  6d.  boards. 

Kauffman's  Dictionary  of  Merchandize. 
The  DICTIONARY  of  MERCHANDIZE,  and  Nomenclature  in 
All  European  Languages,  for  the  Use  of  Counting-Houses,  &c.  con- 
taining the  History,  Places  of  Growth,  Culture,  Use,  and  Marks  of 
Excellency,  of  such  Natural  Productions  as  form  Articles  of  Com- 
merce. By  C.  H.  KAUFFMAN.  Fourth  Edition,  considerably 
enlarged  and  improved  by  an  Alphabetical  Arrangement  of  all  Eu- 
ropean Foreign  Names  of  Merchandize,  with  their  Translation  into 
the  English  Language,  by  theEditor  of  the  u  Commercial  Dictionary," 
and  "Foreign  Prices  Current  of  Europe."  8vo.  price  12s.  boards. 

Sugden's  Guide  to  France  and  the  Netherlands. 
The  TRAVELLER'S  GUIDE,  by  12  Routes  to  Paris,  Brussels, 
Amsterdam,  &c.  containing  recent  and  useful  Information  on  every 
Subject  connected  with  a  Journey  to  the  Continent,  not  to  be  found 
in  any  similar  Publication ;  to  which  is  added  the  Route  to  Geneva, 
Lausanne,  and  Neufchatcl,  and  a  very  accurate  Map  of  the  Roads, 
12mo.  price  4s.  boards. 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 

Los  Angeles 

This  book  is  DUE  on  the  last  date  stamped  below. 


ft  JM 


IAI 


h  2  1973 


°EC0  8,985 


APR091J 


WW  01 

REC'DYRL   m 


)    O  A    *- «vj 


2JJU3 


Form  L9-42»*-8,'49(B5573)444 


AA      000109  568    6 


6 


58  01062  6702 


University  of  California 

SOUTHERN  REGIONAL  LIBRARY  FACILITY 

405  Hilgard  Avenue,  Los  Angeles,  CA  90024-1388 

Return  this  material  to  the  library 

from  which  it  was  borrowed.